Yamaha | PF-1000 | Owner`s manual | Yamaha PF-1000 Owner`s manual

Owner's Manual
Yamaha Web Site (English only)
www.yamahasynth.com
Before using the PF-1000, be sure to read “Precautions„ on pages 3-4.
IMPORTANT
Yamaha Manual Library
http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/
This document is printed on recycled chlorine free (ECF) paper with soy ink.
Check your power supply
Make sure that your local AC mains voltage matches the voltage specified on the name plate
on the bottom panel. In some areas a voltage selector may be provided on the bottom panel of
the main keyboard unit. Make sure that the voltage selector is set for the voltage in your area. The
voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. To change the setting use a
"minus" screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage appears next to the
pointer on the panel.
M.D.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation
C 2002 Yamaha Corporation
V939640 205APAP1.3-01A0 Printed in Japan
DIC 338
Introduction
SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION
PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS: Yamaha electronic
products may have either labels similar to the graphics
shown below or molded/stamped facsimiles of these
graphics on the enclosure. The explanation of these
graphics appears on this page. Please observe all cautions
indicated on this page and those indicated in the safety
instruction section.
Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non-
rechargable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in
place. The average life span of this type of battery is
approximately five years. When replacement becomes
necessary, contact a qualified service representative to
perform the replacement.
Warning: Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or
incinerate this type of battery. Keep all batteries away
from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as
regulated by applicable laws. Note: In some areas, the
servicer is required by law to return the defective parts.
However, you do have the option of having the servicer
dispose of these parts for you.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK.
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged
See bottom of Keyboard enclosure for graphic symbol markings.
The exclamation point within the
equilateral triangle is intended to alert
the user to the presence of important
operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature
accompanying the product.
The lightning flash with arrowhead
symbol, within the equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the
presence of uninsulated “dangerous
voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electrical
shock.
beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and
federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products
that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc.
NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to lack of knowl-
edge relating to how a function or effect works (when the
unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult
your dealer before requesting service.
NAME PLATE LOCATION: The graphic below indicates the location of the name plate. The model number,
serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on
this plate. You should record the model number, serial
number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided
below and retain this manual as a permanent record of
your purchase.
IIMPORTANT NOTICE: All Yamaha electronic prod-
ucts are tested and approved by an independent safety
testing laboratory in order that you may be sure that when
it is properly installed and used in its normal and customary manner, all foreseeable risks have been eliminated.
DO NOT modify this unit or commission others to do so
unless specifically authorized by Yamaha. Product performance and/or safety standards may be diminished.
Claims filed under the expressed warranty may be denied
if the unit is/has been modified. Implied warranties may
also be affected.
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The
information contained in this manual is believed to be
correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves
the right to change or modify any of the specifications
without notice or obligation to update existing units.
PF-1000
Model
Serial No.
Purchase Date
ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmentally
friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the
production methods used to produce them, meet these
goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the
law, we want you to be aware of the following:
92-469 1
2
PF-1000
PRECAUTIONS
PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING
* Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.
WARNING
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even
death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions
include, but are not limited to, the following:
Power supply/Power cord
Water warning
• Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The
•
•
•
• Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in
required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument.
Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust
which may have accumulated on it.
Use only the supplied power cord/plug.
Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters
or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage
the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where
anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it.
•
damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings.
Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.
Fire warning
• Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit.
A burning item may fall over and cause a fire.
If you notice any abnormality
Do not open
• If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there
• Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the inter-
is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any
unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it,
immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the electric
plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
nal parts or modify them in any way. The instrument contains no
user-serviceable parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning,
discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified
Yamaha service personnel.
CAUTION
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or
others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited
to, the following:
Power supply/Power cord
Location
• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet,
•
•
• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or
always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord
can damage it.
Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is
not to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical
storms.
Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector.
Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause
overheating in the outlet.
•
•
•
•
Assembling the keyboard stand
• Read carefully this manual or the attached documentation
extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or
in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components.
Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo
equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise,
the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise.
Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it
might accidentally fall over.
Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables.
Do not place objects in front of the instrument’s air vent, since
this may prevent adequate ventilation of the internal components, and possibly result in the instrument overheating.
explaining the assembly process.
Failure to assemble the stand in the proper sequence might
result in damage to the instrument or even injury.
(1)B-7
1/2
PF-1000
3
Connections
Using the bench (If included)
• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic compo-
• Do not place the bench in an unstable position where it might
nents, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the
power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all components at their
minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while
playing the instrument to set the desired listening level.
accidentally fall over.
• Do not play carelessly with or stand on the bench. Using it as a
•
•
Maintenance
• When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry or slightly damp
cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or
chemical-impregnated wiping cloths.
Saving data
Saving and backing up your data
Handling caution
• Current memory data (see page 39) is lost when you turn off the
• Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the
•
•
•
tool or step-ladder or for any other purpose might result in accident or injury.
Only one person should sit on the bench at a time, in order to
prevent the possibility of accident or injury.
If the bench screws become loose due to extensive long-term
use, tighten them periodically using the included tool.
power to the instrument. Save the data to a floppy disk/the User
Drive (see page 39).
Saved data may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation. Save important data to a floppy disk.
gaps on the panel or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the
power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument,
since this might discolor the panel or keyboard.
Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or
connectors.
Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high
or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent
hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the
ears, consult a physician.
When you change settings in a display page and then exit
from that page, System Setup data (listed in the Parameter
Chart of the separate Data List booklet) is automatically
stored. However, this edited data is lost if you turn off the
power without properly exiting from the relevant display.
Backing up the floppy disk
• To protect against data loss through media damage, we recommend that you save your important data onto two floppy disks.
Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.
Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.
(1)B-7
4
PF-1000
2/2
Thank you for purchasing the Yamaha PF-1000 electronic piano! We
recommend that you read this manual carefully so that you can fully take
advantage of the advanced and convenient functions of the PF-1000. We also
recommend that you keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future
reference.
About this Owner’s Manual and Data List
This manual consists of four main sections: Introduction, Quick Guide, Basic Operation, and Reference.
Also, a separate Data List is provided.
Introduction (page 2): Please read this section first.
Quick Guide (page 20): This section explains how to use the basic functions.
Basic Operation (page 38): This section explains how to use the basic operations including display-based controls.
Reference (page 52): This section explains how to make detailed settings for the PF-1000’s various functions.
Data List : Voice List, MIDI Data Format, etc.
* The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear
somewhat different from those on your instrument.
* The example Operation Guide displays shown in this Manual are in English.
* The bitmap fonts used in this instrument have been provided by and are the property of Ricoh co., Ltd.
* Copying of the commercially available software is strictly prohibited except for your personal use.
COPYRIGHT NOTICE
This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has
license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, styles files, MIDI files, WAVE
data and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant
laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES.
Trademarks:
• Apple and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.
• IBM-PC/AT is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
• Windows is the registered trademark of Microsoft® Corporation.
• All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders.
PF-1000
5
Accessories
■ “50 greats for the Piano” Disk (and Music Book)
■ Recording disk
■ Owner’s Manual
■ Data List
■ Pedal Unit
■ Bench (included or optional depending on locale)
■ Dust Cover
■ Music Rest
■ Keyboard Stand
Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and
Floppy Disk
Precautions
Be sure to handle floppy disks and treat the disk drive with care. Follow the important precautions below.
Compatible Disk Type
• 3.5" 2DD and 2HD type floppy disks can be used.
Inserting/Ejecting Floppy Disks
To insert a floppy disk into the disk drive:
• Hold the disk so that the label of the disk is facing
upward and the sliding shutter is facing forward,
towards the disk slot. Carefully insert the disk into the
slot, slowly pushing it all the way in until it clicks into
place and the eject button pops out.
To eject a floppy disk:
Before ejecting the disk, be sure to confirm that data
is not being written to the floppy disk.
If data is currently being written to the floppy disk in
the following operations, the messages “Now
executing,” “Now copying,” and “Now formatting”
appears in the display.
• Moving, copying, pasting, saving, or deleting data
(page 42 - 44).
• Naming files and folders (page 41); creating a new
folder (page 44).
• Copying a disk to an another disk (page 139);
formatting the disk (page 139).
Eject button
Drive lamp
When the power is turned on, the drive lamp (at the bottom
left of the drive) lights to indicate the drive can be used.
6
PF-1000
• Never attempt to remove the disk or turn the power off
when the data is being written to the floppy disk.
Doing so can damage the disk and possibly the disk
drive. Press the eject button slowly as far as it will go;
the disk will automatically pop out. When the disk is
fully ejected, carefully remove it by hand.
• If the eject button is pressed too quickly, or if it is not
pressed in as far as it will go, the disk may not eject
properly. The eject button may become stuck in a halfpressed position with the disk extending from the
drive slot by only a few millimeters. If this happens, do
not attempt to pull out the partially ejected disk, since
using force in this situation can damage the disk drive
mechanism or the floppy disk. To remove a partially
ejected disk, try pressing the eject button once again,
or push the disk back into the slot and then repeat the
eject procedure.
• Be sure to remove the floppy disk from the disk drive
before turning off the power. A floppy disk left in the
drive for extended periods can easily pick up dust and
dirt that can cause data read and write errors.
• Never use a floppy disk with a deformed shutter or
housing.
• Do not attach anything other than the provided labels
to a floppy disk. Also make sure that labels are
attached in the proper location.
To protect your data (Write-protect Tab):
• To prevent accidental erasure of important data, slide
the disk’s write-protect tab to the “protect” position
(tab open).
write-protect tab open
(protect position)
Data backup
Cleaning the Disk Drive Read/Write Head
• Clean the read/write head regularly. This instrument
employs a precision magnetic read/write head which,
after an extended period of use, will pick up a layer of
magnetic particles from the disks used that will
eventually cause read and write errors.
• To maintain the disk drive in optimum working order
Yamaha recommends that you use a commerciallyavailable dry-type head cleaning disk to clean the
head about once a month. Ask your Yamaha dealer
about the availability of proper head-cleaning disks.
• Never insert anything but floppy disks into the disk
drive. Other objects may cause damage to the disk
drive or floppy disks.
• For maximum data security Yamaha recommends that
you keep two copies of important data on separate
floppy disks. This gives you a backup if one disk is lost
or damaged. To make a backup disk use the Disk to
Disk function on page 139.
About the Floppy Disks
To handle floppy disks with care:
• Do not place heavy objects on a disk or bend or apply
pressure to the disk in any way. Always keep floppy
disks in their protective cases when they are not in
use.
• Do not expose the disk to direct sunlight, extremely
high or low temperatures, or excessive humidity, dust
or liquids.
• Do not open the sliding shutter and touch the exposed
surface of the floppy disk inside.
• Do not expose the disk to magnetic fields, such as
those produced by televisions, speakers, motors, etc.,
since magnetic fields can partially or completely erase
data on the disk, rendering it unreadable.
PF-1000
7
About the Display Messages
A message (information or confirmation dialog) sometimes appears on the screen to
facilitate operation.
When such messages appear, simply follow the instructions as shown by pressing the
corresponding button.
You can select the desired
language from the Help display (page 49).
F
G
H
I
J
8
PF-1000
For this example, press the
[G] (YES) button to
execute formatting.
Table of Contents
Introduction
SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION ................................... 2
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3
About this Owner’s Manual and Data List .............. 5
Accessories ............................................................... 6
Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD)
and Floppy Disk..................................................... 6
About the Display Messages.................................... 8
Application Index ................................................... 12
What can you do with the PF-1000?...................... 14
Setting Up the PF-1000.......................................... 16
About the pedal unit ............................................................... 16
About the music rest ............................................................... 16
Turning the Power On and Off................................................ 16
Using headphones .................................................................. 17
Panel Controls and Terminals................................ 18
Quick Guide
Playing the Demos ................................................. 20
Song Playback ........................................................ 21
Help Messages........................................................ 49
Using the Metronome............................................ 50
Adjusting the Tempo ............................................. 50
Tap Tempo ............................................................. 51
Reference
Playing the Demos .................52
Voices.....................................54
Selecting a Voice .................................................... 54
One-touch Piano Play.............................................. 55
Layer/Left — Playing Several Sounds
Simultaneously .................................................... 56
Layer — Layering Two Different Voices ................... 56
Left — Setting Separate Voices for the Left
and Right Sections of the Keyboard ..................... 57
Applying Voice Effects ........................................... 57
Using the Pedals..................................................... 58
Playback of Songs ....................................................21
Playing Voices ........................................................ 25
Playing a Voice ........................................................25
Playing Two Voices Simultaneously ..........................26
Playing Different Voices with the Left
and Right Hands ...................................................27
Playing Styles ......................................................... 28
Playing a style ..........................................................28
Style Sections...........................................................30
One Touch Setting...................................................32
Music Finder........................................................... 33
Using the Music Finder ............................................33
Searching the Music Finder Records.........................34
Saving and Recalling Music Finder Data ...................35
Playing and Practicing with the Songs.................. 36
Styles......................................59
Playing a style ........................................................ 59
Playing a Style’s Rhythm Channels only .................. 61
Adjusting the Volume Balance/Channel Muting ...... 61
Chord Fingerings.................................................... 62
Arranging the Style Pattern (SECTIONS:
MAIN A/B/C/D, INTRO, ENDING, BREAK) ...................64
Stopping the Style Playback While Releasing Keys
(SYNC. STOP) ...................................................... 65
Selecting Intro and Ending Types
(INTRO/ENDING) ................................................ 66
Playing Fill-in patterns automatically when changing
accompaniment sections — Auto Fill In................ 66
Playing Along with the PF-1000 ...............................36
Recording ................................................................37
Appropriate Panel Setting for the Selected
Style (ONE TOUCH SETTING)......................................67
Basic Operations
— Organizing Your Data ....... 38
Automatically Changing One Touch Settings
with the Sections — OTS Link .............................. 68
Registering the Panel Controls in One Touch
Setting (ONE TOUCH SETTING)........................... 68
Selecting Files and Folders..................................... 40
File/Folder-related Operations .............................. 41
Calling Up Ideal Setups for Your Music
— Music Finder.................................................... 69
Searching the Ideal Setups — Music Finder Search .... 70
Naming Files/Folders ...............................................41
Moving Files/Folders ................................................42
Copying Files/Folders...............................................43
Deleting Files/Folders...............................................43
Saving Files ..............................................................44
Organizing Files by Creating a New Folder ..............44
Displaying Upper Level pages ..................................44
Entering Characters and Changing Icons .................44
Editing Records — Music Finder Record Edit ........... 71
Using the [DATA ENTRY] Dial................................ 46
Direct Access — Instant Selection of Displays....... 47
PF-1000
9
Song Playback ....................... 73
Compatible Song Types ......................................... 73
Song Playback ........................................................ 74
Playing the Internal Songs........................................74
Playing Back Songs on Disk......................................76
Other Playback-related Operations...........................76
Muting Specific Parts
— Track1/Track2/Extra Tracks............................ 77
Repeat Playback of a Specific Range ..................... 77
Displaying Music Notation — Score ...................... 78
Displaying the Lyrics .............................................. 81
Saving and Recalling Custom
Panel Setups
— Registration Memory ....... 82
Registering Panel Setups
— Registration Memory...................................... 82
Saving Your Registration Memory Setups .................83
Recalling a Registration Memory Setup ................ 84
Editing Voices
— Sound Creator ................... 85
Operation ............................................................... 85
SOUND CREATOR Parameters ............................... 86
Recording Your Performances
and Creating Songs
— Song Creator ..................... 90
About Song Recording........................................... 90
Quick Recording..................................................... 91
Multi Recording ..................................................... 92
Recording Individual Notes — Step Record .......... 94
Operation ................................................................94
Recording Melodies — Step Record (Note) ..............96
Recording Chord Changes for the Auto Accompaniment — Step Record (Chord) ...............................97
Select the Recording Options: Starting, Stopping,
Punching In/Out — Rec Mode............................ 99
Editing a Recorded Song ..................................... 100
Editing Channel-related Parameters — Channel .....100
Editing Note Events — 1 - 16.................................103
Editing Chord Events — CHD.................................104
Editing System Events
— SYS/EX. (System Exclusive) .............................104
Inputting and Editing Lyrics ...................................105
Customizing the Event List — Filter........................105
Creating Accompaniment
Styles — Style Creator .........106
About Creating Accompaniment Styles............... 106
Style File Format................................................... 107
Operation ............................................................. 107
Realtime Recording — Basic ................................ 108
Step Recording..................................................... 109
Assembling an Accompaniment Style —Assembly.. 110
Edit the Created Accompaniment Style .............. 111
Change the Rhythmic Feel
— Groove and Dynamics ................................... 111
Editing the Channel Data ...................................... 113
Making Style File Format Settings —Parameter ..... 114
Adjust the Volume Balance
and Changing Voices
— Mixing Console ................116
Operation ............................................................. 116
Setting the Level Balance and Voice
— Volume/Voice ............................................... 117
Changing the Tone of the Voice — Filter............ 118
Changing Pitch-related Settings — Tune ............ 118
Adjusting the Effects ............................................ 119
Effect Structure ..................................................... 121
Making Global and Other
Important Settings
— Function...........................122
Operation ............................................................. 122
Fine Tuning the Pitch/Selecting a Scale
— Master Tune/Scale Tune............................... 124
Tuning the Overall Pitch — Master Tune............... 124
Selecting a Scale — Scale Tune ............................. 124
Setting Song-related Parameters
— Song Settings................................................ 126
Setting Auto Accompaniment-related
Parameters — Style Setting, Split Point,
and Chord Fingering......................................... 127
Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters
— Style Setting and Split Point .......................... 127
Setting the Fingering Method — Chord Fingering... 128
Making Settings for the Pedals and Keyboard
— Controller...................................................... 128
Making Settings for the Pedals .............................. 128
Changing the Touch Sensitivity and Transpose
— Keyboard/Panel ............................................. 130
Setting the Registration Sequence, Freeze,
and Voice Set..................................................... 131
Specifying the Order for Calling Up Registration
Memory Presets — Registration Sequence.......... 131
Maintaining Panel Settings — Freeze .................... 131
Changing the Automatically Selected Voice
Settings — Voice Set.......................................... 132
10
PF-1000
Setting Harmony and Echo.................................. 132
Showing the PF-1000 Display on a TV
— Video Out...................................................... 133
Setting the MIDI Parameters ............................... 134
Making Overall System Settings
(Local Control, Clock, etc.) — System.................134
Transmitting MIDI Data — Transmit ......................135
Receiving MIDI Data — Receive .............................136
Setting Root Note Channels — Root ......................136
Setting Chord Channels — Chord Detect ..............136
Other Settings — Utility ...................................... 137
Making Settings for Fade In/Out, Metronome,
Parameter Lock, and Tap — CONFIG 1...............137
Making Settings for the Display, Speaker System,
and Voice Number Indication — CONFIG 2........138
Copying and Formatting Disks — Disk ...................139
Entering Your Name and Language Preference
— Owner............................................................140
Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings
of the PF-1000 — System Reset ..........................140
Introduction
Quick Guide
Basic Operations - Organizing Your Data
Playing the Demos
Voices
Using Your PF-1000 with Other
Devices................................. 141
Using the Headphones (PHONES jacks)..................141
Connecting the Microphone or Guitar
(MIC/LINE IN jack)..............................................141
Connecting Audio & Video Devices .......................142
Using the Pedal (footswitch) or Foot Controller
(AUX PEDAL jack) ...............................................143
Connecting external MIDI devices
(MIDI terminals) .................................................143
Connecting to a Computer
(MIDI terminals/TO HOST terminal)....................143
What’s MIDI? .........................................................145
What You Can Do With MIDI .................................147
Data Compatibility............................................... 148
Disk format ............................................................148
Sequence Format...................................................148
Voice Allocation Format .........................................149
Assembling the Keyboard
Stand ................................... 150
Troubleshooting.................. 152
Styles
Song Playback
Saving and Recalling Custom
Panel Setups - Registration Memory
Editing Voices - Sound Creator
Recording Your Performances
and Creating Songs - Song Creator
Creating Accompaniment Styles
- Style Creator
Adjust the Volume Balance
and Changing Voices - Mixing Console
Making Global and Other Important
Settings - Function
Specifications ...................... 154
Using Your PF-1000 with Other Devices
Index ................................... 156
Appendix
PF-1000
11
Application Index
Use this index to find reference pages that may be helpful for your particular
application and situation.
Listening
Listening to the internal songs ................................................................................................................ page 74
Listening to disk songs ....................................................................... “Playing Back Songs on Disk” on page 76
Listening to demo songs......................................................................................................................... page 52
Listening to the demo of the selected voices .......................................................................................... page 54
Listening to songs with the special voices of the PF-1000..................................................................... page 117
Playing
Calling up the piano setting ................................................................................................................... page 55
Using the three performance control pedals........................................................................................... page 58
Playing an accompaniment that matches pitch..................................................“Transpose Assign” on page 130
Combining two voices ...................................................... “Layer — Layering Two Different Voices” on page 56
Playing separate voices with the right and left hands
...........................“Left — Setting Separate Voices for the Left and Right Sections of the Keyboard” on page 57
Changing the sound
Enhancing the sound with reverb and other effects .....................................“Applying Voice Effects” on page 57
.................................................................................................................“Adjusting the Effects” on page 119
Adjusting the Level Balance ................................................................................................................. page 117
Combining two voices ...................................................... “Layer — Layering Two Different Voices” on page 56
Playing separate voices with the right and left hands
...........................“Left — Setting Separate Voices for the Left and Right Sections of the Keyboard” on page 57
Creating voices ...................................................................................................................................... page 85
Playing the auto accompaniment
Playing the accompaniment automatically ............................................................................................. page 59
Calling up ideal panel settings for your music ........................................................................................ page 69
Practicing
Muting the right- or left-hand part ................... “Muting Specific Parts — Track1/Track2/Extra Tracks” on page 77
Practicing with an accurate and steady tempo............................................. “Using the Metronome” on page 50
Recording
Recording your performance...........................................................................................................pages 91, 92
Creating a song by entering notes .......................................................................................................... page 94
Creating your original settings
Creating voices ...................................................................................................................................... page 85
Creating accompaniment styles............................................................................................................ page 106
12
PF-1000
Using a microphone
Connecting the microphone............... ”Connecting the Microphone or Guitar (MIC/LINE IN jack)” on page 141
Settings
Registering Panel Setups......................................................................................................................... page 82
Tuning the pitch/Selecting a scale ........................................................................................................ page 124
Making detailed settings for playing back songs ................................................................................... page 122
Making detailed settings for the auto accompaniment.......................................................................... page 127
Making settings for the pedals ........... “Making Settings for the Pedals and Keyboard — Controller” on page 128
Making detailed settings for the keyboard voices ................................................................................. page 130
Showing the display on a TV .......................“Showing the PF-1000 Display on a TV — Video Out” on page 133
Making detailed settings for MIDI ........................................................................................................ page 134
Connecting the PF-1000 to other devices
Basic information on MIDI..................................................................................... “What’s MIDI?” on page 145
Recording your performance...................”Playing the sounds of the PF-1000 through an external audio system,
and recording the sounds to an external recorder (AUX OUT jacks)” on page 142
Raising the volume .................................”Playing the sounds of the PF-1000 through an external audio system,
and recording the sounds to an external recorder (AUX OUT jacks)” on page 142
Outputting another instrument’s sound from the PF-1000 .............. ”Outputting the sound of an external device
through the built in speakers of the PF-1000 (AUX IN jacks)” on page 142
Connecting a computer........... .”Connecting to a Computer (MIDI terminals/TO HOST terminals)” on page 143
Assembling the keyboard stand
Using the stand .......................................................................... “Assembling the Keyboard Stand” on page 150
Quick solution
Basic functions of the PF-1000 and how you can best use it ...........................................................pages 12, 14
Resetting the PF-1000 to the default setting
............................ “Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings of the PF-1000 — System Reset” on page 140
Displaying the Messages ......................................................................“About the Display Messages” on page 8
Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................................... page 152
PF-1000
13
What can you do with the PF-1000?
DEMO
Explore the Demos
(page 20, 52)
These not only showcase the
stunning voices and styles of
the instrument, they
introduce you to the various
functions and features — and
give you hands-on
experience using the PF1000!
SONG
Playback previously recorded
songs (page 21, 36, 73)
Enjoy a wide variety of preset songs
as well as songs on commercially
available disks.
LCD
CONTRAST
MENU
DEMO
A
HELP
B
C
FUNCTION
D
DIGITAL
STUDIO
SOUND
CREATOR
FADE IN/OUT
POP & ROCK POP BALLADS
DANCE
SWING & JAZZ
R&B
COUNTRY
LATIN
MARCH &
WORLD
WALTZ
BALLROOM
PIANIST
USER
EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2
STYLE
L
DIGITAL
RECORDING
TRACK1
R
MIXING
CONSOLE
STYLE
ACMP
AUTO FILL IN
E
REC
OTS LINK
START/STOP
TOP
REW
FF
BALANCE
REPEAT
DIRECT
ACCESS
NEW SONG
BREAK
MIN
MAX
MASTER VOLUME
14
START/STOP
METRONOME
INTRO
ENDING/rit.
MAIN
A
B
C
SYNC.STOP
SYNC.START
CHANNEL
ON/OFF
SONG
START/STOP
D
STYLE CONTROL
PART
SYNC.START
TAP TEMPO
RESET
RESET
TEMPO
TRANSPOSE
STYLE
DIGITAL RECORDING
Back up your performance with Auto
Accompaniment (page 28, 59)
Record your performances
(page 90, 106)
Playing a chord with your left hand automatically
plays the auto accompaniment backing. Select an
accompaniment style — such as pop, jazz, Latin,
etc. — and let the PF-1000 be your backing band!
With the powerful and easy-to-use song
recording features, you can record your
own keyboard performances, and create
your own complete, fully orchestrated
compositions — which you can then save to
the USER drive or a floppy disk for future
recall.
PF-1000
PART
1
2
3
4
5
6
5
LCD
MUSIC FINDER
PIANO
The large LCD (together
with the various panel
buttons) provides
comprehensive and easyto-understand control of
the PF-1000’s operations.
Call up the perfect accompaniment
style (page 33, 69)
Set up the piano —
instantly (page 55)
If you know what song you want to play,
but you don’t know which style or voice
would be right for it, let the Music Finder
help you. Just select the song title, and
the PF-1000 automatically calls up the
most appropriate style and voice.
You can call up all the
optimum piano settings for
the PF-1000 with just a single
button press — then play the
extraordinarily realistic grand
piano voice.
BACK
F
NEXT
VOICE
PART
ON/OFF
LAYER
G
LEFT
H
I
MUSIC
FINDER
J
ENTER
DATA ENTRY
REVERB
DSP
VARIATION
HARMONY/
ECHO
MONO
LEFT HOLD
1
VOICE EFFECT
PIANO &
HARPSI.
ORGAN &
ACCORDION PERCUSSION
GUITAR
BASS
WOODWIND STRINGS CHOIR & PAD
SYNTH.
XG
E.PIANO
2
3
4
ONE TOUCH SETTING
PIANO
EXIT
6
7
8
BRASS
USER
FREEZE
1
2
3
4
VOICE
5
6
7
8
MEMORY
REGISTRATION MEMORY
TO HOST terminal
VOICE
Make music with a computer — quickly and easily (page 143)
Enjoy a huge variety of
realistic voices (page 25, 54)
Dive in and take advantage of the wide world of computer music
software. Connections and setup are exceptionally easy, and you can
play back your computer recorded parts with different instrument
sounds — all from a single PF-1000!
The PF-1000 features a wealth of
exceptionally authentic and
dynamic voices (more than 800)
— including piano, strings,
woodwinds, and more!
VIDEO OUT
AUX IN
L/L+R
AUX OUT
R
L/L+R
R
PHONES
POWER
ON
L LEVEL FIXED R
OFF
INPUT
VOLUME MIC/LINE IN
AC INLET
PEDAL
AUX PEDAL
MIDI
HOST SELECT
MIC LINE
TO HOST
MIDI PC-2 PC-1 Mac
MIN
IN
OUT
MAX
THRU
PF-1000
15
Setting Up the PF-1000
You do not need to install the stand to play the PF-1000. However, if you wish to assemble the stand, refer to page 150.
About the pedal unit
Insert the plug of the pedal unit, with the arrow in the
plug facing upward.
Turning the Power On
and Off
Connect the power cable.
insert the plug of the power cable into the [AC
1 First
INLET] on the left side panel, then plug the other end
of the cable into the proper AC outlet on the wall.
VIDEO
OUT
L/L+RAUX
AC INLET
IN
R
L/L+R
AUX
AC
R
INLET
OUT
L
LEVEL
FIXED
R
PEDAL
AUX
PHONE
S
PEDAL
POWER
MIDI
ON
OFF
IN
HOST
MIDI
SELECT
PC-2
OUT
PC-1
Mac
TO
HOST
THRU
VIDEO
OUT
L/L+R AUX
IN
R
L/L+R
AUX
AC
R
INLET
OUT
L
LEVEL
FIXED
R
PEDAL
AUX
PHONES
PEDAL
240V
POWER
MIDI
ON
OFF
IN
HOST
MIDI
SELECT
PC-2
OUT
PC-1
Mac
TO
HOST
220V
THRU
11
0V
13
0V
PEDAL
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
About the music rest
The PF-1000 is supplied with a music rest that can be
attached to the instrument by inserting it into the holes at
the rear of the control panel.
16
PF-1000
(The shape of plug differs depending on locale.)
WARNING
Make sure your PF-1000 is rated for the AC voltage supplied in the
area in which it is to be used (voltage rating appears on the name
plate on the bottom panel). In some areas, a voltage selector may be
provided on the bottom panel of the main keyboard unit. Make sure
that the voltage selector is set for the voltage in your area.
Connecting the unit to the wrong AC supply can cause serious
damage to the internal circuitry and may even pose a shock hazard!
Use only the AC power cord supplied with the PF-1000. If the
supplied cord is lost or damaged and needs to be replaced, contact
your Yamaha dealer. The use of an inappropriate replacement can
pose a fire and shock hazard!
The type of AC power cord provided with the PF-1000 may be
different depending on the country in which it is purchased. (In some
areas a plug adaptor may be provided to match the pin configuration
of the AC wall outlets in your area.) DO NOT modify the plug provided
with the PF-1000. If the plug will not fit the outlet, have a proper outlet
installed by a qualified electrician.
the [POWER] switch located on the left side
2 Press
panel to turn on the power.
→ The main display appears in the LCD display.
Connect a pair of headphones to one of the [PHONES]
jacks on the left side panel.
Two [PHONES] jacks are provided.
Two sets of standard stereo headphones can be plugged
in. (If you are using only one pair of headphones, you
can plug them into either of these jacks.)
POWER
ON
Using headphones
OFF
A
F
B
G
C
H
VIDEO
OUT
L/L+RAUX
IN
R
L/L+R
AUX
AC
R
INLET
OUT
L
LEVEL
D
I
E
J
FIXED
R
PEDAL
AUX
PHONE
S
PEDAL
POWER
MIDI
ON
OFF
IN
HOST
MIDI
SELECT
PC-2
OUT
PC-1
Mac
TO
HOST
THRU
When you’re ready to turn off the power, press the
[POWER] switch again.
→ The display will turn off.
VIDEO
OUT
L/L+RAUX
IN
R
L/L+R
AUX
AC
R
INLET
OUT
L
LEVEL
FIXED
R
PEDAL
AUX
PHONE
S
PEDAL
POWER
MIDI
ON
OFF
IN
HOST
MIDI
SELECT
PC-2
OUT
PC-1
Mac
TO
HOST
THRU
PHONES
Adjusting the display contrast
If the LCD is difficult to read, adjust the contrast with the
[LCD CONTRAST] knob at the left of the LCD.
LCD
CONTRAST
CAUTION
Do not use headphones at a high volume for an extended period of
time. Doing so may cause hearing loss.
Setting the volume
Use the [MASTER VOLUME] dial to adjust the volume to
an appropriate level.
MIN
MAX
MASTER VOLUME
CAUTION
Do not use the PF-1000 at a high volume level for a long period of
time, or your hearing may be damaged.
PF-1000
17
Panel Controls and Terminals
33
LCD
CONTRAST
34
MENU
DEMO
27
A
HELP
28
B
C
FUNCTION
29
D
DIGITAL
STUDIO
SOUND
CREATOR
FADE IN/OUT
30
4
2
1
POP & ROCK POP BALLADS DANCE
SWING & JAZZ
R&B
COUNTRY
MARCH &
WORLD
LATIN
WALTZ
BALLROOM
PIANIST
EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2
STYLE
L
USER
15
STYLE
AUTO FILL IN
ACMP
5
MAX
MASTER VOLUME
7
8
METRONOME
9
3
ENDING/rit.
MAIN
A
B
C
10
SYNC.STOP
SYNC.START
18 19
START/STOP
31
17
START/STOP
TOP
NEW SONG
INTRO
START/STOP
DIGITAL
RECORDING
TRACK1
R
16
REC
OTS LINK
6
BREAK
MIN
E
MIXING
CONSOLE
REW
20
SYNC.START
SONG
D
FF
21
REPEAT
22
23
35
32
36
BALANCE
DIRECT
ACCESS
PART
CHANNEL
ON/OFF
1
2
3
4
5
TAP TEMPO
12
11
STYLE CONTROL
60
13
61
VIDEO OUT
62
AUX IN
L/L+R
14
RESET
63
R
25
RESET
26
PART
TRANSPOSE
64
AUX OUT
L/L+R
R
24
TEMPO
37
71
PHONES
POWER
L LEVEL FIXED R
ON
OFF
72
73
INPUT
VOLUME MIC/LINE IN
AC INLET
PEDAL
AUX PEDAL
MIDI
38
HOST SELECT
74
MIC LINE
TO HOST
MIDI PC-2 PC-1 Mac
MIN
75
76
77
IN
65
66
MASTER VOLUME
[MASTER VOLUME] dial ................................................P. 17
2 [FADE IN / OUT] button ..................................................P. 65
1
METRONOME
3
[START / STOP] button (METRONOME)........................P. 50
STYLE
4
STYLE buttons ...............................................................P. 59
STYLE CONTROL
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
[ACMP] button ................................................................P. 60
[AUTO FILLIN] button .....................................................P. 66
[OTS LINK] button ..........................................................P. 68
[BREAK] button ..............................................................P. 64
[INTRO] button .........................................................P. 31, 66
MAIN [A] – [D] buttons....................................................P. 64
[ENDING / rit.] button................................................P. 31, 66
[SYNC.STOP] button ......................................................P. 65
[SYNC.START] button ....................................................P. 60
[START / STOP] button (STYLE CONTROL) .................P. 60
SONG
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
[EXTRA TRACKS (STYLE)] button ................................P. 77
[TRACK 2 (L)] button ......................................................P. 77
[TRACK 1 (R)] button .....................................................P. 77
[REC] button ...................................................................P. 90
[TOP] button ...................................................................P. 76
[START / STOP] button (SONG).....................................P. 74
[REW] button ..................................................................P. 76
[FF] button ......................................................................P. 76
[REPEAT] button.............................................................P. 77
TEMPO
24
25
[–] [+] buttons (TEMPO) .................................................P. 50
[TAP TEMPO] button ......................................................P. 51
TRANSPOSE
26
18
[–] [+] buttons (TRANSPOSE) ......................................P. 130
PF-1000
OUT
67
68
MAX
THRU
69
70
MENU
[DEMO] button................................................................P. 52
[HELP] button .................................................................P. 49
29 [FUNCTION] button ......................................................P. 122
27
28
DIGITAL STUDIO
[SOUND CREATOR] button............................................P. 85
[DIGITAL RECORDING] button ..............................P. 90, 106
32 [MIXING CONSOLE] button .........................................P. 116
30
31
DISPLAY CONTROL
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
[LCD CONTRAST] knob.................................................P. 17
[A] - [J] buttons ...............................................................P. 40
[DIRECT ACCESS] button .............................................P. 47
[BALANCE] button..........................................................P. 61
[CHANNEL ON / OFF] button...................................P. 61, 76
[1▲▼] - [8▲▼] buttons ............................................P. 38 - 45
[BACK] button...........................................................P. 40, 46
[NEXT] button ...........................................................P. 40, 46
[ENTER] button ..............................................................P. 46
[DATA ENTRY] dial .........................................................P. 46
[EXIT] button...................................................................P. 40
VOICE PART ON/OFF
44
45
[LAYER] button ...............................................................P. 56
[LEFT] button..................................................................P. 56
MUSIC FINDER
46
[MUSIC FINDER] button.................................................P. 69
47
Floppy disk drive (3.5”) .....................................................P. 6
VOICE EFFECT
48
49
50
51
52
53
[REVERB] button............................................................P. 57
[DSP] button ...................................................................P. 57
[VARIATION] button........................................................P. 57
[HARMONY / ECHO] button...........................................P. 58
[MONO] button ...............................................................P. 58
[LEFT HOLD] button.......................................................P. 58
39 40
BACK
34
F
NEXT
VOICE
PART
ON/OFF
LAYER
G
LEFT
H
I
J
44
45
MUSIC
FINDER
46
ENTER
41
DATA ENTRY
48
49
50
REVERB
DSP
VARIATION
51
HARMONY/
ECHO
52
53
MONO
LEFT HOLD
1
2
3
4
55
47
EXIT
5
6
7
8
42
43
VOICE EFFECT
PIANO &
HARPSI.
E.PIANO
BRASS
WOODWIND STRINGS CHOIR & PAD
VOICE
VOICE buttons................................................................P. 54
ONE TOUCH SETTING
55
[1] - [4] buttons (ONE TOUCH SETTING) ......................P. 67
PIANO Setting
56
ONE TOUCH SETTING
GUITAR
PIANO
BASS
56
54
38
54
ORGAN &
ACCORDION PERCUSSION
[PIANO] button ...............................................................P. 55
REGISTRATION MEMORY
[FREEZE] button ............................................................P. 84
[1] – [8] buttons (REGISTRATION MEMORY)................P. 82
59 [MEMORY] button...........................................................P. 82
VOICE
SYNTH.
XG
USER
FREEZE
57
1
2
58
3
4
5
REGISTRATION MEMORY
6
7
8
MEMORY
59
The Panel Logos
The logos printed on the PF-1000 panel indicate standards/
formats it supports and special features it includes.
GM System Level 1
“GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which
guarantees that any data conforming to the standard will play
accurately on any GM-compatible tone generator or synthesizer
from any manufacturer.
57
58
Connectors
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
[VIDEO OUT] jack ........................................................P. 142
AUX IN [L / L+R] [R] jacks ............................................P. 142
AUX OUT [L / L+R] [R] jacks ........................................P. 142
AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED) [L] [R] jacks........................P. 142
[PHONES] jacks ...........................................................P. 141
[AC INLET] .....................................................................P. 16
[PEDAL] jack...................................................................P. 16
[AUX PEDAL] jack ........................................................P. 143
MIDI [THRU] [OUT] [IN] terminals ................................P. 143
[HOST SELECT] switch................................................P. 143
[TO HOST] terminal......................................................P. 144
POWER
71
[ON / OFF] button (POWER) ..........................................P. 17
Microphone Connectors
[INPUT VOLUME] knob ................................................P. 141
[MIC / LINE IN] jack ......................................................P. 141
74 [MIC LINE] switch .........................................................P. 141
72
73
Pedals
Left pedal........................................................................P. 58
Sostenuto pedal..............................................................P. 58
77 Damper pedal .................................................................P. 58
75
76
XG Format
XG is a new Yamaha MIDI specification which significantly
expands and improves on the “GM System Level 1” standard with
greater voice handling capacity, expressive control, and effect
capability while retaining full compatibility with GM. By using the
PF-1000’s XG voices, it is possible to record XG-compatible song
files.
XF Format
The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF (Standard MIDI File)
standard with greater functionality and open-ended expandability
for the future. The PF-1000 is capable of displaying lyrics when an
XF file containing lyric data is played. (SMF is the most common
format used for MIDI sequence files. The PF-1000 is compatible
with SMF Formats 0 and 1, and records “song” data using SMF
Format 0.)
Disk Orchestra Collection
The DOC voice allocation format provides data playback
compatibility with a wide range of Yamaha instruments and MIDI
devices.
Style File Format
The Style File Format (SFF) is Yamaha’s original style file format,
which uses a unique conversion system to provide high-quality
automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord types.
The PF-1000 uses the SFF internally, reads optional SFF style disks,
and creates SFF styles using the Style Creator feature.
PF-1000
19
Quick Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Playing the Demos
Reference
on page 52
The PF-1000 features an extensive variety of Demo songs,
that showcase its rich, authentic voices and its dynamic
rhythms and styles.
Demo button
What’s more, there’s a special selection of Demo
functions. These take you through a hands-on journey of
all the important features and functions of the instrument
— letting you see firsthand how to effectively use the PF1000 in your own music.
1
2
Pressing the [DEMO] button
automatically plays back the
Demo songs at random.
Press the [BACK]/[NEXT] button to select the Demo
categories.
BACK
NEXT
MENU
DEMO
HELP
FUNCTION
Voice Demos showcase the
voices of the PF-1000. Style
Demos introduce you to the
rhythms and accompaniment
styles of the PF-1000
(page 52).
For this example, FUNCTION
is selected. Function Demos
demonstrate many of the
different functions on the PF1000.
3
Press any of the [A] to [J] buttons or [8▼] (AUTO) button (FUNCTION page only) to select the Demo songs.
For this example, press the [8▼] (AUTO) button.
All of the function demos are played back in sequence.
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
For details about the Demos,
refer to page 52.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the demo mode and return to the MAIN display when you’ve finished playing the
demo songs.
When you’re done with the Demos, you can get to know your PF-1000 even better with these functions:
• Preset Song (Song Book) playback (page 21)
• Disk Song Playback (page 21)
• Short demo playback of the selected voice (in the Voice Open display; page 26).
20
Quick Guide
Song Playback
Song Playback
Reference
on page 73
Here’s where all of the amazing voices, effects, rhythms, styles and other sophisticated features of
the PF-1000 come together — in songs!
As you heard in the Demos, the PF-1000 contains many built-in recordings. But there’s more. Check out the included
disk or call up the Song Open (PRESET) display. And there’s an even greater wealth of song material you can enjoy with
your PF-1000 — in commercially available software.
Make sure that the Language setting for the instrument (page 140) is the same
as that of the file name of the
song that you are playing
back.
Song related buttons
BALANCE and CHANNEL buttons
Floppy disk drive
The following songs are compatible for playback on the PF-1000. Refer to pages 73, 148 for more details on the logos.
Disks bearing this logo contain song data for voices defined in the GM standard.
Disks bearing this logo contain song data using the XG format, an extension of the GM
standard that provides a wider variety of voices and more comprehensive sonic control.
Disks bearing this logo contain song data for voices defined in Yamaha’s DOC format.
Songs containing a large
amount of data may not be
able to be read properly by
the instrument, and as such
you may not be able to
select them. The maximum
capacity is about 200–
300KB, however this may
differ depending on the data
contents of each song.
Playback of Songs
1
If you want to play back a disk song, insert an appropriate disk containing song data into the disk drive.
CAUTION
• Make sure to read the
section “Using the Floppy
Disk Drive (FDD) and
Floppy Disks” on page 6.
Quick Guide
21
Song Playback
2
Press the [A] button to call up the Song Open display.
If the MAIN screen is not displayed, press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button followed by the [EXIT] button.
From the MAIN display (the
display shown when the
power is turned on), you can
select songs, voices, accompaniment styles, etc.
A
B
C
D
E
PRESET
FLOPPY DISK
Press the [BACK]/[NEXT] button to select the drive.
3
PRESET only
Press the [A] button to select the preset songs (Song Book) folder.
A
B
C
D
E
22
Quick Guide
Song Playback
4
5
Press one of the [A] to [J] buttons to select a song file.
Press the SONG [START/STOP] button to start playback.
REC
NEW SONG
6
START/STOP
TOP
• To rewind or fast forward to the playback point of the song, press the [REW] or [FF] button.
• With song data software (Standard MIDI format 0) that includes lyrics, you can view the lyrics on the display during playback. You can also view the score. See pages 78 and 81 for
details.
SYNC.START
While the song is playing, try using the Mute function to turn certain instrument channels off or on —
letting you craft dynamic arrangements on the fly!
1) Press the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button.
2) Press the [1 - 8▲▼] button corresponding to the channel you wish to turn on or off.
CHANNEL
ON/OFF
PART
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
If the STYLE tab is
selected, press this button
again.
Quick Guide
23
Song Playback
7
Finally, take the producer’s seat and try your hand at mixing. These Balance controls let you adjust the levels
of the individual parts — the song, the style, your singing, and your playing.
1) Press the [BALANCE] button.
2) Press the [1 - 8▲▼] button corresponding to the part of which the volume you wish to adjust.
BALANCE
You can call up a full set of
mixing controls by pressing
the [MIXING CONSOLE]
button (page 116).
1
8
3
4
5
6
7
8
Press the SONG [START/STOP] button to stop playback.
REC
NEW SONG
24
2
Quick Guide
TOP
START/STOP
SYNC.START
• The [FADE IN/OUT] button (page 65) can be used
to produce smooth fadeins and fade-outs when
starting and stopping the
song, as well as the
accompaniment.
Playing Voices
Playing Voices
Reference
on page 54
The PF-1000 features a stunning variety of over 800 dynamic, rich and realistic voices. Try playing
some of these voices now and hear what they can do for your music. Here, you’ll learn how to
select individual voices, combine two voices in a layer, and split two voices between your left and right hands.
Voice related buttons
Playing a Voice
1
Press the [F] button to call up the menu for selecting the MAIN voice.
If the MAIN screen is not displayed, press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button followed by the [EXIT] button.
F
The voice you’re selecting
here belongs to the MAIN
part, and is called the MAIN
voice. (See page 56 for more
information.)
VOICE
PART
ON/OFF
LAYER
G
LEFT
H
I
J
You’ll want to hear the MAIN
voice all by itself — so make sure
that the LAYER and LEFT parts
are turned off.
2
Select a voice group.
PIANO &
HARPSI.
BRASS
ORGAN &
ACCORDION PERCUSSION
GUITAR
BASS
WOODWIND STRINGS CHOIR & PAD
SYNTH.
XG
E.PIANO
USER
VOICE
For this example, STRINGS
is selected.
Press the [BACK]/[NEXT]
button to select the memory
location of the voice. For this
example, PRESET is
selected.
Quick Guide
25
Playing Voices
3
Select a voice.
You can instantly jump back
to the Main display by “double-clicking” on one of the [A]
- [J] buttons.
A
For this example,
”Orchestra” is
selected.
B
C
D
E
Press the corresponding buttons to select the
other pages — and discover even more voices.
4
Press the [8▲] button to start the
Demo for the selected voice. To stop
the Demo, press this button again.
There’s more to the Demo features
than just voices, though–for more
information, see page 52.
Play the voices.
Naturally, you can play the voice yourself from the keyboard, but you can also
have the PF-1000 demonstrate the voice for you. Simply press the [8▲] button
from the display above, and a Demo of the voice plays automatically.
Playing Two Voices Simultaneously
1
2
3
Press the VOICE PART ON/OFF [LAYER] button to turn the LAYER part on.
VOICE
PART
ON/OFF
LAYER
Press the [G] button to select the LAYER part.
LEFT
Select a voice group.
Here, we’ll select a lush pad to fill out the sound. Call up the “CHOIR & PAD” group.
PIANO &
HARPSI.
BRASS
ORGAN &
ACCORDION PERCUSSION
GUITAR
BASS
WOODWIND STRINGS CHOIR & PAD
SYNTH.
XG
E.PIANO
USER
VOICE
4
5
Select a voice.
For example, select “Hah Choir.”
Play the voices.
Now, you can play two different voices together in a
rich sounding layer — the MAIN voice you selected in
the previous section, plus the new LAYER voice you’ve
selected here.
And that’s just the beginning. Check out these other voice-related features:
• Instant setup of the PF-1000 for piano play — with the press of a single button (page 55).
• Create your own original voices — quickly and easily — by changing the settings of existing voices (page 85).
• Set up your favorite panel settings — including voices, styles, and more — and call them up whenever you need
them (page 82).
26
Quick Guide
Playing Voices
Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands
1
2
3
Press the VOICE PART ON/OFF [LEFT] button to turn the
LEFT part on.
VOICE
PART
ON/OFF
LAYER
LEFT
Press the [H] button to select the LEFT part.
Select a voice group.
Here, we’ll select the “STRINGS” group — so that you can play rich, orchestral chords with your left hand.
PIANO &
HARPSI.
BRASS
ORGAN &
ACCORDION PERCUSSION
GUITAR
BASS
WOODWIND STRINGS CHOIR & PAD
SYNTH.
XG
E.PIANO
USER
VOICE
4
5
6
Select a voice, then press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.
For example, select “Symphon. Str.”
Press the [I] button to call up the SPLIT POINT display. From here, you can set the particular key on the
keyboard that separates the two voices — called the Split Point. To do this, simultaneously hold down the [F]
or [G] button and press the desired key on the keyboard. (For more information, see page 127.)
F
F
G
G
H
H
I
I
J
J
Play the voices.
The notes you play with your left hand sound one voice, while the notes you play with your right sound a
different voice (or voices).
Split Point
MAIN/LAYER
LEFT
MAIN and LAYER voices are meant to be played with the right hand. The LEFT voice is played with the left
hand.
7
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.
EXIT
Quick Guide
27
Playing Styles
Playing Styles
The PF-1000 has a huge variety of musical “styles” that you can call upon to back up your own
performance. They give you anything from a simple, yet effective piano backing or percussion
accompaniment to a full band or orchestra.
Reference
on page 59
Style related buttons
Playing a style
1
Select a style group and a style.
If the MAIN screen is not displayed, press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button followed by the [EXIT] button.
A
B
POP & ROCK POP BALLADS DANCE
SWING & JAZZ
R&B
COUNTRY
C
LATIN
D
STYLE
E
For this example,
EuroTrance is selected.
For this example, DANCE is
selected.
2
Turn ACMP on.
The specified left-hand section of the keyboard becomes the “Auto Accompaniment” section, and chords
played in this section are automatically detected and used as a basis for fully automatic accompaniment with
the selected style.
Split Point
ACMP
Auto Accompaniment
section
3
Turn SYNC.START on.
SYNC.START
28
Press the [BACK]/[NEXT] button to
select the memory location of the
style. For this example, PRESET is
selected.
Quick Guide
• The point on the keyboard that separates the
auto accompaniment section and the right-hand
section of the keyboard is
called the “split point.”
Refer to page 127 for
instructions on setting the
split point.
Playing Styles
4
As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the style starts.
For this example, play a C major chord (as shown below).
Split Point
Auto Accompaniment
section
5
6
7
Change the tempo by using the TEMPO[–] [+] buttons if necessary.
Simultaneously press the TEMPO [–] [+] buttons to return the tempo to its
original setting. Press the [EXIT] button to leave the TEMPO display.
The Tempo can also be
adjusted by using the [TAP
TEMPO] button (page 51).
Try playing other chords with your left hand.
For information on how to enter chords, see “Chord Fingerings” on page 62.
Press the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button to stop the style.
And there’s much more. Check out these other style-related features:
• Easily create your own original styles (page 106).
• Set up your favorite panel settings — including styles, voices, and more — and call them up whenever you need
them (page 82).
Embellish and enhance your melodies — with the automatic Harmony and Echo effects
This powerful performance feature lets you automatically add harmony notes to the melodies you play with your
right hand — based on the chords you play with your left. Tremolo, Echo, and other effects are available, too.
1 Turn HARMONY/ECHO on.
REVERB
DSP
VARIATION
HARMONY/
ECHO
MONO
LEFT HOLD
VOICE EFFECT
2 Turn ACMP on (page 28).
3 Play a chord with your left hand and play some notes in the right-hand range of the
keyboard.
The PF-1000 has various Harmony/Echo types (page 132).
The Harmony/Echo type may change according to the selected MAIN voice.
For details about Harmony/
Echo types, refer to the separate Data List.
• Harmony/Echo is just one of the many Voice Effects you can use. Try out some of
the other effects and see how they can enhance your performance (page 57).
Quick Guide
29
Playing Styles
Style Sections
Each style in the auto accompaniment is made up of “sections.” Since each section is a rhythmic variation of the basic
style, you can use them to add spice to your performance and mix up the beats — while you’re playing. Intros, Endings,
Main patterns, and Breaks — they’re all here, giving you the dynamic elements you need to create professionalsounding arrangements.
INTRO
MAIN
BREAK
ENDING
1-4
5
This is used for the beginning of the song. When the intro finishes playing, accompaniment shifts to the
main section.
This is used for playing the main part of the song. It plays an accompaniment pattern of several measures,
and repeats indefinitely until another section’s button is pressed.
This lets you add dynamic variations and breaks in the rhythm of the accompaniment, to make your
performance sound even more professional.
This is used for the ending of the song. When the ending is finished, the auto accompaniment stops
automatically.
Use the same operations as in “Playing a style” on pages 28 and 29.
Press the [INTRO] button.
BREAK
INTRO
ENDING/rit.
MAIN
A
B
D
C
STYLE CONTROL
6
As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the Intro starts.
For this example, play a C major chord (as shown below).
Split Point
Auto Accompaniment
section
When the playback of the intro is finished, it automatically leads into main section.
7
8
9
30
Press any of the MAIN [A] to [D] buttons or [BREAK]
button as desired. (See the Accompaniment Structure
on the next page.)
BREAK
Quick Guide
B
D
C
or
STYLE CONTROL
Press the [AUTO FILL IN] button to add a fill-in, if
necessary.
Fill-in patterns play automatically between each change in
the Main sections.
Press the [ENDING] button.
This switches to the ending section. When the ending
is finished, the style automatically stops.
ENDING/rit.
MAIN
A
BREAK
AUTO FILL IN
INTRO
ENDING/rit.
MAIN
A
B
C
D
STYLE CONTROL
Playing Styles
■ Accompaniment Structure
INTRO (page
(page 66)
xx)
INTRO A
INTRO B
INTRO C
INTRO D
(max. four patterns)
MAIN VARIATION
via BREAK
MAIN
VARIATION
B
via BREAK
MAIN
VARIATION
A
MAIN
VARIATION
C
via BREAK
MAIN
VARIATION
D
via BREAK
Press the [ENDING] button.
ENDING
ENDING(page
(page xx)
66)
ENDING A
ENDING B
ENDING C
ENDING D
You can have the
ending gradually slow
down (ritardando) by
pressing the [ENDING]
button again while the
ending is playing back.
(max. four patterns)
• An Intro doesn’t necessarily have to be at the beginning! If you want, you can play an Intro section in the middle of your performance by
simply pressing the [INTRO] button at the desired point.
• Watch your timing with the Break sections. If you press a [BREAK] button too close to the end of the measure (i.e., after the final eighth
note), the Break section starts playing from the next measure. This also applies to the Auto Fill-in.
• Mix up your intros and use any of the other sections to start the style, if you want.
• If you want to come back into the style right away after an Ending, simply press the [INTRO] button while the Ending section is playing.
• If you press the [BREAK] button while the ending is playing, the break will immediately start playing, continuing with the main section.
Other Controls
FADE IN/OUT
FADE IN/OUT
TAP TEMPO
TAP TEMPO
SYNC.STOP
SYNC.STOP
The [FADE IN/OUT] button can be used to produce smooth fade-ins and fade-outs (page 65)when starting and stopping
the style.
The style can be started at any tempo you desire by “tapping” out the tempo with the [TAP/TEMPO] button. For details,
see page 51.
When Synchro Stop is on, you can stop and start the style anytime you want by simply releasing or playing the keys (in
the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard). This is a great way to add dramatic breaks and accents to your
performance. For details, see page 65.
Quick Guide
31
Playing Styles
ONE TOUCH SETTING
buttons
One Touch Setting
One Touch Setting is a powerful and convenient feature that automatically calls up the most appropriate panel settings
(voice number, etc.) for the currently selected style, with the touch of a single button. This is a wonderful way to
instantly reconfigure all the settings on the PF-1000 to match the style you want to play.
1
2
Select a style (page 28).
Press one of the [ONE TOUCH SETTING] buttons.
Not only does this instantly call up all the settings (voices, effects, etc.) that match the current style (see
page 67) — it also automatically turns on ACMP and SYNC. START, so that you can immediately start playing
the style.
1
2
3
4
ONE TOUCH SETTING
3
As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the auto accompaniment starts.
Split Point
Auto Accompaniment
section
4
5
Play melodies with your right hand and play various chords with your left hand.
Try out other One Touch Setting setups.
1
2
3
4
ONE TOUCH SETTING
You can also create your own One Touch Setting setups.
For details, refer to page 68.
• Here’s another way to further automate musical changes and spice up your performance: Use the convenient OTS
(One Touch Setting) Link function to automatically change One Touch Settings when you select a different Main
section (page 68).
32
Quick Guide
Music Finder
Music Finder
Reference
on page 69
MUSIC FINDER button
If you want to play in a certain song but don’t know which style and voice settings would be appropriate, the
convenient Music Finder can help you out. Simply select the song name from the Music Finder and the PF-1000
automatically makes all appropriate panel settings to let you play in that music style!
Using the Music Finder
1
Press the [MUSIC FINDER] button.
MUSIC
FINDER
2
Select a record.
Press the [BACK]/[NEXT]
button to select the desired
page of records. For this
example, ALL is selected.
Select the desired
record.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
For this example, press the [1 - 3▲▼] button to select a record by song title.
3
Play along with the style playback.
Split Point
You can also have the voice
and other important settings
change automatically with
the style changes. To do this,
turn on OTS LINK (page 68)
and set the OTS LINK TIMING (page 127) to “REAL
TIME.”
Auto Accompaniment
section
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.
Quick Guide
33
Music Finder
Searching the Music Finder Records
The Music Finder is also equipped with a convenient search function that lets you enter a song title or keyword — and
instantly call up all the records that match your search criteria.
1
Press the [MUSIC FINDER] button.
MUSIC
FINDER
2
Press the [I] button to call up the MUSIC FINDER SEARCH 1 display.
The results of Search 1 and
2 appear in the correspondingly numbered SEARCH 1/
2 displays.
4
For this example,
press the [A]
button to call up
the display for
inputting the song
title.
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
For this example,
ANY is selected.
5
Enter the song title,
then press the [8▲]
(OK) button.
1
2
3
4
5
6
For this example,
ALL is selected.
34
Quick Guide
7
Refer to page 45 for instructions on entering characters.
3
Press the [F], [G]
and [H] to clear
the previous
conditions, if
necessary.
8
6
Press the [8▲] (START SEARCH)
button.
The search function calls up all
records that contain the entered
word or words.
Music Finder
7
Select a record (see step #2 on page 33) and play along with the style playback.
Split Point
Auto Accompaniment
section
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.
You can also create your own Music Finder setups and save them to floppy disk (pages 38 and 44).
Saving and Recalling Music Finder Data
To save your Music Finder data, call up the MUSIC FINDER Open/Save window from the SYSTEM RESET page
(page 140) of the UTILITY display, and follow the same procedure as that in the Open/Save window for Voice (page 38,
44). To recall the saved data, execute the appropriate operation from the MUSIC FINDER’s Open/Save window. Records
can be replaced or added (page 71).
In the instructions above, all Music Finder data is handled together. Besides this, when you save or load style files, the
Music Finder data that uses the relevant style file(s) is stored or added automatically. When you copy or move a style file
on a floppy disk to the USER drive (page 42, 43), the record which was recorded when storing the relevant style is
automatically added to the PF-1000.
• In the example above, you specified a song title, but you can also look for relevant records by keyword or music
genre — for example, Latin, 8-beat, etc. (page 70).
Quick Guide
35
Playing and Practicing with the Songs
Playing and Practicing with the Songs
Reference
on page 73
Song related buttons
Playing Along with the PF-1000
In this section, try using the PF-1000’s song playback features to cancel or mute the right-hand melody while you play
the part yourself. It’s like having a very talented and versatile playing partner accompany you while you perform.
1-4
5
Use the same operations as in “Song Playback” on pages 21 - 23.
Press the [TRACK 1] button to cancel the right hand melody part.
TRACK1
R
To cancel the left hand part,
press the [TRACK 2] button
6
If you want to have the notation displayed as you play, press the [C] button. If you want to see the lyrics,
press the [B] button.
If the MAIN screen is not displayed, press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button followed by the [EXIT] button.
If the selected song does not
contain lyric data, lyrics are
not displayed.
A
B
C
D
E
7
Press the SONG [START/STOP] button and play the part.
REC
TOP
NEW SONG
8
SYNC.START
Press the SONG [START/STOP] button to stop playback.
REC
NEW SONG
36
START/STOP
Quick Guide
TOP
START/STOP
SYNC.START
• If you want to start the song right
away without an intro, use the Sync
Start function. To set Sync Start to
standby, simultaneously hold down
the [TOP] button and press the
SONG [START/STOP] button. Song
playback starts automatically the
moment you start playing the melody.
• If you can hear the PF-1000 playing
the melody part as well, check the
channel setting for the melody part in
the song data, and change the channel assigned to Track 1 (page 126).
You can also change the song channel itself permanently (page 101).
Playing and Practicing with the Songs
Recording
The PF-1000 lets you record, too — quickly and easily. Try out the Quick Recording feature now and capture your
keyboard performance.
1-3
4
Select a voice for recording. Use the same operations as in “Playing a Voice” on pages 25, 26.
Press the [REC] and [TOP] buttons simultaneously to select “New Song“ for recording.
REC
START/STOP
TOP
NEW SONG
REW
FF
REPEAT
SYNC.START
SONG
5
Simultaneously hold down the [REC] button and press the [TRACK1] button.
EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2
STYLE
L
REC
TRACK1
R
6
Recording starts as soon as you start playing the keyboard.
7
When you’ve finished recording, press the [REC] button.
REC
8
To hear your newly recorded performance, return the song to the beginning by
using the [TOP] button and press the SONG [START/STOP] button.
REC
NEW SONG
9
TOP
START/STOP
SYNC.START
CAUTION
The recorded data will be
lost if you turn off the power.
To keep your important
recordings, you’ll need to
save them to the User drive
or floppy disk.
Save the recorded data as required (pages 38, 44).
Quick Guide
37
Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data
The PF-1000 utilizes a variety of data types — including voices, accompaniment styles, songs and registration memory
settings. Much of this data is already programmed and contained in the PF-1000; you can also create and edit your own
data with some of the functions on the instrument.
All this data is stored in separate files — just as is done on a computer.
Here, we’ll show you how to use the basic operations of the display controls in handling and organizing the data of the
PF-1000 in files and folders.
Files can be opened, saved, named, moved, or deleted in their respective Open/Save displays. You can select these
displays according to their respective file types, as well: Song, Voice, Style, etc. Moreover, you can organize your data
efficiently by putting various files of the same type into a single folder.
The Open/Save displays for Song, Voice, Style, and Registration Bank can be called up from the MAIN display (the
display shown when the power is turned on) by pressing the appropriate [A] - [J] button.
Open/Save display for Song (page 74)
Open/Save display for Voice (page 54)
handles the Song files.
handles the Voice files.
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
The following Open/Save display types
are also available; however, these are
selected from displays other than the
MAIN display (page 140).
• SYSTEM SETUP
• MIDI SETUP
• USER EFFECT
• MUSIC FINDER
If the MAIN screen is not displayed,
press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button
followed by the [EXIT] button.
Open/Save display for Style (page 59)
handles the Style files.
38
PF-1000
Open/Save display for Registration Bank (page 83)
handles the Registration Bank files.
Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data
Example — Open/Save display for Voice
Each Open/Save display consists of PRESET, USER, and FLOPPY DISK drive pages.
PRESET drive
The files that are preprogrammed and installed
internally to the PF-1000 are
kept here. Preset files can be
loaded but cannot be re-written.
However, you can use a preset
file as a basis for creating your
own original file (which can be
saved in the USER or FLOPPY
DISK drive).
USER drive
Files kept here are those
containing your own original
data, created or edited using the
various functions of the PF-1000.
They are stored internally to the
PF-1000.
FLOPPY DISK drive
You can also store your original
data to floppy disk.
Commercially available disk
software can also be called up
here. Naturally, these files are
available only when the
appropriate disk is inserted in
the floppy disk drive.
BACK
NEXT
Changes drives among
PRESET, USER and
FLOPPY DISK.
Calls up the upper
level directory page.
In this example, the
voice folder selection
page can be called
up.
File
All data, both preprogrammed and your own
original, are stored as “files.”
Current Memory
“Current Memory” is the area where the voice is called up when
you select a voice. Also it is the area where you edit your voice
using the SOUND CREATOR function. Your edited voice should
then be saved as a file in the USER or FLOPPY DISK drive.
Recording songs (page 90) and creating accompaniment styles
(page 106) are done within the current memory. Please make
sure to properly save this data to the USER/FLOPPY DISK drive as
a file or files. The data will be lost if you turn off the power
without saving.
PF-1000
39
Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data
Selecting Files and Folders
Select a file shown in the display. In this example, we’ll select a voice file.
First, press the VOICE [PIANO & HARPSI] button to call up the display containing the files.
This display (“Open/Save” display) is typical of those used to call up and store files (voice files).
The PF-1000 already contains a variety of voices in the PRESET section. You can store your own original voices created
with the Sound Creator function to the USER or FLOPPY DISK section.
BACK
“PRESET,” “USER,” or
1 Select
“FLOPPY DISK” by using the
NEXT
[BACK][NEXT] button.
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
ENTER
DATA ENTRY
1
2
2
3
4
5
6
Use the [1▲] ~ [7▲] buttons to
turn the pages.
When the amount of pages exceeds six, the
bottom of the display changes as shown
below.
Press Prev.(previous)
END
Press Next
PF-1000
8
3 Select the file/folder.
There are two ways to select the file/folder:
• Press the [A] - [J] button.
Press the letter button corresponding to the
file/folder you wish to call up. (In the
example display shown above, the voice
files are shown.)
• Use the [DATA ENTRY] dial and the
[ENTER] button.
When you turn the [DATA ENTRY] dial, the
highlight moves among the available files/
folders. Highlight the desired file or folder
(voice files are shown in the example
above) and press the [ENTER] button to
call up the selected item.
Press the [EXIT] button to go back to the MAIN display.
You can go back to the previous display by pressing the [EXIT] button.
Exiting from small pop-up windows
You can also exit from small pop-up
windows (such as in the illustration
below) by pressing the [EXIT] button.
40
7
When “JAPANESE” is
selected for the Language
parameter (pages 49, 140),
and you change this to one of
the western languages, the
kanji and kana characters of
the file name stored in the disk
drive are changed to western
characters. In the opposite
case, special Latin characters
and marks are changed into
normal characters. Also, in the
case of floppy disk data, text
in the files are changed to
characters that cannot be
read by the instrument.
Keep in mind that similar problems may occur when trying to
access files originating or
edited by a computer having a
different language operating
system. In general, be careful
when switching languages —
you risk not being able to
access the data properly.
Double-clicking the
appropriate [A] -[J] button
calls up the corresponding
file and returns to the MAIN
display.
Highlighting the desired file
and double-clicking the
[ENTER] button calls up the
corresponding file and
returns to the MAIN display.
Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data
File/Folder-related Operations
Naming Files/Folders
You can assign names to files and folders. Any file/folder in the USER and FLOPPY DISK sections can be named or
renamed. Execute the following steps when there is data in the User drive. If there are Preset files/folders you wish to
rename, copy them beforehand (page 43) and use them as User files/folders.
1 Press the [1▼] (NAME) button (page 38).
A file/folder name can contain up to 50 half size letters
(or 25 Hiragana and kanji letters), including the Icon ID
(see the note below) and the
extension.
The NAME display appears.
2 Select the appropriate file/folder and press the [7▼](OK) button.
The currently selected file/folder is highlighted. To select another file/folder, press one of the
[A] - [J] buttons.
A
F
ABCDE.S002.MID
B
G
File ID
C
H
D
I
E
J
1
END
The file name will appear on
your computer as follows. If
you change the Icon ID or
the extension, the icon may
change or the file may not be
properly recognized.
2
3
4
5
6
7
Icon ID
Extension
8
Input the new name (page 45).
Press the [8▲] (OK) button. To cancel,
press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button.
PF-1000
41
Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data
Moving Files/Folders
You can move files and folders as desired, for organizing your data. Any file/folder in the USER and FLOPPY DISK
sections can be moved, using the cut-and-paste operation described below.
the [2▼] (CUT) button (page 38).
1 Press
The CUT display appears.
2 Select the desired file/folder for moving.
Select the appropriate file/folder and press the [7▼](OK) button.
The currently selected file/folder is highlighted. To select another file/folder, press one of the [A] [J] buttons.
Several files/folders can be selected together, even those from other pages. To release or cancel
the selection, press the button of the selected file/folder again.
Press the [6▼] (ALL) button to select all the files/folders in the displayed page (USER/FLOPPY
DISK). When the [6▼] (ALL) button is pressed the [6▼] button changes to “ALL OFF” button to
release or cancel the selection.
3 Press the [7▼] (OK) button.
This operation cannot be
used to directly move a file/
folder from one floppy disk to
another. If you want to do
this, cut and paste the file or
folder from the first floppy
disk to the USER page, then
change disks and paste it to
the FLOPPY DISK page.
All files/folders in a floppy
disk can be copied to
another disk in one batch
(page 139).
After being pasted, the files
are automatically re-ordered
in alphabetical order and
displayed.
To stop the operation, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button.
4 Call up the destination display.
Only the USER and FLOPPY DISK pages can be selected as the destination.
END
42
PF-1000
Press the [4▼] (PASTE) button.
The file/folder you cut is now pasted at the destination.
About files/folders in a
floppy disk
In the FLOPPY DISK page
of the Open/Save display,
only the files which can be
handled in that Open/Save
display will appear — even
though a folder in a floppy
disk can contain different
kinds of files.
In the case of a folder cutand-paste operation (for
floppy disk), an entire folder
can be cut; however, only the
specific files which can be
handled in the current Open/
Save display will be pasted.
Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data
Copying Files/Folders
You can also copy files and folders as desired, for organizing your data. Any file/folder in the PRESET, USER and
FLOPPY DISK sections can be copied, using the copy-and-paste operation described below.
the [3▼] (COPY) button
1 Press
(page 38).
The COPY display appears.
3 Press the [7▼] (OK) button.
To stop the operation, press the [8▼]
(CANCEL) button.
4 Call up the destination display.
Only the USER and FLOPPY DISK pages can
be selected as the destination.
2 Select the desired file/folder.
Select the appropriate file/folder
and press the [7▼](OK) button.
The currently selected file/folder is
highlighted. To select another file/
folder, press one of the [A] - [J]
buttons.
Several files/folders can be selected
together, even those from other
pages. To release or cancel the
selection, press the button of the
selected file/folder again.
Press the [6▼] (ALL) button to
select all the files/folders in the
displayed page (PRESET/USER/
FLOPPY DISK). When the [6▼]
(ALL) button is pressed, the [6▼]
button changes to “ALL OFF,”
letting you release or cancel the
selection.
END
Please note that the copy
functions are intended for
your personal use only.
This operation cannot be
used to directly copy a file/
folder from one floppy disk to
another. If you want to do
this, copy and paste the file
or folder from the first floppy
disk to the User page, then
change disks and paste it to
the Floppy Disk page.
Press the [4▼] (PASTE) button.
The file/folder you copied is now pasted at the destination.
Deleting Files/Folders
You can also delete files and folders as desired, for organizing your data. Any file/folder in the USER and FLOPPY DISK
sections can be deleted, using the operation described below.
1 Press the [5▼] (DELETE) button (page 38).
The DELETE display appears.
END
Press the [7▼] (OK) button.
To cancel the operation, press the [8▼] (CANCEL)
button.
The message “Are you sure you want to delete the
“******” file (or data/folder)? YES/NO” appears.
YES ..........Deletes the highlighted item.
NO............Exits from the prompt without deleting.
2
Select the desired file/folder.
Select the appropriate file/folder and press the [7▼](OK)
button.
The currently selected file/folder is highlighted. To select
another file/folder, press one of the [A] - [J] buttons.
Several files/folders can be selected together, even
those from other pages. To release or cancel the
selection, press the button of the selected file/folder
again.
Press the [6▼] (ALL) button to select all the files/folders
in the displayed page (USER/FLOPPY DISK). When the
[6▼] (ALL) button is pressed, the [6▼] button changes
to “ALL OFF,” letting you release or cancel the selection.
When several files have been selected, the message
“Are you sure you want to delete the “******” file (or
data/folder)? YES/YES ALL/NO/CANCEL” appears.
YES/NO...... Deletes the highlighted item (YES), or
skips the highlighted item without deleting
(NO).
YES ALL .... Deletes all selected items at once.
CANCEL .... Exits from the prompt without deleting.
PF-1000
43
Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data
Saving Files
This operation lets you save the data (such as song and voice) you created in current
memory (page 39) to files. The files can be saved only to the USER and FLOPPY DISK
drives.
If the Open/Save display for the type of data you wish to save is not shown, first return to
the MAIN display by pressing the [DIRECT ACCESS] button followed by the [EXIT] button.
Then, press the appropriate button [A]–[J] from the MAIN display to call up the respective
Open/Save display. Finally, call up the USER or FLOPPY DISK page (pages 38, 39).
the [6▼]
1 Press
(SAVE) button.
Enter a name for the new file (page 45).
Press the [8▲] (OK) button.
To stop the operation, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button.
The internal memory capacity of the PF-1000 is about
580KB. Memory capacity for
2DD and 2HD floppy disks is
about 720KB and 1.44MB,
respectively. When you store
data to these locations, all
file types of the PF-1000
(Voice, Style, Song, Registration, etc.) are stored
together.
The files of commercially
available DOC software and
Yamaha Disklavier software,
and their edited files on the
PF-1000, can be stored in
the USER page, but cannot
be copied to another floppy
disk.
Organizing Files by Creating a New Folder
This operation lets you easily organize your various files into categories by creating a new
folder for each category. Folders can only be created in the USER and FLOPPY DISK
sections.
up the page to
1 Call
which you wish to
create a new folder
and press the [7▼]
(NEW) button
(page 38).
Enter the name of the new folder (page 45).
Folder directories can contain up to four levels.
The maximum total number
of files and folders which can
be stored is 800, but this
may differ depending on the
length of the file names.
The maximum number of
files which can be stored in a
folder will be 250.
Press the [8▲](OK) button.
To cancel the operation, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button.
Displaying Upper Level pages
Press the [8▼] (UP) button to call up the upper level pages. For example, you can call up the folder level pages from
the file level pages.
Entering Characters and Changing Icons
the [1▼]
1 Press
(NAME), [6▼]
(SAVE), or [7▼]
(NEW) button
(page 38).
Change the type of character by using the [1▲] button.
If you select Japanese as the Language in the
FUNCTION display (page 140), the following
different types of characters and sizes can be
entered:
(kana-kan)
Call up the ICON SELECT display by pressing
Hiragana and kanji, marks (full size)
the [1▼] button. This lets you change the icon
(kana)
at the left of the file name.
Katakana (normal size), marks (full size)
(kana)
Katakana (half size), marks (half size)
A B C — Alphabet (capital and small letters, full size), numbers (full size), marks (full size)
ABC — Alphabet (capital and small letters, half size), numbers (half size), marks (half size)
If you’ve selected a language other than Japanese in the FUNCTION display (page 140), the
following types of characters are available:
CASE — Alphabet (capital letters, half size), numbers (half size), marks (half size)
case — Alphabet (lowercase letters, half size), numbers (half size), marks (half size)
44
PF-1000
Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data
Entering Characters
The instructions that follow show you how to enter characters in naming your files and folders. The method is much the
same as inputting names and numbers to your cell phone.
1
2
3
Move the cursor to the desired position by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial.
Press the appropriate button, [2▲] - [7▲] and [2▼]- [6▼], corresponding to the character you wish to enter.
Several different characters are assigned to each button, and the characters change each time you press the button.
To actually enter the selected character, move the cursor or press another letter-input button.
If you’ve entered a character by mistake, move the cursor to the character letter you wish to erase and press the
[7▼] (DELETE) button. If you want to delete all of the characters on the line at once, press and hold down the
[7▼] (DELETE) button for a while, or press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button. When the cursor appears in reverse display
(highlight), only the reversed area is deleted.
To actually enter the new name, press the [8▲] (OK) button.
To cancel the operation, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button.
■ Converting into Kanji (Japanese language)
This applies only if you are using the “
(kana-kan)” button (in Japanese). When
the input “hiragana” characters are shown in reverse display (highlighted), press the
[ENTER] button one or several times to convert the characters into the appropriate
kanji. The reversed area can be changed by the [DATA ENTRY] dial. The converted
area can be changed back to “hiragana” by the [7▼] (DELETE) button. The reversed
area can be cleared at once by the [8▼] (CANCEL) button. To actually enter the
change, press the [8▲] (OK) button or enter the next character. To enter the
“hiragana” itself (without converting it), press the [8▲] (OK) button.
The following half-size
marks cannot be used in
naming files and folders:
¥\/:*?“<>|
■ Entering special character marks (umlaut, accent, Japanese “ ” and “ ”)
Select a character to which a character mark is to be added and press the [6▼] button
(before actual entry of the character.)
■ Entering miscellaneous characters (marks)
You can call up the mark list by pressing the [6▼] button, after actually entering a
character by moving the cursor.
Move the cursor to the desired mark by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial, then press the
[8▲] (OK) or [ENTER] button.
■ Entering numbers
In the case of characters
which are not accompanied
by special character marks
(with the exception of kanakan and half-size katakana),
you can call up the mark list
by pressing the [6▼] button
after selecting a character
(before actual entry of a
character).
First, select one of the following: “A B C” (full-size alphabet), “ABC” “CASE” (half-size
capital alphabet) and “case” (half-size lowercase alphabet). Then, press and hold
down the appropriate button, [2▲] - [7▲] and [2▼] - [5▼], for a while, or press it
repeatedly until the desired number is selected.
PF-1000
45
Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data
Changing the Icon
You can also change the icon that
appears at the left of the file name.
Call up the ICON SELECT display by
pressing the [1▼] (ICON) button from
the character input display (page 45).
Select the desired icon by using the
[A] - [J] buttons, or by using the
[3▲▼] - [5▲▼] buttons, then enter
the selected icon by pressing the [8▲]
(OK) button.
Turns pages for
icon selection.
BACK
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
NEXT
Enters the selected icon.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Cancels the icon selection operation.
Using the [DATA ENTRY] Dial
This convenient control lets you easily select items in the display or quickly change parameter values. The actual
function of the [DATA ENTRY] dial differs depending on the selected display.
■ Adjusting values
You can change parameter values by
rotating the [DATA ENTRY] dial. In the
example [BALANCE] display, turning
the dial adjusts the volume of the part
in reverse display (highlight). To adjust
the volume of another part, first select
the part by pressing the [▲▼] button
corresponding to the part, then rotate
the [DATA ENTRY] dial.
DATA ENTRY
■ Selecting items
You can select the desired item or
function in the display by rotating the
[DATA ENTRY] dial. The selected item
can then be called up or executed by
using the [ENTER] button.
In the example VOICE display, you
can select the desired voice file with
the [DATA ENTRY] dial, and call up
the selected item by pressing the
[ENTER] button on the panel.
46
PF-1000
ENTER
DATA ENTRY
Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data
Direct Access — Instant Selection of Displays
DIRECT
ACCESS
LCD
CONTRAST
BACK
MENU
DEMO
HELP
A
F
B
G
C
H
NEXT
VOICE
PART
ON/OFF
LAYER
LEFT
FUNCTION
DIGITAL
STUDIO
SOUND
CREATOR
D
I
E
J
MUSIC
FINDER
ENTER
DATA ENTRY
FADE IN/OUT
POP & ROCK POP BALLADS DANCE
SWING & JAZZ
R&B
COUNTRY
LATIN
MARCH &
WORLD
WALTZ
BALLROOM
PIANIST
USER
EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2
STYLE
L
DIGITAL
RECORDING
TRACK1
R
ACMP
AUTO FILL IN
REC
OTS LINK
START/STOP
TOP
REW
FF
BREAK
MIN
MAX
MASTER VOLUME
START/STOP
METRONOME
INTRO
ENDING/rit.
MAIN
A
B
C
MONO
LEFT HOLD
1
GUITAR
BASS
PIANO
WOODWIND STRINGS CHOIR & PAD
SYNTH.
XG
DSP
PIANO &
HARPSI.
E.PIANO
SYNC.STOP
SYNC.START
CHANNEL
ON/OFF
SONG
START/STOP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
BRASS
RESET
TEMPO
3
4
8
TAP TEMPO
RESET
2
ONE TOUCH SETTING
EXIT
PART
SYNC.START
D
STYLE CONTROL
VARIATION
VOICE EFFECT
BALANCE
REPEAT
DIRECT
ACCESS
NEW SONG
HARMONY/
ECHO
ORGAN &
ACCORDION PERCUSSION
REVERB
MIXING
CONSOLE
STYLE
TRANSPOSE
PART
VOICE
USER
FREEZE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
MEMORY
REGISTRATION MEMORY
With the convenient Direct Access function, you can instantly call up the desired display — with just a single additional
button press. Press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button and a message appears in the display prompting you to press the
appropriate button. Then, simply press the button corresponding to the desired setting display to instantly call up that
display. In the example below, Direct Access is used to call up the display for selecting the Chord Fingering (page 128).
DIRECT
ACCESS
ACMP
Refer to the Direct Access Chart (page 48) for a list of the displays that can be called up
with the Direct Access function.
Here’s a convenient way to
return to the MAIN display
from any other display:
Simply press the [DIRECT
ACCESS] button, then the
[EXIT] button.
PF-1000
47
Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data
Direct Access Chart
Operation: [DIRECT ACCESS] button + button listed below
STYLE
[POP & ROCK]
[POP BALLADS]
[DANCE]
[SWING & JAZZ]
[R & B]
[COUNTRY]
[LATIN]
[MARCH & WORLD]
[WALTZ]
[BALLROOM]
[PIANIST]
[USER]
STYLE CONTROL
[ACMP]
[BREAK]
[INTRO]
MAIN [A]
MAIN [B]
MAIN [C]
MAIN [D]
[ENDING]
[AUTO FILL IN]
[OTS LINK]
[SYNC. STOP]
[SYNC. START]
[START/STOP]
SONG
[TRACK1]
[TRACK2]
[EXTRA TRACKS]
[REPEAT]
[REC]
[TOP]
[START/STOP]
[REW]
[FF]
METRONOME
[START/STOP]
[FADE IN/OUT]
TEMPO
[TAP TEMPO]
[–]
[+]
TRANSPOSE
[–]
[+]
MENU
[DEMO]
[HELP]
[FUNCTION]
DIGITAL STUDIO
[SOUND CREATOR]
[DIGITAL RECORDING]
[MIXING CONSOLE]
[BALANCE]
[CHANNEL ON/OFF]
[DIRECT ACCESS]
[NEXT]
[BACK]
[ENTER]
[MUSIC FINDER]
[EXIT]
VOICE PART
[LAYER]
[LEFT]
VOICE EFFECT
[REVERB]
[DSP]
[VARIATION]
[HARMONY/ECHO]
[MONO]
[LEFT HOLD]
VOICE
[PIANO & HARPSI]
[E.PIANO]
[ORGAN & ACCORDION]
[PERCUSSION]
[GUITAR]
[BASS]
[BRASS]
[WOODWIND]
[STRINGS]
[CHOIR & PAD]
[SYNTH.]
[XG]
[USER]
ONE TOUCH SETTING
[1]–[4]
[PIANO]
REGISTRATION MEMORY
[FREEZE]
[1]–[8]
[MEMORY]
PEDAL
RIGHT
CENTER
LEFT
AUX
48
PF-1000
Corresponding LCD display and function
FUNCTION
STYLE SETTING/SPLIT
POINT
FUNCTION
CHORD FINGERING
VOLUME/VOICE
MIXING CONSOLE (STYLE
PART)
FILTER
EFFECT
FUNCTION
STYLE SETTING/SPLIT
POINT
See pages
SPLIT POINT (ACMP) setting
127
FINGERING TYPE selection
VOICE settings
PANPOT settings
VOLUME settings
HARMONIC CONTENT settings
BRIGHTNESS settings
REVERB settings
CHORUS settings
DSP settings
128
SYNC. STOP WINDOW setting
117
118
119
127
—
—
FUNCTION
TRACK1 CHANNEL selection
TRACK2 CHANNEL selection
SONG SETTING
126
—
—
—
—
—
UTILITY
METRONOME settings
FADE IN/OUT settings
TAP settings
137
MIDI
MIDI CLOCK setting
135
CONTROLLER
TUNE
TRANSPOSE settings
FUNCTION
MIXING CONSOLE
LANGUAGE selection
LCD BRIGHTNESS settings
MIDI settings
MASTER TUNING setting
SCALE TUNING setting
UTILITY
FUNCTION
MIDI
MASTER TUNE/SCALE
TUNE
130
118
140
138
134
124
—
MIXING CONSOLE (SONG
PART)
VOLUME/VOICE
VOLUME settings
VOICE settings
117
Exit from the Direct Access mode
MUSIC FINDER
Return to the MAIN display
—
—
—
MUSIC FINDER SEARCH1 (Searching the records)
70
TUNE
OCTAVE settings
118
EFFECT
REVERB settings
DSP settings
EFFECT TYPE selection
119
MIXING CONSOLE
FUNCTION
MIXING CONSOLE
FUNCTION
FUNCTION
REGISTRATION BANK
FUNCTION
HARMONY/ECHO
TUNE
PORTAMENTO TIME settings
STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT SPLIT POINT (LEFT) setting
132
118
127
VOICE SET
132
—
KEYBOARD TOUCH selection
CONTROLLER
FREEZE
REGISTRATION EDIT (Editing the REGISTRATION)
REGISTRATION SEQUENCE (Creating the REGISTRATION SEQUENCE)
RIGHT PEDAL function assignment
CENTER PEDAL function assignment
CONTROLLER
LEFT PEDAL function assignment
AUX PEDAL function assignment
130
131
83
131
128
Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data
Help Messages
The Help messages give you explanations and descriptions of all the main functions and features of the PF-1000.
HELP
LCD
CONTRAST
BACK
MENU
DEMO
HELP
A
F
B
G
C
H
NEXT
VOICE
PART
ON/OFF
LAYER
LEFT
FUNCTION
DIGITAL
STUDIO
SOUND
CREATOR
D
I
E
J
MUSIC
FINDER
ENTER
DATA ENTRY
FADE IN/OUT
POP & ROCK POP BALLADS DANCE
SWING & JAZZ
R&B
COUNTRY
LATIN
MARCH &
WORLD
WALTZ
BALLROOM
PIANIST
USER
EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2
STYLE
L
DIGITAL
RECORDING
TRACK1
R
STYLE
ACMP
AUTO FILL IN
REC
OTS LINK
START/STOP
TOP
REW
FF
BREAK
MIN
MAX
MASTER VOLUME
1
START/STOP
INTRO
ENDING/rit.
MAIN
A
B
C
MENU
DEMO
LEFT HOLD
1
BASS
PIANO
WOODWIND STRINGS CHOIR & PAD
SYNTH.
XG
E.PIANO
SYNC.STOP
SYNC.START
CHANNEL
ON/OFF
SONG
START/STOP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
BRASS
RESET
PART
TRANSPOSE
TEMPO
2
3
4
ONE TOUCH SETTING
8
TAP TEMPO
RESET
VARIATION
EXIT
PART
SYNC.START
D
STYLE CONTROL
METRONOME
MONO
GUITAR
DSP
PIANO &
HARPSI.
VOICE EFFECT
BALANCE
REPEAT
DIRECT
ACCESS
NEW SONG
HARMONY/
ECHO
ORGAN &
ACCORDION PERCUSSION
REVERB
MIXING
CONSOLE
USER
FREEZE
1
VOICE
2
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
MEMORY
REGISTRATION MEMORY
Help messages can be displayed in
any one of the following languages:
ENGLISH
JAPANESE
GERMAN
FRENCH
SPANISH
ITALIAN
HELP
FUNCTION
The language can also be selected
in the FUNCTION “LANGUAGE”
(page 140) display.
1
2-1
2
3
Select the desired
Help topic.
4
5
6
2-2
7
Call up the topic.
Select the Language, if necessary. The language
selected here are also used for various “Messages”
shown during operations.
3
BACK
NEXT
Use this to select
different pages.
ENTER
DATA ENTRY
Help messages also feature links to the detailed
explanation or actual setting display of the selected topic.
Simply select the underlined word (using the [DATA
ENTRY] dial), and press the [ENTER] button to jump to
the detailed explanation or actual setting display of the
selected topic.
8
When “JAPANESE” is selected for
the Language parameter, and you
change this to one of the western
languages, the kanji and kana characters of the file name stored in the
disk drive are changed to western
characters. In the opposite case,
special Latin characters and marks
are changed into normal characters.
Also, in the case of floppy disk data,
text in the files are changed to characters that cannot be read by the
instrument.
Keep in mind that similar problems
may occur when trying to access
files originating or edited by a computer having a different language
operating system. In general, be
careful when switching languages
— you risk not being able to access
the data properly.
END
Press this to return
to the previous
display.
EXIT
PF-1000
49
Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data
Using the Metronome
The metronome provides a click sound, giving you an accurate tempo guide when you practice, or letting you hear and
check how a specific tempo sounds.
START/STOP
LCD
CONTRAST
BACK
MENU
DEMO
HELP
METRONOME
A
F
B
G
C
H
NEXT
VOICE
PART
ON/OFF
LAYER
LEFT
FUNCTION
DIGITAL
STUDIO
SOUND
CREATOR
D
I
E
J
MUSIC
FINDER
ENTER
DATA ENTRY
FADE IN/OUT
POP & ROCK POP BALLADS DANCE
SWING & JAZZ
R&B
COUNTRY
LATIN
MARCH &
WORLD
WALTZ
BALLROOM
PIANIST
EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2
STYLE
L
USER
DIGITAL
RECORDING
TRACK1
R
AUTO FILL IN
REC
OTS LINK
START/STOP
TOP
REW
NEW SONG
MIN
INTRO
ENDING/rit.
MAIN
B
A
START/STOP
MAX
MASTER VOLUME
SYNC.STOP
SYNC.START
REPEAT
E.PIANO
VARIATION
CHANNEL
ON/OFF
SONG
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
MONO
LEFT HOLD
1
GUITAR
BASS
PIANO
2
WOODWIND STRINGS CHOIR & PAD
SYNTH.
XG
3
4
ONE TOUCH SETTING
8
TAP TEMPO
BRASS
RESET
STYLE CONTROL
HARMONY/
ECHO
ORGAN &
ACCORDION PERCUSSION
EXIT
PART
SYNC.START
START/STOP
D
C
METRONOME
DSP
PIANO &
HARPSI.
VOICE EFFECT
BALANCE
FF
DIRECT
ACCESS
BREAK
REVERB
MIXING
CONSOLE
STYLE
ACMP
RESET
PART
TRANSPOSE
TEMPO
USER
FREEZE
1
2
3
4
VOICE
The metronome starts by pressing the METRONOME [START/STOP]
button. Adjust the tempo by using the TEMPO[–] [+] buttons (see below).
To stop the metronome, press the [START/STOP] button again.
5
6
7
8
MEMORY
REGISTRATION MEMORY
The sound, volume level,
and the beat (time signature)
of the metronome can all be
changed (page 137).
Adjusting the Tempo
This section shows you to adjust the playback tempo — which not only affects the metronome, but also the playback of
a song or an accompaniment style.
TAP TEMPO
LCD
CONTRAST
BACK
RESET
MENU
DEMO
TEMPO
HELP
A
F
B
G
C
H
NEXT
VOICE
PART
ON/OFF
LAYER
LEFT
FUNCTION
DIGITAL
STUDIO
SOUND
CREATOR
D
I
E
J
MUSIC
FINDER
ENTER
DATA ENTRY
FADE IN/OUT
POP & ROCK POP BALLADS DANCE
SWING & JAZZ
R&B
COUNTRY
LATIN
MARCH &
WORLD
WALTZ
BALLROOM
PIANIST
EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2
STYLE
L
USER
DIGITAL
RECORDING
TRACK1
R
AUTO FILL IN
REC
OTS LINK
START/STOP
TOP
REW
FF
NEW SONG
MIN
START/STOP
MAX
MASTER VOLUME
METRONOME
INTRO
ENDING/rit.
MAIN
A
B
C
DSP
PIANO &
HARPSI.
E.PIANO
VARIATION
SYNC.STOP
SYNC.START
MONO
LEFT HOLD
1
GUITAR
BASS
PIANO
CHANNEL
ON/OFF
SONG
D
TAP TEMPO
RESET
STYLE CONTROL
1
TAP TEMPO
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
WOODWIND STRINGS CHOIR & PAD
SYNTH.
XG
TRANSPOSE
PART
2
RESET
TEMPO
Adjust the tempo by using either the TEMPO [–]
[+] buttons or the [DATA ENTRY] dial.
The number in the display indicates how many
quarter-note beats there are in one minute. The
range is between 5 and 500. The higher the value,
the faster the tempo.
Press either the TEMPO [–]
button or the [+] button.
Press this to
ND close the
TEMPO display.
E
50
PF-1000
EXIT
3
4
8
BRASS
RESET
TEMPO
2
ONE TOUCH SETTING
EXIT
PART
SYNC.START
START/STOP
HARMONY/
ECHO
ORGAN &
ACCORDION PERCUSSION
VOICE EFFECT
BALANCE
REPEAT
DIRECT
ACCESS
BREAK
REVERB
MIXING
CONSOLE
STYLE
ACMP
When you change the tempo, both tempos of the
current song and style will be changed to the same
tempo. To restore their respective default (initial)
tempo settings, press both the TEMPO [–] [+]
buttons simultaneously. Also refer to the “Tempo
Indications — MAIN display” (page 51) for more
about tempo.
VOICE
USER
FREEZE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
MEMORY
REGISTRATION MEMORY
Songs and accompaniment
styles have been given
default (initial) tempo
settings, designed to best
suit the song/style.
Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data
Tap Tempo
This useful feature lets you tap out the tempo for a song or an accompaniment style.
Simply tap the [TAP TEMPO] button at the desired speed, and the tempo of the song or
the accompaniment style changes to match your tapping.
the song or the
1 Playback
accompaniment style
(page 59, 74).
2
TAP TEMPO
RESET
TEMPO
Tap the [TAP TEMPO] button twice
to change the tempo.
■ Tempo Indications — MAIN Display
There are three different tempo indications in the Main display, as shown below.
Indicates the default (initial) tempo
setting for the currently selected
song (unless the tempo has been
changed manually).
Hitting the [TAP TEMPO]
button produces a tapping
sound. You can change this
sound, if desired (page 138).
n
You can also use Tap Tempo
to automatically start the
song or accompaniment
style at the desired tempo.
While both the song and
accompaniment style are
stopped, tap the [TAP
TEMPO] button several
times, and the selected
accompaniment style starts
automatically at the tempo
you tapped. While a song is
set to Sync. Start stand-by
(page 60, 74), tapping the
[TAP TEMPO] button starts
the song playback in the
same manner. For songs
and styles in 2/4 and 4/4
time, tap four times; for 3/4
time, tap three times; for 5/4
time, tap five times.
Indicates the current tempo for the
selected song, accompaniment
style or the metronome which is
now playing back. When nothing is
playing back (stopped), this
indicates the tempo for the selected
style. When the song and style are
played back simultaneously, the
tempo of the style is automatically
changed to match the tempo of the
song, and is displayed here. This
tempo is used for recording when
recording a song or
accompaniment style.
Indicates the default (initial) tempo
setting for the currently selected
accompaniment style (unless the
tempo has been changed
manually).
PF-1000
51
Playing the Demos
The PF-1000 is an extraordinarily versatile and sophisticated instrument, featuring a wide variety of dynamic voices and
Reference
rhythms, plus a wealth of advanced functions. Three different types of Demo songs have been specially prepared
showcasing the stunning sound and features of the PF-1000.
MENU
DEMO
HELP
LCD
CONTRAST
BACK
MENU
DEMO
FUNCTION
HELP
A
F
B
G
C
H
NEXT
VOICE
PART
ON/OFF
LAYER
LEFT
FUNCTION
DIGITAL
STUDIO
SOUND
CREATOR
D
I
E
J
MUSIC
FINDER
ENTER
DATA ENTRY
FADE IN/OUT
POP & ROCK POP BALLADS DANCE
SWING & JAZZ
R&B
COUNTRY
LATIN
MARCH &
WORLD
WALTZ
BALLROOM
PIANIST
USER
EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2
STYLE
L
DIGITAL
RECORDING
TRACK1
R
AUTO FILL IN
REC
OTS LINK
START/STOP
TOP
REW
FF
NEW SONG
BREAK
MAX
MASTER VOLUME
INTRO
1
ENDING/rit.
MAIN
A
START/STOP
B
C
SYNC.STOP
SYNC.START
E.PIANO
CHANNEL
ON/OFF
SONG
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
BRASS
RESET
PART
TRANSPOSE
TEMPO
Pressing the [DEMO]
button automatically
plays back the Demo
songs at random.
HARMONY/
ECHO
MONO
LEFT HOLD
1
ORGAN &
ACCORDION PERCUSSION
GUITAR
BASS
PIANO
WOODWIND STRINGS CHOIR & PAD
SYNTH.
XG
2
3
4
ONE TOUCH SETTING
8
TAP TEMPO
RESET
VARIATION
EXIT
PART
SYNC.START
START/STOP
D
STYLE CONTROL
METRONOME
DSP
PIANO &
HARPSI.
VOICE EFFECT
BALANCE
REPEAT
DIRECT
ACCESS
MIN
REVERB
MIXING
CONSOLE
STYLE
ACMP
VOICE
USER
FREEZE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
MEMORY
REGISTRATION MEMORY
MENU
DEMO
HELP
FUNCTION
2
2-1
Use the [BACK][NEXT] buttons to select the desired Demo category.
Function Demos ....... These demonstrate each of the different functions on the PF-1000.
Voice Demos ............. These showcase the voices of the PF-1000.
Style Demos .............. These introduce you to the rhythms and accompaniment styles of the PF-1000.
BACK
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
NEXT
2-3
1
2-2
52
PF-1000
Use these to select
different display pages.
2
3
4
5
6
7
Press one of these buttons twice
— once to select the desired
demo, and once again to start it.
8
Press this to play back all Demo songs/items continuously, starting from the first
item at the top left of the display. This is available only from the FUNCTION page.
All of the available demos are played back in sequence, starting from the one at top left.
The VOICE and STYLE pages do not have the [AUTO] button; however, all demo songs
are played back in sequence.
Pressing this button cancels the interactive features of the Function Demos (otherwise
available in step 3 below).
Playing the Demos
3
For the Function demos, an introduction screen appears in the display and
the Demo starts playing.
Use the [BACK][NEXT]
buttons in the introduction
screen to call up the previous or next page.
This example shows the Voices in the
FUNCTION demo.
BACK
n
NEXT
Press the SONG [START/
STOP] button to stop the
Demo song. To start the
Demo again from the point
at which it was stopped,
press the SONG [START/
STOP] button again.
Rewind and fast-forward
can also be used with the
Demo songs (page 76).
F
G
H
I
J
ENTER
DATA ENTRY
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Select the desired word or item by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial, then press
the [ENTER] button or number buttons ([1▼], [2▼], etc.) to call it up.
4
Relevant explanations are shown in the display.
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
EXIT
END
Return to the MAIN screen.
PF-1000
53
Voices
The PF-1000 gives you an enormous selection of authentic voices, including various keyboard instruments, strings and
brass — and many, many more.
PIANO &
HARPSI.
BRASS
LCD
CONTRAST
BACK
MENU
DEMO
HELP
A
F
B
G
C
H
ORGAN &
ACCORDION PERCUSSION
GUITAR
BASS
WOODWIND STRINGS CHOIR & PAD
SYNTH.
XG
E.PIANO
USER
NEXT
VOICE
PART
ON/OFF
LAYER
VOICE
LEFT
FUNCTION
DIGITAL
STUDIO
SOUND
CREATOR
D
I
MUSIC
FINDER
J
E
ENTER
DATA ENTRY
FADE IN/OUT
POP & ROCK POP BALLADS DANCE
SWING & JAZZ
R&B
COUNTRY
LATIN
MARCH &
WORLD
WALTZ
BALLROOM
PIANIST
USER
EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2
STYLE
L
DIGITAL
RECORDING
TRACK1
R
AUTO FILL IN
REC
OTS LINK
START/STOP
TOP
REW
FF
NEW SONG
MIN
MAX
MASTER VOLUME
INTRO
A
START/STOP
ENDING/rit.
MAIN
B
C
SYNC.STOP
SYNC.START
LEFT HOLD
1
BASS
PIANO
WOODWIND STRINGS CHOIR & PAD
SYNTH.
XG
E.PIANO
VARIATION
CHANNEL
ON/OFF
SONG
D
2
3
4
ONE TOUCH SETTING
EXIT
PART
SYNC.START
START/STOP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TAP TEMPO
BRASS
RESET
STYLE CONTROL
METRONOME
MONO
GUITAR
DSP
PIANO &
HARPSI.
VOICE EFFECT
BALANCE
REPEAT
DIRECT
ACCESS
BREAK
HARMONY/
ECHO
ORGAN &
ACCORDION PERCUSSION
REVERB
MIXING
CONSOLE
STYLE
ACMP
RESET
PART
TRANSPOSE
TEMPO
USER
FREEZE
VOICE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
MEMORY
REGISTRATION MEMORY
Selecting a Voice
1
Select the desired voice group.
PIANO &
HARPSI.
BRASS
ORGAN &
ACCORDION PERCUSSION
GUITAR
BASS
WOODWIND STRINGS CHOIR & PAD
SYNTH.
XG
E.PIANO
USER
n
VOICE
2
Indicates that the display
is for selecting the MAIN
voice (page 25).
2-1
When you select a voice
group, the last selected
voice will automatically be
selected.
Select the memory location of the
voice (PRESET/USER/FLOPPY DISK).
BACK
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
Selecting a voice automatically selects the best-suited
effect and other settings for
that particular voice. You can
disable this so that settings
are not automatically
selected (page 132).
n
NEXT
You can set how much the
volume of the voice changes
according to your playing
strength (page 130).
n
For a list of the available
voices, refer to the separate
Data List.
n
2-3
2-2
Select the
various pages
in the current
voice group.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Press this to call up the display for selecting the voice group.
3
54
PF-1000
Play the keyboard to hear the
selected
voice.
END
Select the voice.
Press this to start the
demo of the selected
voice. To stop the demo
at any time, press this
button again.
Press this to return to
the MAIN display.
EXIT
You can set whether the
voice bank and program
change numbers (“MSBLSB-Program Change number” at the right above the
voice name) are displayed or
not (page 138).
n
XG is a major enhancement
of the GM System level 1 format, and was developed by
Yamaha specially to provide
more voices and variations,
as well as greater expressive
control over voices and
effects, and to ensure compatibility of data well into the
future.
Voices
Voice Characteristics
The voice type and its defining characteristics are indicated above the voice name.
Natural!
These rich and luscious voices are comprised mostly of keyboard instrument sounds and are especially intended
for playing piano and other keyboard parts. Since they use a completely independent sound source, you can play
full, sustained chords — even along with the accompaniment style — and not have to worry about notes cutting
off. They also take full advantage of Yamaha’s advanced sampling technology such as Stereo Sampling, Dynamic
Sampling, Sustain Sampling, and Key-off Sampling.
Live!
These acoustic instrument sounds were sampled in stereo, to produce a truly authentic, rich sound — full of
atmosphere and ambience.
Cool!
These voices capture the dynamic textures and subtle nuances of electric instruments — thanks to a huge amount
of memory and some very sophisticated programming.
Sweet!
These acoustic instrument sounds also benefit from Yamaha’s sophisticated technology — and feature a sound so
finely detailed and natural, you’ll swear you’re playing the real thing!
Drum
Various drum and percussion sounds are assigned to individual keys, letting you play the sounds from the
keyboard.
SFX
Various special effect sounds are assigned to individual keys, letting you play the sounds from the keyboard.
Keyboard Percussion
When one of the drum of SFX kits is selected in the PERCUSSION voice group, various drum, percussion, and
special effect sounds are assigned to individual keys, letting you play the sounds from the keyboard. The various
drums and percussion instruments of the Standard Kit are indicated by symbols above the assigned keys. Keep in
mind that even though different kits feature different sounds, some same-named sounds in different kits are
identical.
Refer to the separate Data List (Drum/key Assignment List) for a listing of the sounds in each drum/SFX kit.
One-touch Piano Play
This convenient, easy-to-use feature completely and automatically reconfigures the entire PF-1000 for optimum piano
performance. No matter what settings you’ve made from the panel, you can instantly call up the piano settings by a
single button press.
PIANO
PIANO button
This reconfigures all of the panel settings for playing the PF-1000 as a piano.
Piano Lock function
The convenient Piano Lock function lets you “lock” the piano so that you don’t
inadvertently change the settings by pressing another button on the panel. Once
locked, the PF-1000 stays in the piano mode, even if other buttons are pressed —
preventing you from accidently starting a song or accompaniment style during a piano
concert.
You can also use the metronome with this function
(page 50).
Even if you turn Piano Lock
off, the piano settings are
still active.
Hold down the [PIANO] button for a short time, until a message appears prompting
you to enable Piano Lock.
To enable Piano Lock, select “OK.”
To turn Piano Lock off, hold down the [PIANO] button again for a short time.
PF-1000
55
Voices
Layer/Left — Playing Several Sounds Simultaneously
The PF-1000 lets you set three voices for simultaneous play: MAIN, LAYER, and LEFT. By effectively combining these
three, you can create richly textured, multi-instrument setups for your performance.
VOICE
PART
ON/OFF
LAYER
LCD
CONTRAST
BACK
MENU
DEMO
HELP
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
NEXT
VOICE
PART
ON/OFF
LAYER
LEFT
LEFT
FUNCTION
DIGITAL
STUDIO
SOUND
CREATOR
MUSIC
FINDER
J
E
ENTER
DATA ENTRY
FADE IN/OUT
POP & ROCK POP BALLADS DANCE
SWING & JAZZ
R&B
COUNTRY
LATIN
MARCH &
WORLD
WALTZ
BALLROOM
PIANIST
USER
EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2
STYLE
L
DIGITAL
RECORDING
TRACK1
R
AUTO FILL IN
REC
OTS LINK
START/STOP
TOP
REW
FF
BREAK
MAX
MASTER VOLUME
INTRO
ENDING/rit.
MAIN
A
START/STOP
B
C
E.PIANO
SYNC.STOP
SYNC.START
CHANNEL
ON/OFF
SONG
START/STOP
VARIATION
HARMONY/
ECHO
MONO
LEFT HOLD
1
ORGAN &
ACCORDION PERCUSSION
GUITAR
BASS
PIANO
WOODWIND STRINGS CHOIR & PAD
SYNTH.
XG
2
3
4
ONE TOUCH SETTING
EXIT
PART
SYNC.START
D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TAP TEMPO
RESET
STYLE CONTROL
METRONOME
DSP
PIANO &
HARPSI.
VOICE EFFECT
BALANCE
REPEAT
DIRECT
ACCESS
NEW SONG
MIN
REVERB
MIXING
CONSOLE
STYLE
ACMP
BRASS
RESET
TEMPO
PART
TRANSPOSE
VOICE
USER
FREEZE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
MEMORY
REGISTRATION MEMORY
Playing a layer of two voices
LAYER part
MAIN part
Playing two voices separately — on the left
and right sections of the keyboard
Split point
LEFT part
MAIN part
Left range
Playing three different voices — one on the
left section of the keyboard, plus a layer of
two on the right
Right range
Split point
LAYER part
LEFT part
MAIN part
Left range
Right range
Layer — Layering Two Different Voices
1
Press this to
turn the LAYER
function on. To
turn it off, press
the button again.
VOICE
PART
ON/OFF
LAYER
2
Select LAYER with the [G] button. Press the same button
to call up the VOICE display, from which you can select
the specific voice you want to play in a layer with the
Main voice. The method of selecting a voice here is the
same as that in VOICE (MAIN) display (page 54).
LEFT
F
G
H
I
J
EXIT
END
56
PF-1000
Press this to return to the
MAIN display.
There is an alternate
way for quickly selecting both the MAIN and
LAYER voices from the
panel: While holding
down one panel voice
button, press a second
voice button. The first
selected voice
becomes the MAIN
voice, and the second
becomes the LAYER.
Voices
Left — Setting Separate Voices for the Left and Right Sections of the Keyboard
1
2
Set the LEFT to
ON. Press this
button again to
set it to OFF.
Select LEFT with the [H] button. Press the same
button to call up the VOICE display, from which you
can select the specific voice you want to play in a
left. How to select the voice is the same as the way of
VOICE (MAIN) screen (page 54).
VOICE
PART
ON/OFF
LAYER
The split point can be freely
set to any key on the keyboard. To set it, call up the
SPLIT POINT display by
pressing the [I] (SPLIT
POINT) button in the MAIN
display. The operation steps
are the same as in the
STYLE SETTING/SPLIT
POINT display of the FUNCTION page (page 127).
LEFT
F
G
n
H
Each part (MAIN, LAYER,
and LEFT) can have its own
volume setting (page 61).
I
EXIT
END
J
n
You can also use the LAYER
and LEFT functions
together, to create a combination layer/split. To do this,
set separate voices for the
left and right sections of the
keyboard (as indicated), and
set up a layer of two different
voices on the right.
Press this to
return to the
MAIN display.
Applying Voice Effects
This section of the panel lets you add a variety of effects to the voices you play on the keyboard.
REVERB
DSP
VARIATION
HARMONY/
ECHO
MONO
LEFT HOLD
LCD
CONTRAST
BACK
MENU
DEMO
HELP
A
F
B
G
C
H
NEXT
VOICE EFFECT
VOICE
PART
ON/OFF
LAYER
LEFT
FUNCTION
I
D
DIGITAL
STUDIO
SOUND
CREATOR
MUSIC
FINDER
J
E
ENTER
DATA ENTRY
FADE IN/OUT
POP & ROCK POP BALLADS DANCE
SWING & JAZZ
R&B
COUNTRY
LATIN
MARCH &
WORLD
WALTZ
BALLROOM
PIANIST
USER
EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2
STYLE
L
DIGITAL
RECORDING
TRACK1
R
STYLE
ACMP
AUTO FILL IN
REC
OTS LINK
START/STOP
TOP
REW
FF
BREAK
MAX
MASTER VOLUME
START/STOP
METRONOME
INTRO
ENDING/rit.
MAIN
A
B
C
DSP
PIANO &
HARPSI.
E.PIANO
SYNC.STOP
SYNC.START
CHANNEL
ON/OFF
SONG
START/STOP
TAP TEMPO
RESET
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
MONO
LEFT HOLD
1
GUITAR
BASS
PIANO
WOODWIND STRINGS CHOIR & PAD
SYNTH.
XG
2
3
4
ONE TOUCH SETTING
8
BRASS
RESET
TEMPO
HARMONY/
ECHO
ORGAN &
ACCORDION PERCUSSION
EXIT
PART
SYNC.START
D
STYLE CONTROL
VARIATION
VOICE EFFECT
BALANCE
REPEAT
DIRECT
ACCESS
NEW SONG
MIN
REVERB
MIXING
CONSOLE
TRANSPOSE
PART
VOICE
USER
FREEZE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
MEMORY
REGISTRATION MEMORY
Press one of the effect buttons to turn the corresponding effects on. Press it again to turn the effect off.
For explanations on each of the effects, see below.
■ REVERB
Reverb is an effect that recreates the acoustic ambiance of a performance space — anything from a small jazz club to a
concert hall.
■ DSP
The PF-1000 features a variety of dynamic built-in digital effects, letting you process the
sound in various ways. You can use DSP to enhance the voices in subtle ways — such as
by applying chorus to add animation and depth, or using a symphonic effect to give the
sound warmth and richness. DSP also has effects such as distortion that can completely
change the character of the sound. DSP is set for the currently selected part (MAIN/
LAYER/LEFT).
The DSP and VARIATION
effect types and the their
depth can be selected and
adjusted in the MIXING CONSOLE display (page 119).
■ VARIATION (Regular voice only; page 86)
This control changes the Variation effect settings, letting you alter some aspect of the effect, depending on the selected
type. For example, when the Rotary Speaker effect is selected (page 119), this lets you switch the rotor speed between
slow and fast.
PF-1000
57
Voices
■ HARMONY/ECHO
This control adds Harmony or Echo effects to the voices played on the right hand section
of the keyboard (page 132).
The Portamento effect creates
a smooth pitch glide between
successively played notes.
■ MONO
This control determines whether the voice is played monophonically (only one note at a
time) or polyphonically for each part (MAIN/LAYER/LEFT). This is set to MONO when the
lamp is lit, and set to polyphonic when the lamp is off. When set to MONO, only the last
note played will sound. This lets you play wind instrument voices more realistically.
Depending on the selected voice, the MONO setting also lets you effectively use the
Portamento effect, when playing in legato.
■ LEFT HOLD
This function causes the left part voice to be held even when the keys are released — the
same effect as when the damper (sustain) pedal is pressed. This function is especially
effective when used with the auto accompaniment. For example, if you play and release a
chord in the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard (with the left part on and the
Left voice set to Strings), the strings part sustains, adding a natural richness to the overall
accompaniment sound.
You can add special emphasis to melody lines you play
over chords by using the
Layer function with a monophonic voice. Set the Main
voice to play polyphonically
and set the Layer voice to
play monophonically
(MONO). In this case, the
melody you play — including
the top notes of any chords
— sounds monophonically.
Try this using the following
voices.
MAIN voice: Brass Section
(polyphonic) + LAYER voice:
Sweet Trump (monophonic)
Using the Pedals
Included with the PF-1000 is
a special pedal unit that
features the following pedals.
Damper Pedal
Left Pedal
Sostenuto Pedal
You can also assign one of
many other functions to
these pedals (as well as the
optional foot controller or
footswitch). For example, you
can use it to start/stop the
accompaniment style, or use
it to play Fill-ins (page 128).
■ Damper Pedal (Right)
The damper pedal performs the same function as the
damper pedal on an actual acoustic piano, letting you
sustain the sound of the voices even after releasing the
keys.
When you press the damper pedal here,
the notes you play before you release the
pedal have a longer sustain.
• Some voices may sound
continuously or have a
long decay after the notes
have been released while
the damper pedal is held.
• Certain voices in the [PERCUSSION] and [XG]
groups may not be affected
by use of the damper pedal.
■ Sostenuto Pedal (Center)
If you play a note or chord on the keyboard and press the
sostenuto pedal while the note(s) are held, those notes will
be sustained as long as the pedal is held, but all
subsequently played notes will not be sustained.
When you press the sostenuto pedal
here while holding the note, the note will
sustain as long as you hold the pedal.
• Certain voices, such as
[STRINGS] or [BRASS],
sustain continuously when
the sostenuto pedal is
pressed.
• Certain voices in the
[PERCUSSION] and [XG]
groups may not be
affected by use of the sostenuto pedal.
■ Left Pedal
When the Piano voice is selected, pressing this pedal reduces the volume and slightly
changes the timbre of the notes you play.
The settings assigned to this pedal may differ depending on the selected voice.
The depth of the left pedal
effect can be adjusted
(page 128).
■ Foot Controller/Footswitch
An optional Yamaha foot controller (FC7) or footswitch (FC4 or FC5) can be connected to
the AUX PEDAL jack and used to control various functions assigned in the FUNCTION page (page 128).
58
PF-1000
Styles
The PF-1000 features styles (accompaniment patterns) in a variety of different musical genres including pops, jazz, Latin
and dance. To use it, all you have to do is play the chords with your left hand as you perform and the selected
Accompaniment Style (style) matching your music will automatically play along, instantly following the chords you
play. Try selecting some of the different styles (refer to separate Data List (Style List) ) and play them.
POP & ROCK POP BALLADS DANCE
SWING & JAZZ
R&B
COUNTRY
LATIN
MARCH &
WORLD
WALTZ
BALLROOM
PIANIST
USER
STYLE
ACMP
AUTO FILL IN
BREAK
INTRO
OTS LINK
ENDING/rit.
MAIN
A
B
SYNC.STOP
SYNC.START
START/STOP
D
C
LCD
CONTRAST
BACK
STYLE CONTROL
MENU
DEMO
HELP
A
F
B
G
C
H
NEXT
VOICE
PART
ON/OFF
LAYER
LEFT
FUNCTION
DIGITAL
STUDIO
SOUND
CREATOR
D
I
E
J
MUSIC
FINDER
ENTER
DATA ENTRY
FADE IN/OUT
POP & ROCK POP BALLADS DANCE
SWING & JAZZ
R&B
COUNTRY
LATIN
MARCH &
WORLD
WALTZ
BALLROOM
PIANIST
USER
EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2
STYLE
L
DIGITAL
RECORDING
TRACK1
R
AUTO FILL IN
REC
OTS LINK
START/STOP
TOP
REW
NEW SONG
MIN
MAX
MASTER VOLUME
START/STOP
INTRO
ENDING/rit.
MAIN
A
B
C
SYNC.STOP
SYNC.START
REPEAT
E.PIANO
CHANNEL
ON/OFF
SONG
D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
BRASS
RESET
MONO
LEFT HOLD
1
GUITAR
BASS
PIANO
WOODWIND STRINGS CHOIR & PAD
SYNTH.
XG
PART
TRANSPOSE
TEMPO
HARMONY/
ECHO
ORGAN &
ACCORDION PERCUSSION
2
3
4
ONE TOUCH SETTING
8
TAP TEMPO
RESET
VARIATION
EXIT
PART
SYNC.START
START/STOP
STYLE CONTROL
METRONOME
DSP
PIANO &
HARPSI.
VOICE EFFECT
BALANCE
FF
DIRECT
ACCESS
BREAK
REVERB
MIXING
CONSOLE
STYLE
ACMP
USER
FREEZE
VOICE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
MEMORY
REGISTRATION MEMORY
Playing a style
1
POP & ROCK POP BALLADS DANCE
SWING & JAZZ
R&B
COUNTRY
LATIN
MARCH &
WORLD
WALTZ
BALLROOM
PIANIST
USER
STYLE
2
BACK
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
NEXT
2-1
2-2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Select a location
(Preset, User, Floppy
Disk) for saving the
style.
Select a Style.
When you've opened a lower directory's display,
this button (UP) lets you call up the next higher
directory, from which you can select Style groups.
For a list of the available
accompaniment styles, refer
to the separate Data List
(Style List).
PF-1000
59
Styles
3
When the [ACMP] button is set to on, you can play/indicate chords from the auto
accompaniment section of the keyboard. (Depending on the settings, this may be
the range of the Left voice, or the entire keyboard.)
ACMP
AUTO FILL IN
BREAK
INTRO
You can set the key range
for auto accompaniment
(page 127).
OTS LINK
ENDING/rit.
MAIN
A
B
SYNC.STOP
SYNC.START
START/STOP
D
C
STYLE CONTROL
4
Sync. Start
Enabling this lets you start
the style simply by playing
the keyboard.
Turn SYNC. (SYNCHRONIZED) START on.
ACMP
AUTO FILL IN
BREAK
INTRO
OTS LINK
ENDING/rit.
MAIN
A
B
SYNC.STOP
SYNC.START
START/STOP
D
C
STYLE CONTROL
5
As soon as you play a chord with the auto accompaniment section, the style starts.
For details about chord fingerings, refer to page 62.
Split point
The Tempo can be adjusted
using the TEMPO [–][+] or [TAP
TEMPO] button.
If you tap the [TAP TEMPO]
button, the tempo will adjust to
the same speed that you tapped.
Auto Accompaniment section
6
SYNC.STOP
Stop the style.
SYNC.START
START/STOP
END
ACMP
BREAK
Turn ACMP off.
• You can begin the rhythm
channels (tracks) of the
Style by pressing the
[START/STOP] button.
• The rhythm channels of
the style can also be
started by tapping the
[TAP TEMPO] button.
With the style stopped,
tap the [TAP TEMPO]
button three, four or five
times (three for 3/4 time,
four for 2/4 or 4/4 time,
five for 5/4 time).
When you simultaneously
play back accompaniment
styles with a song, the
accompaniment parts
recorded to the song (channels 9 - 16) are temporarily
replaced by the selected
accompaniment style — letting you try out and use different accompaniment with
the song (page 75).
Accompaniment Style Characteristics
The defining characteristics of some of the accompaniment styles are indicated above the relevant style names in the Open/Save display.
Session!
These styles provide even greater realism and authentic backing by mixing in original chord types and changes, as well as special riffs with
chord changes, with the Main sections. These have been programmed to add “spice” and a professional touch to your performances of
certain songs and in certain genres. As a result, the styles may not necessarily be appropriate — or even harmonically correct — for all
songs and for all chord playing. In some cases for example, playing a simple major triad may result in a seventh chord, or playing an onbass chord may result in incorrect or unexpected accompaniment.
Piano Combo!
These accompaniment styles feature a basic piano trio (piano, bass, and drums), augmented in some cases with other instruments. Since
this is a small combo sound, the accompaniment backing is appropriately sparse, making it useful and effective for a wide variety of songs.
Pianist!
These special styles provide piano-only accompaniment — effectively recreating the left-hand performance of an accomplished pianist.
Just by playing the proper chords with your left hand, you can automatically add complicated arpeggios and bass/chord patterns — such as
difficult-to-play stride piano parts.
60
PF-1000
Styles
Playing a Style’s Rhythm Channels only
1
The Rhythm channels are
part of the styles. Each style
has different rhythm patterns.
Select a style (page 59).
2
Set to off.
ACMP
AUTO FILL IN
BREAK
INTRO
You can also start the
rhythm simply by playing a
key on the keyboard, if Sync
Start is enabled (turn on the
[SYNC.START] button).
Rhythm starts.
OTS LINK
ENDING/rit.
MAIN
A
B
C
SYNC.STOP
SYNC.START
START/STOP
D
STYLE CONTROL
3
Play along with the rhythm playback.
The Tempo can be adjusted using the TEMPO [–][+] or [TAP TEMPO] buttons.
If you tap the [TAP TEMPO] button, the tempo will adjust to the same speed that
you tapped.
END
When selecting the style
group “PIANIST,” the
rhythm doesn’t sound.
When you want to use any
of the styles, always make
sure that ACMP is turned
on.
Press the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP]
button again to stop the rhythm playback.
Adjusting the Volume Balance/Channel Muting
BALANCE display
MIC part
Call up the
BALANCE
display.
STYLE part (Auto
Accompaniment section)
SONG part
BALANCE
Parts played from the
keyboard (MAIN/LAYER/
LEFT)
Adjust the output level of the Part.
CHANNEL
ON/OFF
CHANNEL ON/OFF display
PART
Call up the
Channel ON/
OFF display.
Call up the STYLE display by pressing the [CHANNEL ON/OFF]
button, then turn the instrument you want to cancel off. To listen to
only one instrument by itself, hold down the appropriate button for
the channel to set the channel to SOLO. To cancel SOLO, simply
press the appropriate channel button again.
Channel
Refers to the MIDI channel
in the song data (page 147).
The channels are assigned
as shown below.
Song
1 - 16
Accompaniment Style
9 - 16
PF-1000
61
Styles
Chord Fingerings
The style playback can be controlled by the chords you play in the keys to the left of the split point. There are 7 types of
fingerings as described below. Go to the CHORD FINGERING page (page 128), and select the Chord Fingerings. The
page shows how to play chords with your left hand.
SINGLE FINGER
Single Finger accompaniment makes it simple to produce beautifully orchestrated accompaniment using major,
seventh, minor and minor-seventh chords by pressing a minimum number of keys on the auto accompaniment section
of the keyboard. The abbreviated chord fingerings described below are used.
For a major chord, press the root key only.
For a minor chord, simultaneously press the root key
and a black key to its left.
For a seventh chord, simultaneously press the root
key and a white key to its left.
For a minor-seventh chord, simultaneously press the
root key and both a white and black key to its left.
MULTI FINGER
The Multi Finger mode automatically detects Single Finger or Fingered chord fingerings,
so you can use either type of fingering without having to switch fingering modes. If you
want to play minor, seventh, or minor-seventh chords using the SINGLE FINGER
operation in the MULTI FINGER Mode, always press the closest white/black key(s) to the
root of the chord.
FINGERED
This mode lets you produce accompaniment by playing full chords on the auto
accompaniment section of the keyboard. The Fingered mode recognizes the various
chord types listed on the next page.
Chord detection in the AI
Full Keyboard mode occurs
at approximately 8th-note
intervals. Extremely short
chords — less than an 8th
note in length — may not be
detected.
FULL KEYBOARD
This method detects chords in the entire key range. Chords are detected in a way similar
to Fingered, even if you split the notes between your left and right hands — for example,
playing a bass note with your left hand and a chord with your right, or by playing a chord
with your left hand and a melody note with your right.
In Full Keyboard mode,
chords are detected based
on the lowest and second
lowest notes you play. If the
two lowest notes fall within a
single octave, those two
notes determine the chord. If
the lowest note and the second lowest note are separated by more than one
octave, the lowest note
becomes the bass and the
chord is determined from the
second lowest note and the
other notes played in the
same octave.
AI FINGERED
This mode is basically the same as FINGERED, with the exception that less than three
notes can be played to indicate the chords (based on the previously played chord, etc.).
AI
FINGERED ON BASS
This mode accepts the same fingerings as the FINGERED mode, but the lowest note
played in the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard is used as the bass note,
allowing you to play “on bass” chords. For example, to indicate a C-on-E chord, play a C
major chord with E as the lowest note (E, G, C).
Artificial Intelligence
AI FULL KEYBOARD
When this advanced auto accompaniment mode is engaged, the PF-1000 will
automatically create appropriate accompaniment while you play just about anything,
anywhere on the keyboard using both hands. You don’t have to worry about specifying the accompaniment chords.
Although the AI Full Keyboard mode is designed to work with many songs, some arrangements may not be suitable for
use with this feature.
This mode is similarto FULL KEYBOARD, with the exception that less than three notes can be played to indicate the
chords (based on the previously played chord, etc.). 9th and 11th chords cannot be played.
62
PF-1000
Styles
Chord Types Recognized in the Fingered Mode (Example for “C” chords)
CmM7
CmM7 9
(
)
(
(
C5
CM7 5
Cm7 9
Cm7 11
)
CM7aug
11
(
Caug
CM7
)
Csus4
CM7 9
CM7
)
C6
)
C9
(
C6 9
C
Cm9
Cm6
Cm7
Cm7 5
CmM7 5
Cdim
Cdim7
C7
C7 13
C7
9
C7 5
C7aug
C7sus4
Normal Voicing
Display for root “C”
Major [M]
1-3-5
C
Ninth [9]
1-2-3-5
C9
Sixth [6]
1 - (3) - 5 - 6
C6
Sixth ninth [69]
1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 6 or 3 - 6 - 2*
C69
1 - 3 - (5) - 7
CM7
Major seventh ninth
[M79]
Major seventh add sharp eleventh [M7 11]
Flatted fifth [ 5]
Major seventh flatted fifth [M7 5]
Suspended fourth [sus4]
Augmented [aug]
Major seventh augmented [M7aug]
Minor [m]
1 - 2 - 3 - (5)j - 7
CM79
1 - (2) - 3 - 4 - 5 - 7 or 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - (5) - 7 CM7 11
1 - 3 - 5
C 5
1-3- 5-7
CM7 5
1-4-5
1-3- 5
1 - (3) - 5 - 7
1- 3-5
1 - 2 - 3 - 5
1 - 3 - 5 - 6
Minor ninth [m9]
Minor sixth [m6]
Minor seventh [m7]
Minor seventh ninth
[m79]
Minor seventh eleventh
[m711]
Minor major seventh [mM7]
Minor major seventh ninth
[mM79]
Minor seventh flatted fifth [m7 5]
Minor major seventh flatted fifth [mM7 5]
Diminished [dim]
Diminished seventh [dim7]
Seventh [7]
Seventh flatted ninth [7 9]
1 - 3 - (5) - 7
1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 or 3 - 7 - 2
1 - (2) - 3 - 4 - 5 - ( 7)
1 - 3 - (5) - 7
1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7
1 - 3 - 5 - 7
1 - 3 - 5 - 7
1 - 3 - 5
1 - 3 - 5 - 6
1 - 3 - (5) - 7 or 1 - (3) - 5 - 7
1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7
Csus4
Caug
CM7aug
Cm
Cm9
Cm6
Cm7
Cm79
Cm711
CmM7
CmM79
Cm7 5
CmM7 5
Cdim
Cdim7
C7
Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4]
C7 9
1-3-5- 6- 7
C7 13
1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 or 3 - 7 - 2*
C79
1 - (2) - 3 - 4 - 5 - 7 or 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - (5) - 7 C7 11
13
1 - 3 - (5) - 6 - 7 or 3 - 6 - 7
C7
1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7
C7 9
1 - 3 - 5 - 7
C7 5
1-3- 5- 7
C7aug
1-4-5- 7
C7sus4
Suspended second [sus2]
1-2-5
Seventh add flatted thirteenth [7 13]
Seventh ninth [79]
Seventh add sharp eleventh [7 11]
Seventh add thirteenth [713]
Seventh sharp ninth [7 9]
Seventh flatted fifth [7 5]
Seventh augmented [7aug]
)
(
)
(
)
(
(
)
(
)
)
(
Chord Name [Abbreviation]
Major seventh [M7]
Csus2
(
)
11
(
C7
C7 13
C7 9
)
)
(
)
(
C7 9
(
(
)
)
(
)
Cm
• Notes in parentheses can
be omitted.
• For FINGERED, FINGERED ON BASS, and AI
FINGERED, if you play
any three adjacent keys
(including black keys), the
chord sound will be canceled and only the rhythm
instruments will continue
playing (Chord Cancel
function). This let you play
back only the rhythm.
• Playing two same root
keys in the adjacent
octaves produces accompaniment based only on
the root.
• A perfect fifth (1 + 5) produces accompaniment
based on the root and the
fifth.
• The auto accompaniment
Style will sometimes not
change when related
chords are played in
sequence (e.g. some
minor chords followed by
the minor seventh).
• You can also have the PF1000 “teach” you how to
play Fingered chords.
From the CHORD FINGERING display
(page 128), specify the
chord you want to learn,
and the notes you should
press are indicated in the
display.
Csus2
* Only this voicing (inversion) is recognized. Other chords not marked with an asterisk can be played in any inversion.
PF-1000
63
Styles
Arranging the Style Pattern (SECTIONS: MAIN A/B/C/D, INTRO, ENDING, BREAK)
The PF-1000 features various types of Auto Accompaniment Sections that allow you to
vary the arrangement of the Style. They are: Intro, Main, Break and Ending. By switching
among them as you play, you can easily produce the dynamic elements of a professionalsounding arrangement in your performance.
1
Select a style (page 59).
2
2-1
Turn the ACMP function on.
ACMP
AUTO FILL IN
BREAK
INTRO
OTS LINK
ENDING/rit.
MAIN
A
B
SYNC.STOP
SYNC.START
START/STOP
D
C
STYLE CONTROL
2-3
2-2
3
Turn the SYNC. START function on.
Press the [INTRO] button. To cancel the INTRO section
before starting the style, press the [INTRO] button again.
The Intro section starts as soon as you play a key in the Auto
Accompaniment section of the keyboard, and changes to the Main section.
Split point
Auto Accompaniment section
4
ACMP
AUTO FILL IN
BREAK
INTRO
Main sections can be shifted.
OTS LINK
ENDING/rit.
MAIN
A
B
C
D
STYLE CONTROL
Press this button to add breaks.
64
PF-1000
SYNC.STOP
SYNC.START
START/STOP
You can also use this function to play only rhythms
(page 61).
• If you press the [INTRO]
button, you can play back
an Intro section while an
accompaniment is playing.
• Section button indications
— [BREAK], [INTRO],
[MAIN], [ENDING] buttons
LED is green
— The section is not
selected.
LED is red
— The section is currently selected.
LED is off
— No section data; the
section cannot be
played.
• You can dynamically control the level of the
accompaniment by how
softly or strongly you play
the keys in the Auto
Accompaniment section
of the keyboard
(page 127).
• If you press the [SYNC.
START] button while an
accompaniment is playing, the accompaniment
will stop and the PF-1000
will enter Synchronized
Start standby status.
• You can also change
style sections by using
the pedal (page 128).
• The Break section lets
you add dynamic variations and breaks in the
rhythm of the accompaniment, to make your performance sound even
more professional. If you
press the [BREAK] button while an accompaniment is playing, the fill-in
will play back for one
measure.
• The indicator of the destination section (MAIN A/
B/C/D) will flash while the
Break is playing.
• When the [AUTO FILLIN]
button is set to on and the
MAIN [A][B][C][D] button is pressed after the
final half beat (eighth
note) of the measure, the
fill-in will begin from the
next measure.
Styles
END
ACMP
AUTO FILL IN
BREAK
INTRO
OTS LINK
This switches to the ending section. When the ending is finished,
the Style stops automatically. You can have the ending gradually
slow down (ritardando) by pressing the same [ENDING/rit.]
button again while the ending is playing back.
ENDING/rit.
MAIN
A
B
SYNC.STOP
SYNC.START
START/STOP
D
C
STYLE CONTROL
Fade-in/Fade-out
The accompaniment style also include a convenient Fade-in/Fade-out function that
gradually fades in and fades out the accompaniment. To start the style with a fade-in,
press the [FADE IN/OUT] button, then turn SYNC. START on. To cancel the fade-in
before starting the style, press the button again.
To fade out and stop the Style, press this button while the style is playing. The time of the
fade-in/fade-out can also be set (page 137).
Stopping the Style Playback While Releasing Keys (SYNC. STOP)
When the Synchro Stop function is engaged, accompaniment playback will stop
completely when all keys in the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard are released.
Accompaniment playback will start again as soon as the key in the Auto Accompaniment
section is played.
1
Turn ACMP (Accompaniment) on.
2
Turn SYNC. STOP on. SYNC. START is also automatically set to on when
SYNC. STOP is turned on.
ACMP
AUTO FILL IN
BREAK
INTRO
OTS LINK
ENDING/rit.
MAIN
A
B
C
SYNC.STOP
SYNC.START
START/STOP
D
• Styles can also be started
by pressing the STYLE
CONTROL [START/
STOP] button.
• You can select the Intro
and Ending type by pressing the [E] button in the
MAIN window (page 66).
• If you press the [INTRO]
button while the ending is
playing, the Intro section
will begin playing after the
ending is finished.
• When the [AUTO FILLIN]
button is set to on and you
press a MAIN button while
the ending is playing, fill-in
accompaniment will
immediately start playing,
continuing with the Main
section.
• You can begin the accompaniment by using the
Ending instead of the Intro
section. In this case, the
auto accompaniment
doesn’t stop when the
ending is finished.
• If you select a different
style while the style is not
playing, the “default”
tempo for that style is also
selected. If the accompaniment is playing, the
same tempo is maintained
even if you select a different style.
• When STOP ACMP is set
to on and the accompaniment is not playing, you
can play both chords and
bass in the Auto Accompaniment section in the
keyboard (page 127).
STYLE CONTROL
3
As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the auto accompaniment
starts.
Split point
You can also use the SYNC.
STOP function by pressing
the auto accompaniment
section/left-hand range
briefly (page 127).
Auto Accompaniment section
4
The auto accompaniment stops when you release your left hand from the keys.
5
Playing a chord with your
left hand automatically
restarts the auto
accompaniment.
END
Press the [SYNC. STOP]/
[SYNC. START] button
again to stop the
accompaniment.
Synchro Stop cannot be set
to on when the fingering
mode is set to Full Keyboard/AI Keyboard or the
auto accompaniment on the
panel is set to off.
PF-1000
65
Styles
Selecting Intro and Ending Types (INTRO/ENDING)
1
To call up the [MAIN] display, first press the [DIRECT
ACCESS] button, then press
the [EXIT] button.
A
B
C
D
E
2
3
D
E
Select a Intro
Play the style using
the Intro or Ending
section (page 30, 31).
Select a Ending
Playing Fill-in patterns automatically when
changing accompaniment sections — Auto Fill In
1
ACMP
AUTO FILL IN
BREAK
INTRO
Fill
A short phrase used to add
variation to the style.
OTS LINK
ENDING/rit.
MAIN
A
B
C
SYNC.STOP
SYNC.START
START/STOP
D
STYLE CONTROL
2
Play the style and switch among the accompaniment sections as they play
(page 30, 31).
Fill-in patterns play automatically between each change in the Main
sections.
END
66
PF-1000
To cancel the Auto Fill, press the [AUTO FILLIN] button again.
You can also add a fill-in by
pressing the selected MAIN
button again.
You can temporarily disable
Auto Fill In during a performance by pressing the next
Main section’s button twice
quickly.
Styles
Appropriate Panel Setting for the Selected Style (ONE TOUCH SETTING)
The convenient One Touch Setting function makes it easy for you to select voices and effects that are appropriate to the style
you’re playing. Each preset style has four pre-programmed panel setups that you can select by pressing a single button.
1
2
3
4
LCD
CONTRAST
BACK
MENU
DEMO
HELP
A
F
B
G
C
H
NEXT
ONE TOUCH SETTING
VOICE
PART
ON/OFF
LAYER
LEFT
FUNCTION
I
D
DIGITAL
STUDIO
SOUND
CREATOR
MUSIC
FINDER
J
E
ENTER
DATA ENTRY
FADE IN/OUT
POP & ROCK POP BALLADS DANCE
SWING & JAZZ
R&B
COUNTRY
MARCH &
WORLD
LATIN
WALTZ
BALLROOM
PIANIST
USER
EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2
STYLE
L
DIGITAL
RECORDING
TRACK1
R
AUTO FILL IN
REC
OTS LINK
START/STOP
TOP
REW
NEW SONG
BREAK
INTRO
B
C
2
SYNC.STOP
SYNC.START
REPEAT
E.PIANO
VARIATION
HARMONY/
ECHO
MONO
LEFT HOLD
1
ORGAN &
ACCORDION PERCUSSION
GUITAR
BASS
PIANO
WOODWIND STRINGS CHOIR & PAD
SYNTH.
XG
2
3
4
ONE TOUCH SETTING
EXIT
PART
SYNC.START
CHANNEL
ON/OFF
SONG
START/STOP
D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TAP TEMPO
BRASS
RESET
STYLE CONTROL
METRONOME
1
ENDING/rit.
MAIN
A
START/STOP
MAX
MASTER VOLUME
DSP
PIANO &
HARPSI.
VOICE EFFECT
BALANCE
FF
DIRECT
ACCESS
MIN
REVERB
MIXING
CONSOLE
STYLE
ACMP
RESET
TRANSPOSE
TEMPO
PART
USER
FREEZE
1
VOICE
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
MEMORY
REGISTRATION MEMORY
Select a style (page 59).
3
Press one of the ONE TOUCH SETTING buttons ([1] - [4]).
LED is red — The One Touch Setting is currently selected.
1
2
3
4
As soon as you play a
chord with your left
hand, the auto
accompaniment starts.
ONE TOUCH SETTING
Split point
LED is off — No One Touch
Setting data. The button is not
available.
LED is green — The One Touch
Setting is not selected.
Various settings (such as voices, effects, etc.) that match the selected
style can be instantly recalled. When the style is not playing, Auto
Accompaniment and Sync. Start will automatically be turned on.
For details about the One Touch Setting parameters, refer to the
separate Data List (Parameter Chart).
4
Auto Accompaniment section
Stop the Auto Accompaniment.
ACMP
AUTO FILL IN
BREAK
INTRO
OTS LINK
ENDING/rit.
MAIN
A
B
C
SYNC.STOP
SYNC.START
START/STOP
D
STYLE CONTROL
5
Try out other One Touch Setting setups. You can also create your own One
Touch Setting setups (page 68).
1
2
3
4
ONE TOUCH SETTING
PF-1000
67
Styles
Automatically Changing One Touch Settings with the Sections — OTS Link
The convenient OTS (One Touch Setting) Link function lets you automatically have One Touch Settings change when
you select a different Main section (A - D).
2
1
AUTO FILL IN
END
OTS LINK
When you switch among the Main sections (A
- D), the corresponding One Touch Setting will
be called up automatically.
The Main sections A, B, C, and D correspond
to One Touch Settings 1, 2, 3, and 4,
respectively.
The One Touch Settings
can be set to change with
the sections in one of two
different timings (page 127):
• Immediately when you
press a section button.
• At the next measure (in
an accompaniment style),
after you press a section
button.
To cancel the OTS Link function, press the [OTS LINK] button again.
Registering the Panel Controls in One Touch Setting (ONE TOUCH SETTING)
This section covers how to create your own One Touch Setting setups (four setups per style). For a list of One Touch
Setting setup parameters, refer to the separate Data List (Parameter Chart).
2
1
Select a style.
4
Press one of the ONE TOUCH SETTING buttons:[1] through [4].
1
2
Set up the panel controls
such as selecting a voice
as required.
3
3
Press the [MEMORY]
button.
MEMORY
4
ONE TOUCH SETTING
The items you can register in a One Touch Setting are Voice, Harmony and Pedal settings.
A message prompting you to save the current style will appear. Select “YES”
ND to call up the STYLE display, then save the panel settings (page 38, 44).
E
68
PF-1000
Unless you store the panel
settings here, the registered
settings will be deleted
when you select a different
accompaniment style.
Styles
Calling Up Ideal Setups for Your Music — Music Finder
The Music Finder feature lets you instantly call up the appropriate settings for the
instrument — including voice, style, and One Touch Settings — simply by selecting the
desired song title. If you want to play a certain song but don’t know which style and voice
settings would be appropriate, the convenient Music Finder function will help you out.
The recommended settings, which together make up a “record,” can also be edited and
stored. This lets you create and save your own Music Finder records for future recall.
MUSIC
FINDER
LCD
CONTRAST
BACK
MENU
DEMO
HELP
A
F
B
G
The MUSIC FINDER records
and its contents is just one
example of the recommended panel setups. You
can also create your own
Music Finder settings for
your favorite songs and
genres.
NEXT
VOICE
PART
ON/OFF
LAYER
LEFT
H
C
FUNCTION
I
D
DIGITAL
STUDIO
SOUND
CREATOR
MUSIC
FINDER
J
E
ENTER
DATA ENTRY
FADE IN/OUT
POP & ROCK POP BALLADS DANCE
SWING & JAZZ
R&B
COUNTRY
LATIN
MARCH &
WORLD
WALTZ
BALLROOM
PIANIST
USER
EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2
STYLE
L
DIGITAL
RECORDING
TRACK1
R
REVERB
STYLE
ACMP
AUTO FILL IN
BREAK
INTRO
REC
OTS LINK
START/STOP
TOP
REW
FF
B
C
SYNC.STOP
SYNC.START
2
ORGAN &
ACCORDION PERCUSSION
GUITAR
BASS
WOODWIND STRINGS CHOIR & PAD
SYNTH.
XG
PIANO &
HARPSI.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
E.PIANO
3
4
ONE TOUCH SETTING
PIANO
8
BRASS
RESET
PART
TRANSPOSE
TEMPO
VOICE
MUSIC
FINDER
F
G
H
I
J
Show the
number of
records of
each page.
3
4
5
6
USER
FREEZE
1
2
3
4
5
REGISTRATION MEMORY
6
7
8
MEMORY
Keep in mind that Music
Finder is a performance aid
in that it automatically finds
appropriate accompaniment
styles and voices for your
playing. Even though you
can specify song titles, it
does not actually contain
song data.
All .......................... Show all records.
FAVORITE.............. Show the records that have added to the “Favorite” page.
SEARCH1,2........... Show the results by SEARCH function (page 70).
Select a record. For example, select the
top record by pressing the [1▲▼] button
to call up the recommended setups.
The setting data shown here is referred
to as a “record.”
2
2
EXIT
CHANNEL
ON/OFF
SONG
TAP TEMPO
RESET
1
1
PART
SYNC.START
START/STOP
D
STYLE CONTROL
1
LEFT HOLD
VARIATION
VOICE EFFECT
BALANCE
REPEAT
DIRECT
ACCESS
NEW SONG
ENDING/rit.
MAIN
A
START/STOP
METRONOME
HARMONY/
ECHO
MONO
DSP
MIXING
CONSOLE
7
Sorting the records
MUSIC ...... The record is sorted by song title.
STYLE....... The record is sorted by style name.
BEAT ........ The record is sorted by beat.
TEMPO ..... The record is sorted by tempo.
Change the order of the records
(ascending or descending).
Add the selected record to “Favorite (Bookmark)” page
When you press the [H] button, the “Add selected
data to the favorite list? YES/NO” message will be
displayed. Select [YES] to add the selected page to
“FAVORITE” page.
Search record(s). Enter the condition of the search
in the MUSIC FINDER SEARCH display (page 70).
The results of SEARCH 1 or 2 appear in the
“SEARCH 1” or “SEARCH 2” page respectively.
8
Call up the MUSIC FINDER RECORD EDIT (page 71) display
(for editing the selected record).
Select a record by song title.
When sorting records by song title,
use the [1▲▼] button to skip up or
down through the songs
alphabetically. Simultaneously
press the [▲▼] buttons to move the
cursor to the first record.
3
Play the style (page 60).
Turn TEMPO LOCK on/off. TEMPO LOCK function lets you avoid changing
the Tempo during style playback when selecting another record. The on/off
setting affects all pages (ALL/FAVORITE/SEARCH 1/SEARCH 2).
Select a record by style name. When sorting the records by style name, press these buttons
to move the cursor to the next /previous style. Simultaneously press the [▲▼] buttons to move
the cursor to the first record.
Records can be selected by
using the [DATA ENTRY]
dial and pressing the
[ENTER] button.
PF-1000
69
Styles
Searching the Ideal Setups — Music Finder Search
You can search the record by music title or keywords. The results appears in the display.
1
Press the [I]
(SEARCH 1)
button or [J]
(SEARCH 2)
button in the
MUSIC FINDER
display.
2
Enter the
conditions for
A
the search
(see below), B
then start
C
search by
D
using [START
E
SEARCH]
button.
Start searching the record.
The results that satisfy all
the conditions appear in the
SEARCH page. For details
about the search settings in
this display, see below.
F
G
H
I
J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
■ [A] MUSIC
Searches by music or song title. Press this button to call up the display for
inputting the song title.
When you enter the song title (page 45), the search function calls up all
records that contain the entered word or words.
■ [B] KEYWORD
Searches by keyboard. Press this button to call up the display for inputting the
keyword.
When you enter the keyword (page 45), the search function calls up all
records that contain the entered word or words. You can search several
different keywords simultaneously by inserting a separator (comma) between each. The search function finds and
displays all records that contain at least one match in the keywords.
■ [C] STYLE
Searches by style name. Press this button to call up the STYLE FILE SELECT display. Press
the [A] through [J] button in the display to select the desired accompaniment style. This
convenient function lets you find all songs that use a certain accompaniment style.
■ [D] BEAT
The STYLE FILE SELECT
display can only be used to
select the style name for
searching; it cannot be used
to call up the actual accompaniment style.
Searches by beat or rhythmic feel.
■ [E] SEARCH AREA
Selects a specific location for searching. You can further narrow down your search by using the SEARCH 1 and 2
selections.
■ [F]~[H] CLEAR
Clears the entered item at left.
■ [1▲▼] TEMPO FROM
You can also narrow your search by specifying a tempo range. This lets you set the minimum tempo for the search. Press
the [▲▼] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the tempo value to the minimum.
■ [2▲▼]TEMPO TO
You can also narrow your search by specifying a tempo range. This lets you set the maximum tempo for the search.
Press the [▲▼] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the tempo value to the maximum.
■ [3▲▼]~[5▲▼] GENRE
Selects the specific music genre for searching. The available range includes all genres (ANY), the preset genres, and any
genres you’ve entered yourself (page 69).
■ [8▼] CANCEL
Press this to cancel the operation and return to the previous display.
70
PF-1000
Styles
Editing Records — Music Finder Record Edit
From this display, you can call up existing records and edit them to suit your
preferences. You can even use this to create your own Music Finder records.
1
2
Press the [8 ▲▼] (RECORD EDIT) button in the MUSIC FINDER display.
Change/clear the record data. You can also register new records. For details
about all settings and operations, see below.
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
You can also change/clear a
preset record. To avoid changing/clearing the record, register
the record as a new record
after editing.
All Music Finder records can be
stored together as a single file
(page 140). When calling up a
stored file, a message appears
prompting you to replace or
append the records as desired.
• Replace:
All Music Finder records currently in the instrument are
deleted and replaced with the
records of the selected file.
• Append:
The records called up are
added to the vacant record
numbers.
8
■ [A] MUSIC
Selects the music or song title for editing. Press the button to call up the
display for inputting the music or song title, then edit the name as desired.
■ [B] KEYWORD
Selects the keyword for editing. Press the button to call up the display for
inputting the keyword, then edit it as desired.
You can enter several different keywords by inserting a separator (comma)
between each.
■ [C] STYLE
Selects the style name for editing. Always enter the name when a new record is registered.
Press the button to call up the STYLE FILE SELECT display. Press the [A] through [J] button
in the display to select the desired style you want to change/clear/register.
■ [D] BEAT
Selects the beat (time signature) for editing. When another file is selected by pressing the
[C] button, the current beat setting is replaced with the beat setting of the selected file.
■ [E] FAVORITE
Adds the selected record to the FAVORITE page (page 69).
■ [F]~[H] CLEAR
The STYLE FILE SELECT
display can only be used to
select the style name for
record editing; it cannot be
used to call up the actual
accompaniment style.
Keep in mind that the Beat
setting made here is only for
the Music Finder search
function; this does not affect
the actual Beat setting of the
accompaniment style itself.
Clears the entered item at left.
■ [I] DELETE RECORD
Clears the selected record. The deleted record number becomes empty. When you press this button, a message appears
prompting you to execute, abort or cancel the operation.
YES .................. Press this to clear the record and close the display.
NO .................. Press this to close the display without clearing the record.
CANCEL........... Press this to close the message box and return to the previous display.
PF-1000
71
Styles
■ [J] NEW RECORD
Registers a new record. The smallest available empty record number is used for registering.
When you press this button, a message appears prompting you to execute, abort or cancel
the operation.
YES .................. Press this to register the record and close the display.
NO .................. Press this to close the display without registering the record.
CANCEL........... Press this to close the message box and return to the previous display.
The maximum number of
records is 2500, including
internal records.
■ [1▼▲] TEMPO
Determines the tempo for the selected style. When changing the style with the [C] button, the tempo is automatically
changed to that of the changed style.
■ [3▼▲]~[5▼▲] GENRE
Indicates and changes the genre to which the selected record is assigned. The available range includes all preset genres
as well as any you’ve entered yourself.
■ [6▼▲] GENRE NAME
For entering a genre name. Press the button to call up the display for inputting
the genre name, then edit the name as desired. A maximum of 200 genre
names can be stored.
The genre name you input becomes effective when the current record is edited (overwritten) by pressing the [8▲] (OK)
button, or when a new record is registered by pressing the [J] (NEW RECORD) button.
If you exit from the MUSIC FINDER EDIT display without actually editing or registering a record, the input genre name
is deleted.
■ [8▲] OK
Executes all editing and changes to the record. When you press this button, a message appears prompting you to
execute, abort or cancel the operation.
YES .................. Press this to replace the record and close the display.
NO .................. Press this to close the display without replacing the record.
CANCEL........... Press this to close the message box and return to the previous display.
■ [8▼] CANCEL
Press this to cancel the operation and return to the MUSIC FINDER display.
To maintain the edited and registered data, make sure to save all Music Finder records as a file (page 140). If no saved, the data will
be lost when another Music Finder file is called up or the factory-programmed settings are restored (page 140).
72
PF-1000
Song Playback
Here you’ll learn how to play back songs. Songs include the internal songs of the instrument, performances you’ve
recorded yourself using the recording functions (page 90), and commercially available song data. You can use this
highly versatile feature in a variety of ways — playing along on the keyboard with the recorded song, as well as
practicing and learning new music with the Repeat (page 77) function. You can also display the music notation and
lyrics in the LCD.
EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2
STYLE
L
REC
TRACK1
R
START/STOP
TOP
REW
FF
REPEAT
LCD
CONTRAST
BACK
NEW SONG
MENU
DEMO
SYNC.START
SONG
HELP
A
F
B
G
C
H
NEXT
VOICE
PART
ON/OFF
LAYER
LEFT
FUNCTION
DIGITAL
STUDIO
SOUND
CREATOR
D
I
E
J
MUSIC
FINDER
ENTER
DATA ENTRY
FADE IN/OUT
POP & ROCK POP BALLADS DANCE
SWING & JAZZ
R&B
COUNTRY
LATIN
MARCH &
WORLD
WALTZ
BALLROOM
PIANIST
USER
EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2
STYLE
L
DIGITAL
RECORDING
TRACK1
R
AUTO FILL IN
REC
OTS LINK
START/STOP
TOP
REW
FF
BREAK
MAX
MASTER VOLUME
START/STOP
METRONOME
INTRO
ENDING/rit.
MAIN
A
B
C
DSP
PIANO &
HARPSI.
E.PIANO
SYNC.STOP
SYNC.START
CHANNEL
ON/OFF
SONG
START/STOP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
MONO
LEFT HOLD
1
GUITAR
BASS
PIANO
BRASS
RESET
TEMPO
WOODWIND STRINGS CHOIR & PAD
SYNTH.
XG
2
3
4
ONE TOUCH SETTING
8
TAP TEMPO
RESET
HARMONY/
ECHO
ORGAN &
ACCORDION PERCUSSION
EXIT
PART
SYNC.START
D
STYLE CONTROL
VARIATION
VOICE EFFECT
BALANCE
REPEAT
DIRECT
ACCESS
NEW SONG
MIN
REVERB
MIXING
CONSOLE
STYLE
ACMP
TRANSPOSE
PART
VOICE
USER
FREEZE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
MEMORY
REGISTRATION MEMORY
Compatible Song Types
• Internal songs (Song Book)
• Song data on included disk (50 greats for the piano)
• Commercially available song data
Disks having this logo mark feature song data compatible with GM (General
MIDI).
Disks having this logo mark feature song data compatible with Yamaha’s XG
format. XG is a significant enhancement of the “GM system level 1” standard,
providing more voices, greater editing control, and support for multiple effect
sections and effect types.
Commercially available
music data is subject to
copyright restrictions, and is
intended only for your own
personal use.
For more information on the
song file types compatible
with the PF-1000, see
page 148.
Disks having this logo mark feature song data compatible with Yamaha’s DOC (Disk Orchestra Collection)
format.
Disks having this logo mark feature song data compatible with Yamaha’s original MIDI file format.
• Songs you recorded (page 90) and stored to the PF-1000 or disk.
PF-1000
73
Song Playback
Song Playback
Playing the Internal Songs
1
BACK
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
2-1
2
If the MAIN screen (at left) is
not displayed, press the
[DIRECT ACCESS] button
followed by the [EXIT] button.
n
You can also make a variety
of other settings (such as
tempo, voice selection, etc.)
and have them automatically called up when you
play back the song
(page 102).
Select the PRESET tab with the [BACK]
button.
BACK
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
2-2
Open a folder and
select a song to be
played back.
3
The song starts.
REC
TOP
You can enable the Synchro
Start for the song by simultaneously pressing the
[TOP] button and the
SONG [START/STOP] button. The song starts as
soon as you play the keyboard. You can also use this
function along with the
Style’s Synchro Start function (page 60).
n
You can have the volume
automatically fade in and
fade out at the beginning
and end of the song. Simply
press the [FADEIN/OUT]
button at the start of song
playback to fade in the song,
and press it again at the end
of the song to fade out.
END
START/STOP
REW
FF
REPEAT
START/STOP
NEW SONG
SYNC.START
SONG
To stop the song immediately, press the
button again.
EXIT
Adjust the tempo by using the TEMPO [–][+] buttons
(page 50) or the [TAP TEMPO] button.
You can even change the playback speed by tapping out
the tempo — simply tap the [TAP TEMPO] button twice.
Songs can also be played
back continuously. Set
SONG CHAIN PLAY to ON
from the SONG SETTING
display (page 126).
74
PF-1000
Press the
button in order to go back to the
previous screen.
Make sure that the Language
setting for the instrument
(page 140) is the same as that
of the file name of the song that
you are playing back.
Song Playback
Simultaneously Playing a Song and an Accompaniment Style
When playing back a song and an accompaniment style at the same time, channels 9 16 of the song data are replaced with accompaniment style channels — allowing you
to use the auto accompaniment styles and features in place of the accompaniment parts
of the song. Make the settings below and play your own chord substitutions in place of
the song’s chord data.
• [ACMP] button .................. ...ON
• [AUTO FILL IN] button ..... ...ON
1
2
3
4
The accompaniment stops
when you stop the song. If
the accompaniment style is
playing and you start the
song, the accompaniment
automatically stops. However, for internal songs that
use accompaniment styles,
the accompaniment style is
not stopped.
Select the song and start playback by pressing the SONG [START/STOP] button.
Select the desired accompaniment style.
Start the style by pressing the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button.
While the song is playing, insert a break or change sections (with the STYLE
section buttons.)
Fill-in patterns play when you switch sections.
END
The style automatically stops when the song finishes or is stopped.
Some of the internal songs have been created using the accompaniment styles. For these songs, the
accompaniment styles are automatically started when starting song playback.
PF-1000
75
Song Playback
Playing Back Songs on Disk
Before proceeding, make
sure to read the section
“Handling the Floppy Disk
Drive (FDD) and Floppy
Disk” (page 6).
Insert the disk into the drive.
n
Insert the disk shutter side
first and label face up.
You can set whether or not
the PF-1000 automatically
calls up the first disk song
when a disk is inserted
(page 139).
The method for playing back is the same as in the “Playing the Internal Songs” instructions
(page 74), except that you should select FLOPPY DISK page in the SONG display.
Other Playback-related Operations
■ Repeat / Rewind / Fast forward
During playback, you can have the song return to the top and play back again
from the beginning by pressing this button. When playback is stopped,
pressing this button returns the song to the beginning.
REC
START/STOP
TOP
NEW SONG
REW
FF
REPEAT
SYNC.START
SONG
Press this button to call up the SONG POSITION
display (see below). To return to the SONG display,
press the [EXIT] button.
SONG POSITION display
n
Some song data for the PF1000 has been recorded
with special “free tempo” settings. During playback of
such song data, the measure numbers shown in the
display will not correspond to
the actual measure; this only
serves as a reference as to
how much of the song has
been played back.
n
Songs containing a large
amount of data may not be
able to be read properly by
the instrument, and as such
you may not be able to
select them. The maximum
capacity is about 200–
300KB, however this may
differ depending on the data
contents of each song.
When “BAR” is selected, you can specify a measure number (counted from the
beginning of the song) by using the [REW] and [FF] buttons.
When “PHRASE MARK” is selected, specify the phrase mark number by using the
[REW] and [FF] buttons.
Phrase Mark
This data specifies a certain
location in the song data.
“PHRASE MARK” is shown only when the song contains phrase marks. Press the
[J] button to toggle between “BAR” and “PHRASE MARK,” then use the [REW]
and [FF] buttons to select the desired measure or phrase mark.
■ Adjusting the Volume Balance / Muting Specific Channels
BALANCE
CHANNEL
ON/OFF
Press this button to call up the BALANCE display (page 61).
Press this button to call up the CHANNEL ON/OFF display (see below).
PART
CHANNEL ON/OFF display
Select the [SONG] tab with the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button, and mute the desired channel
by setting it to [OFF]. To solo a channel (only that channel will sound), hold down the
appropriate button corresponding to the channel. To release the solo for the channel, press
that channel’s button again.
76
PF-1000
Channel
Refers to the MIDI channel
in the song data. The channels are assigned as shown
below for the PF-1000.
Song
1 - 16
Accompaniment Style
9 - 16
Song Playback
Muting Specific Parts — Track1/Track2/Extra Tracks
This feature lets you mute certain parts of the song (Track1, Track2, Extra Tracks), and play back only those parts you
want to hear. For example, if you want to practice the melody of a song, you can mute just the right-hand part and play
that part yourself.
1
2
Select the song to be played back (page 73).
You can change the channel
assignments for Track 1 and
Track 2 (page 126), letting
you specify which parts are
muted when pressing the
[TRACK 1]/[TRACK 2]/
[EXTRA TRACKS] buttons.
Use this button to turn on/off the additional performance parts
(all but the right hand/left hand).
EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2
STYLE
L
TRACK1
R
Use this button to turn on/off the right-hand part.
All tracks are automatically
set to on when selecting a
different song.
Use this button to turn on/off the left-hand part.
3
Start the song.
Adjust the tempo by using the TEMPO [–][+] buttons (page 50).
REC
START/STOP
TOP
NEW SONG
REW
FF
END
START/STOP
To stop the song, press the
button again.
REPEAT
SYNC.START
SONG
Repeat Playback of a Specific Range
This feature allows you to specify a certain range of the song (between Point A and Point B), and play it back repeatedly.
1
2
Play back the song (page 74, 76).
REC
TOP
NEW SONG
START/STOP
REW
FF
REPEAT
SYNC.START
SONG
3
Press this button at the point you want the
repeating phrase to start (Point A).
Press this button at the point you want the
repeating phrase to end (Point B).
After an automatic lead-in (to help guide you into the phrase), the range from
point A to point B is played back repeatedly.
Regardless of whether the song is playing back or is stopped, pressing the [TOP]
button returns to point A.
You can also specify Points
A and B when the song is
stopped. Set Point A by
pressing the [REPEAT] button, then use the [FF] button to move to the desired
end location, then set Point
B by pressing the
[REPEAT] button again.
Point B cannot be selected
unless Point A has been
selected first.
n
Specifying only Point A
results in repeat playback
between Point A and the
end of the song.
n
4
Stop the song.
START/STOP
END
REPEAT
To cancel the Repeat function, press the
button again.
The specified A and B
points will be erased when
selecting a different song
number, cancelling the
Repeat function, or selecting a different repeat mode
— such as Phrase Repeat
or repeat in Song Chain
Play (page 126).
PF-1000
77
Song Playback
Displaying Music Notation — Score
With this feature, you can have the notation automatically shown on the display as the song plays. This can be used
with your own recordings as well as the internal Demo songs.
1
Select the
desired song
(page 74, 76).
2
If the MAIN screen (at left)
is not displayed, press the
[DIRECT ACCESS] button
followed by the [EXIT] button.
A
B
C
D
E
The displayed notation is
generated by the PF-1000
based on the song data. As
a result, it may not be
exactly the same as commercially available sheet
music of the same song —
especially when displaying
notation of complicated passages or many short notes.
3
n
Some song data for the PF1000 has been recorded
with special “free tempo”
settings. For such song
data, the tempo, beat, measure and music notation will
not be displayed correctly.
Enables/disables display of the left-hand key range.
Depending on other settings, this parameter may be
unavailable and may appear grayed out. If this is the
case, go to the detailed setting display (shown
below; use the [8▲▼] buttons) and set the LEFT
CH. parameter to any channel except “AUTO.” Or,
go to the SONG SETTING display in the Function
menu (page 126) and set the TRACK 2 parameter
to any channel except “OFF.”
n
[RIGHT] and [LEFT] cannot
be turned off at the same
time.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Enables/disables display of the right-hand key range.
Channel 1 is automatically selected when [TRACK1]
is set to [OFF] from the SONG SETTING display
(page 126).
Enables/disables display of the lyrics.
If the selected song does not contain lyric data, lyrics are
not displayed.
Enables/disables display of the chords.
If the selected song does not contain chord data, chords
are not displayed.
Enables/disables display of the note name (pitch).
Determines the display resolution (or zoom level) of the notation.
SMALL ..... Notation is shown in small size.
LARGE ..... Notation is shown in large size.
This calls up the detailed setting display for notation.
For details, see the next page.
8
n
The note name is indicated
at the left of the note. When
the space between the
notes is too small, the indication may be moved to the
top left of the note.
n
You can increase the number of measures that will be
displayed by decreasing the
other items to be displayed
(parts, lyrics, chords, etc.).
n
When accidentals (sharp
and flats) and notes cannot
be displayed on one line,
they are displayed in the
next line from the middle of
the measure.
n
The notation functions cannot be used to create song
data by inputting notes. For
information on creating
song data, see page 94.
78
PF-1000
Song Playback
Detailed Settings for Notation
When “LEFT” and “RIGHT”
are set to the same channel,
the notation of the right-hand
notes and left-hand notes
are displayed in piano format
(two connected staves).
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
■ [1▲▼] LEFT CH/[2▲▼] RIGHT CH
This determines the Left channel (channel for the left-hand part) and Right channel (channel for the right-hand part).
This setting returns to AUTO when a different song is selected.
AUTO .........................The channels for the right- and left-hand parts are assigned automatically — setting the parts
to the same channel as the channel which is specified in the SONG SETTING display of the
Function menu (page 122).
1-16 ............................Assigns the part to the specified channel, 1- 16.
OFF (LEFT CH only)....No channel assignment.
■ [3▲▼], [4▲▼] KEY SIGNATURE
This lets you enter key signature changes in the middle of a song, at the stopped position, allowing you to transpose
key at any point within a song. For a list of the key signatures, with their relative minor keys and accidentals, see the
chart below.
Key Signatures and Accidentals
C Maj (A min)
G Maj (E min)
D Maj (B min)
A Maj (F min)
E Maj (C min)
B Maj (G min)
F Maj (D min)
C Maj (A min)
G Maj (E min)
D Maj (B min)
A Maj (F min)
E Maj (C min)
B Maj (G min)
F Maj (D min)
The
note indicates the root note of the major key, and the
C Maj (A min)
note indicates the root of the relative minor.
■ [5▲▼] QUANTIZE
This gives you control over the note resolution in the notation, letting you shift or correct
the timing of all displayed notes so that they line up to a particular note value. Make sure
to select the smallest note value which is used in the song.
Note resolution:
Short notes and ornamented
notes (such as trills and
grace notes) which are
shorter than the Note resolution will not be displayed in
the notation.
1/4 note, 1/8 note, 1/16 note, 1/32 note, 1/4 note triplet, 1/8 note triplet, 1/16 note
triplet, 1/32 note triplet
PF-1000
79
Song Playback
■ [6▲▼] NOTE NAME
Select the Note Name type when “NOTE” (page 78) is set to ON.
ABC ................. Note names are indicated as letters (C, D, E, F, G, A, B).
Fixed Do .......... Note names are indicated in solfeggio and differ depending on the selected language (page 49).
English.............. Do Re Mi Fa Sol La Ti
French .............. Ut Re Mi Fa Sol La Si
Italian............... Do Re Mi Fa Sol La Si
German............ Do Re Mi Fa Sol La Si
Spanish............. Do re Mi Fa Sol La Si
Japanese...........
Movable Do..... Note names are indicated in solfeggio according to the scale intervals, and as such are relative to
the key. The root note is indicated as Do. For example, in the key of G major the root note of Sol
would be indicated as Do.
As with “Fixed Do,” the indication differs depending on the selected language.
■ [8▲] OK
This closes the detailed setting display and starts generating the notation. You can also
execute this by pressing the [ENTER] button on the panel.
■ [8▼] CANCEL
This closes the detailed setting display without changing the settings. You can also
execute this by pressing the [EXIT] button or [RECORD] button on the panel.
80
PF-1000
You can select the display
pages (one before and after)
by the using the [BACK]/
[NEXT] buttons or the pedal
(page 128).
Song Playback
Displaying the Lyrics
This function lets you display the lyrics while the song is playing back — making it easy to sing along with your
performance or song playback.
1
2
Select the
desired song
(page 74, 76).
The language used for lyrics display depends on the
particular lyric data. If the
lyrics are garbled or unreadable, you can remedy this
by changing the “LYRICS
LANGUAGE” setting from
the SONG SETTING display (page 122).
A
B
C
D
E
3
If the selected song does
not contain lyric data, lyrics
are not displayed.
If the selected song contains chord data, chord
names are displayed with
the lyrics.
4
REC
TOP
NEW SONG
START/STOP
REW
FF
REPEAT
The contents of the display
can also be shown on a
connected TV (page 133,
142).
SYNC.START
SONG
Start the song.
5
The lyrics are
in reverse
display along
with song
playback.
END
REC
NEW SONG
TOP
START/STOP
REW
FF
REPEAT
SYNC.START
The lyrics can be changed
(page 105).
SONG
Stop the song.
To return to the previous page, press the
button.
EXIT
PF-1000
81
Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups — Registration Memory
Registration Memory is a powerful feature that lets you set up the PF-1000 just as you want — selecting specific voices,
styles, effect settings etc. — and save your custom panel setup for future recall. Then, when you need those settings,
simply press the appropriate REGISTRATION MEMORY button.
LCD
CONTRAST
BACK
MENU
DEMO
HELP
A
F
B
G
C
H
NEXT
FREEZE
VOICE
PART
ON/OFF
LAYER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
MEMORY
LEFT
FUNCTION
D
DIGITAL
STUDIO
SOUND
CREATOR
I
E
REGISTRATION MEMORY
MUSIC
FINDER
J
ENTER
DATA ENTRY
FADE IN/OUT
POP & ROCK POP BALLADS DANCE
SWING & JAZZ
R&B
COUNTRY
LATIN
MARCH &
WORLD
WALTZ
BALLROOM
PIANIST
USER
EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2
STYLE
L
DIGITAL
RECORDING
TRACK1
R
ACMP
AUTO FILL IN
BREAK
INTRO
REC
OTS LINK
START/STOP
TOP
REW
FF
MASTER VOLUME
ENDING/rit.
MAIN
A
START/STOP
B
C
SYNC.STOP
SYNC.START
GUITAR
BASS
SYNTH.
XG
1
PIANO &
HARPSI.
E.PIANO
2
3
4
ONE TOUCH SETTING
PIANO
EXIT
PART
SYNC.START
CHANNEL
ON/OFF
SONG
START/STOP
D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TAP TEMPO
BRASS
RESET
STYLE CONTROL
METRONOME
ORGAN &
ACCORDION PERCUSSION
WOODWIND STRINGS CHOIR & PAD
VARIATION
VOICE EFFECT
BALANCE
REPEAT
DIRECT
ACCESS
NEW SONG
MAX
LEFT HOLD
DSP
MIXING
CONSOLE
STYLE
MIN
HARMONY/
ECHO
MONO
REVERB
RESET
PART
TRANSPOSE
TEMPO
USER
FREEZE
1
2
3
VOICE
4
5
6
7
8
MEMORY
REGISTRATION MEMORY
Registering Panel Setups — Registration Memory
This shows you how to register your custom panel settings to the REGISTRATION
MEMORY buttons. Make all the settings you want with the panel controls, and Registration
Memory will “remember” them for you.
1
Set up the panel controls as desired.
For a list of the settings that can be registered, refer to the separate Data List
(Parameter Chart).
2
FREEZE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Keep in mind that songs or
styles on disk cannot
registered to Registration
Memory. If you want to
register a disk-based song
or style, copy the relevant
data to “USER” in the
SONG/STYLE display
(page 38) and register the
data separately.
MEMORY
REGISTRATION MEMORY
3
F
Select the desired parameter groups
for the settings you want to register.
You can also use the [DATA ENTRY]
dial to navigate in this display. To
register a parameter group, checkmark
the corresponding box. Groups left
without checkmarks will not be included
in the Registration Memory setting.
This allows you to maintain certain
settings, even when switching among
Registration Memory presets. You can
also use the Freeze function (page 84)
to override the Registration Memory
changes — letting you prevent certain
panel settings from being changed.
END
G
H
I
J
Enters a checkmark to the
selected box. You can also
use the [ENTER] button.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Press the desired number button for registering the settings.
FREEZE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
MEMORY
REGISTRATION MEMORY
Indicator is green......The panel setting is registered, but not selected.
Indicator is red .........The panel setting is registered and is currently selected.
Indicator is off ..........The panel setting is not registered.
The registrations registered here will be lost when the power is turned off, unless you perform
the Save operation explained on the next page.
82
PF-1000
Cancels the registration
and returns to the MAIN
display. You can also use
the [EXIT] button.
Removes the checkmark from
the selected box. You can also
use the [ENTER] button.
Any data that was previously registered to the
selected REGISTRATION
MEMORY button (indicator
is green or red) will be
erased and replaced by the
new settings.
Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups — Registration Memory
Saving Your Registration Memory Setups
The settings registered to the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1]-[8] buttons are saved as a single file.
All settings registered to buttons [1][8] are referred to as a “bank.” The
banks can be saved to “USER” or
“FLOPPY DISK” as Registration
bank files.
BANK 01
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
F
G
Keep in mind that the size of
the Registration bank files
and the memory space they
occupy depends on the
amount of functions set in
each.
Press the [DIRECT
ACCESS] button and [EXIT]
button to call up the MAIN
display.
H
I
J
2
Save the settings you’ve made to the Registration Memory buttons as a single Registration bank file (page 44).
The REGISTRATION EDIT display
appears. For details on this display,
see below.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
REGISTRATION EDIT display
The contents of the current Registration Memory bank (REGIST.) are listed in the REGISTRATION EDIT screen. The
names of the stored Registration Memory presets are shown in the display and the indicators of the relevant
REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons are lit in green.
From this screen, you can select, name, or delete the Registration Memory presets.
Select ...............Press the [A] - [J] buttons. The REGIST. display is linked to the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1] - [8]
buttons. When you select the Registration Memory preset in the display, the related button turns
on (indicator is red).
Name ...............This operation is the same as that in “Naming Files and Folders” (page 41) in “Basic Operations
— Organizing Your Data.”
Delete ..............This operation is the same as that in “Deleting Files/Folders” (page 43) in “Basic Operations —
Organizing Your Data.”
The result of the Name/Delete operation will be lost when the power is turned off unless you return to the REGISTRATION
BANK display by pressing the [8▼] (UP) button and save the data (page 44).
PF-1000
83
Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups — Registration Memory
Recalling a Registration Memory Setup
You can recall all of the panel settings you’ve made — or only those you specifically want or need. For example, if you
de-select “STYLE” in the REGISTRATION MEMORY display, you can keep the currently selected style even when you
change the Registration Memory preset.
Recalling the Registered Settings
Select the desired bank in the REGISTRATION BANK display (page 83).
Press the appropriate REGISTRATION MEMORY button (any whose indicators are
green) to recall the desired settings.
FREEZE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
You can program your
Registration Memory presets
to be called up in sequence,
in any order you desire.
Once programmed, the
presets 1 - 8 can be selected
in sequence with the
[BACK][NEXT] buttons or
the pedal (page 131).
MEMORY
REGISTRATION MEMORY
Selecting the Freeze Settings
1
2
MENU
DEMO
HELP
FUNCTION
Call up the “FREEZE”
page from the
REGIST.SEQUENCE/
FREEZE/VOICE SET
screen (page 131).
Enters a checkmark
to the selected box.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Select the Freeze settings.
3
8
Removes the
checkmark from the
selected box.
Press the [FREEZE] button. When Freeze is active (lamp is lit), the settings you specified in the Freeze
page will be maintained or left unchanged, even when changing Registration Memory presets.
FREEZE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
MEMORY
REGISTRATION MEMORY
4
Press the appropriate REGISTRATION MEMORY button (any whose indicators are green) to recall the
desired settings.
FREEZE
1
2
3
4
5
REGISTRATION MEMORY
84
PF-1000
6
7
8
MEMORY
Editing Voices — Sound Creator
The PF-1000 has a Sound Creator feature that allows you to create your own voices by
editing some parameters of the existing voices. Once you’ve created a voice, you can
save it as a USER voice for future recall.
SOUND
CREATOR
LCD
CONTRAST
BACK
MENU
DEMO
HELP
A
F
B
G
C
H
NEXT
VOICE
PART
ON/OFF
LAYER
LEFT
FUNCTION
D
DIGITAL
STUDIO
SOUND
CREATOR
I
E
MUSIC
FINDER
J
ENTER
DATA ENTRY
FADE IN/OUT
POP & ROCK POP BALLADS DANCE
SWING & JAZZ
R&B
COUNTRY
LATIN
MARCH &
WORLD
WALTZ
BALLROOM
PIANIST
USER
EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2
STYLE
L
DIGITAL
RECORDING
TRACK1
R
REVERB
AUTO FILL IN
BREAK
INTRO
REC
OTS LINK
START/STOP
TOP
REW
FF
MAX
MASTER VOLUME
START/STOP
METRONOME
ENDING/rit.
MAIN
A
B
C
DSP
SYNC.STOP
SYNC.START
PIANO &
HARPSI.
STYLE CONTROL
CHANNEL
ON/OFF
SONG
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
MONO
LEFT HOLD
GUITAR
BASS
SYNTH.
XG
BRASS
RESET
TEMPO
1
2
3
4
ONE TOUCH SETTING
PIANO
8
TAP TEMPO
RESET
HARMONY/
ECHO
ORGAN &
ACCORDION PERCUSSION
E.PIANO
EXIT
PART
SYNC.START
START/STOP
D
VARIATION
VOICE EFFECT
BALANCE
REPEAT
DIRECT
ACCESS
NEW SONG
MIN
WOODWIND STRINGS CHOIR & PAD
MIXING
CONSOLE
STYLE
ACMP
• The Voice can be edited in
realtime while playing
back a song/style.
• Keep in mind that adjustments made to the parameters may not make much
change in the actual sound
depending on the original
settings of the voice.
TRANSPOSE
PART
USER
FREEZE
1
VOICE
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
MEMORY
REGISTRATION MEMORY
Operation
1
Press the [F], [G] or [H] button to select the
Part (MAIN, LAYER or LEFT) containing the
voice you wish to edit.
2
Press the
[SOUND
CREATOR]
button.
DIGITAL
STUDIO
SOUND
CREATOR
F
G
H
DIGITAL
RECORDING
I
J
MIXING
CONSOLE
The voice can also be
selected in the SOUND
CREATOR display.
CAUTION
The settings are lost if the
edited part’s voice is
switched to another voice.
Important data should be
saved to User Drive or floppy
disk.
PART
3
Edit the voice parameters.
The operations for each function selected in this step are covered in detail, starting on page 87.
NATURAL VOICE
Select the desired menu by
pressing the [NEXT]/
[BACK] button.
REGULAR VOICE
Select the desired menu.
The selected menu is highlighted.
Can be used during editing to
compare the sound of the original
voice with the edited voice.
Indicates the parameters available for editing in
this display. These correspond to the parameters/
values shown at the bottom of the display.
4
Save the edited voice to the USER drive
(Flash ROM) as a USER voice (page 44).
Opens the Save (Voice) display
for saving the edited voice as a
User voice (page 44).
5
Press the [USER] button to select the
edited voice, and play the keyboard.
PF-1000
85
Editing the voice — Sound Creator
SOUND CREATOR Parameters
PIANO
Determines the parameters unique to piano sounds, such as tuning curve or sustain
sampling. This page is available only when the Natural piano voice is selected.
COMMON
Determines the common settings such as voice volume or octave.
SOUND
Determines the timbre/EG (Envelope Generator)/vibrato of the voice (Regular voice only).
EFFECT
Determines the effect depth or type.
HARMONY
Determines the Harmony/Echo settings.
The available parameters
differ depending on the
selected voice type, Regular
or Natural (see below).
Keep in mind that there are
certain parameters whose
Sound Creator settings
affect only the Main part’s
voice.
The following parameters are linked to the ones in each display.
Common parameter
Other location
MONO
VOICE EFFECT (TOP PANEL)
page 58
PORTAMENTO TIME
MIXING CONSOLE
page 118
LEFT PEDAL TYPE
CONTROLLER (FUNCTION)
page 128
LEFT PEDAL SETTING
CONTROLLER (FUNCTION)
page 128
FILTER BRIGHTNESS
MIXING CONSOLE
page 118
FILTER HARMONIC CONTENT
MIXING CONSOLE
page 118
REVERB DEPTH
MIXING CONSOLE
page 119
CHORUS DEPTH
MIXING CONSOLE
page 119
DSP ON/OFF
VOICE EFFECT (TOP PANEL)
page 57
DSP DEPTH
MIXING CONSOLE
page 119
DSP TYPE/VARIATION
MIXING CONSOLE/VOICE EFFECT (TOP PANEL)
page 57,119
HARMONY/ECHO TYPE
HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION)
page 132
HARMONY/ECHO VOLUME
HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION)
page 132
HARMONY/ECHO SPEED
HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION)
page 132
HARMONY/ECHO ASSIGN
HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION)
page 132
HARMONY/ECHO CHORD NOTE ONLY
HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION)
page 132
HARMONY/ECHO TOUCH LIMIT
HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION)
page 132
Natural Voices and Regular Voices
Built into the PF-1000 are two different tone generation sources, Natural and XG. The
Natural tone generation source and its voices feature a huge amount of wave
memory, giving you enormous and finely detailed expressive power over the sound.
The XG source (which powers the Regular voices) provide maximum compatibility
with a wide variety of devices and song data.
Voices sounded with the XG
source are divided into two
groups. One is the original
set of PF-1000 voices
(Cool!, Sweet!, Live!), and
the other is the conventional
XG set.
The maximum amount of polyphony for each tone generation source is set up to best
enhance your performance. In general, the songs and styles are played back using the
XG source, while the Natural voices are played from the keyboard — allowing you to
play the Natural voices with full polyphony, even if the song and style data exceeds the polyphonic limit.
Natural!
Cool!
Sweet!
PF-1000-exclusive voices
Live!
XG
GM/XG-compatible voices
Natural voices (sounded by Natural tone
generation source)
Regular voices (sounded by XG tone generation source)
Used mainly for keyboard-played voices
For keyboard-played voices, song/style playback*
* Depending on the particular style selected, a Natural voice may be used for the accompaniment. Usually, songs are played back using the
XG voices (page 149); however, you can have them automatically “re-voiced” — using the exceptionally rich and realistic sounds exclusive
to the PF-1000 (page 117).
86
PF-1000
Editing the voice — Sound Creator
PIANO (Piano Voice has been selected)
The explanations here apply to step #3 on page 85.
The available parameters
differ depending on the
selected voice.
Determines the tuning curve, especially
for piano voices. Select “FLAT” if you
feel the tuning curve of the piano voice
does not quite match that of other
instruments voices.
These controls are used to adjust the
brilliance of the tone. This setting
affects all Natural voices globally. When
other than piano voice (Natural) is
selected, set this on EFFECT page. For
details, see the EFFECT page
(page 89).
STRETCH .. Tuning curve particularly
for pianos
FLAT .......... Tuning curve in which the
frequency is octave
doubled over the entire
keyboard range
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Determines the depth of
sustain sampling for the
damper pedal.
COMMON
The explanations here apply to step #3 on page 85.
The parameters are the same
as for CONTROLLER display.
For details, see page 128.
Set the portamento time of each
part (MAIN/LAYER/VOICE)
(Regular Voice only) (page 118).
Set the volume of the current edited
voice.
Determines the touch sensitivity, or
how greatly the volume responds to
your playing strength.
0 —–– Produces more dramatic
level drops, the more softly
you play.
64 —– Normal response.
127 — Produces high volume for
any playing strength (fixed)
This determines whether the voice
is played monophonically (Regular
Voice only) (page 58).
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3
4
5
6
7
8
Shift the octave range of the
selected voice up or down in
octaves. When the Main or Layer
part’s voice is used, the M/LYR
parameter is available; when the
Left part’s voice is used, the LEFT
parameter is available.
SOUND (Regular Voice only)
The explanations here apply to step #3 on page 85.
1
2
Determines the filter, EG, and
vibrato settings (see below).
PF-1000
87
Editing the voice — Sound Creator
■ FILTER
FILTER settings determine the overall timbre of the sound by boosting or cutting a
certain frequency range.
• BRIGHTNESS
Determines the cutoff frequency or
effective frequency range of the filter (see
diagram). Higher values result in a
brighter sound.
Volume
Cutoff frequency
These frequencies are
“passed” by the filter.
• Harmonic Content
Determines the emphasis given to the
cutoff frequency (resonance), set in
BRIGHTNESS above (see diagram).
Higher values result in a more
pronounced effect.
In addition to making the
sound either brighter or
more mellow, Filter can be
used to produce electronic,
synthesizer-like effects.
Frequency
(pitch)
Cutoff range
Volume
Resonance
Resonance
Frequency
(pitch)
■ EG
The EG (Envelope Generator) settings determine how the level of the sound changes in time. This lets you reproduce
many sound characteristics of natural acoustic instruments — such as the quick attack and decay of percussion
sounds, or the long release of a sustained piano tone.
• ATTACK ...... Determines how quickly the sound reaches its maximum
level after the key is played. The higher the value, the
slower the attack.
Level
• DECAY........ Determines how quickly the sound reaches its sustain
level (a slightly lower level than maximum). The higher
the value, the slower the decay.
ATTACK
DECAY
Key on
• RELEASE ..... Determines how quickly the sound decays to silence after
the key is released. The higher the value, the slower the release.
Time
Key off
If RELEASE is set to a large
value, the sustain becomes
long.
■ VIBRATO
• DEPTH........ Determines the intensity of the Vibrato effect (see diagram). Higher
settings result in a more pronounced Vibrato.
VIBRATO
Creates a wavering in the
sound by periodically changing the pitch.
• SPEED......... Determines the speed of the Vibrato effect (see diagram).
• DELAY ........ Determines the amount of time that elapses between the
playing of a key and the start of the Vibrato effect (see
diagram). Higher settings increase the delay of the Vibrato
onset.
RELEASE
SPEED
Level
DEPTH
DELAY
Time
88
PF-1000
Editing the voice — Sound Creator
EFFECT
The explanations here apply to step #3 on page 85.
Determines the brilliance of the tone,
when a Natural voice is selected. This
can also be set from the PIANO page
(page 87), when a piano voice is
selected.
• Metallic ......... Sharp metallic tone
• Bright............ Bright tone
• Normal .......... Standard tone
• Mellow .......... Soft and mellow tone
• Dark .............. Dark tone
Determines the effect type (Reverb/
Chorus/DSP) for the Natural voices.
When a regular voice is selected, the
DSP type and Variation are set in two
separate menus. For information on the
effect structure, see page 121; for a list
of available effect types, refer to the
separate Data List.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
The same as the “Mixing Console”
on page 119.
This parameter enables you to select whether the
sound is sustained while you press the keys on
the keyboard (“PIANO LIKE”), or the sound is
sustained only while you press and hold down the
sustain pedal, like playing a real vibraphone
(“NORMAL”) (for Vibraphone voice).
• If you select [Bright] or
[Metallic] as the type of
brilliance, the volume level
will increase slightly. In
this case, raising the
[MASTER VOLUME] may
result in distortion. If this
happens, lower the volume accordingly.
• “SPEED” parameter is
added when selecting
VIBE ROTOR DSP type.
This parameter enables
you to set the speed of
vibrato when you select
the Vibraphone voice, recreating the effect of a vibe
rotor pedal.
HARMONY
The explanations here apply to step #3 on page 85.
The parameters are the same as for HARMONY/ECHO display of FUNCTION. For details, see page 133.
PF-1000
89
Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs
— Song Creator
With these powerful yet easy-to-use song creating features, you can record your own keyboard performances and store
them for future recall. Several different recording methods are available: Quick Recording (page 91), which lets you
record easily and quickly; Multi Recording (page 92), which lets you record several different parts; and Step Recording
(page 94), which lets you enter notes one by one. Songs can include not only the voice settings for the keyboard
performance (Main, Layer, Left), but also the effects and auto accompaniment parts. The recorded song can be stored to
internal memory or floppy disk (page 38, 44).
EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2
STYLE
L
REC
TRACK1
R
START/STOP
TOP
REW
FF
REPEAT
BACK
MENU
DEMO
NEW SONG
DIGITAL
RECORDING
LCD
CONTRAST
SYNC.START
SONG
HELP
A
F
B
G
C
H
NEXT
VOICE
PART
ON/OFF
LAYER
LEFT
FUNCTION
DIGITAL
STUDIO
SOUND
CREATOR
D
I
E
J
MUSIC
FINDER
ENTER
DATA ENTRY
FADE IN/OUT
POP & ROCK POP BALLADS DANCE
SWING & JAZZ
R&B
COUNTRY
LATIN
MARCH &
WORLD
WALTZ
BALLROOM
PIANIST
USER
EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2
STYLE
L
DIGITAL
RECORDING
TRACK1
R
STYLE
ACMP
AUTO FILL IN
REC
OTS LINK
START/STOP
TOP
REW
NEW SONG
BREAK
MAX
MASTER VOLUME
START/STOP
METRONOME
INTRO
ENDING/rit.
MAIN
A
B
C
DSP
PIANO &
HARPSI.
E.PIANO
SYNC.STOP
SYNC.START
REPEAT
CHANNEL
ON/OFF
SONG
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
MONO
LEFT HOLD
1
GUITAR
BASS
PIANO
BRASS
RESET
TEMPO
WOODWIND STRINGS CHOIR & PAD
SYNTH.
XG
2
3
4
ONE TOUCH SETTING
8
TAP TEMPO
RESET
HARMONY/
ECHO
ORGAN &
ACCORDION PERCUSSION
EXIT
PART
SYNC.START
START/STOP
D
STYLE CONTROL
VARIATION
VOICE EFFECT
BALANCE
FF
DIRECT
ACCESS
MIN
REVERB
MIXING
CONSOLE
TRANSPOSE
PART
VOICE
USER
FREEZE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
MEMORY
REGISTRATION MEMORY
About Song Recording
■ Quick Recording (page 91)
This is the easiest recording method, and lets you quickly record the piano
song you are practicing. You can select from three parts: right hand, left hand
and auto accompaniment. For example, you can record only your right hand
performance, or you can simultaneously record both your right hand and the
auto accompaniment.
■ Multi Recording (page 92)
This lets you record a song with several different instrument sounds, and create
the sound of a full band or orchestra. Record the performance of each
instrument individually and create fully orchestrated compositions. You can
also record over an existing part on an internal song or a song on disk with
your own performance.
■ Step Recording (page 94)
This method is like writing music notation on paper. It lets you enter each note
individually, by specifying the pitch and length. This is ideal for making precise
recordings, or for recording parts that are difficult to play.
■ Song Editing (page 100)
The PF-1000 also lets you edit the songs you’ve recorded by the Quick
Recording, Multi Recording and Step Recording methods.
90
PF-1000
• The internal memory capacity of
the PF-1000 is about 580KB. Memory capacity for 2DD and 2HD
floppy disks is about 720KB and
1.44MB, respectively. When you
store data to these locations, all file
types of the PF-1000 (Voice, Style,
Song, Registration, etc.) are stored
together.
• The microphone input signal cannot be recorded.
• Songs recorded on thePF-1000
are automatically recorded as SMF
(Standard MIDI File format 0) data.
For details on SMF see page 148.
• Playback of the recorded song data
can be transmitted from MIDI OUT,
letting you play the sounds of a
connected external tone generator
(page 135).
• The volume level of each channel
of the song can be adjusted from
the Mixing Console and the settings can be saved. Moreover, even
after you’ve set a voice for your
keyboard play during recording,
you can record voice selections, so
that the voice changes automatically during playback (page 102).
Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs— Song Creator
Quick Recording
This is the easiest recording method — perfect for quickly recording and playing back a piano song you’re practicing, so
you can check your progress.
■ When recording over the part of an internal
song or a song on disk with your own
performance:
■ When creating a new song:
1
REC
NEW SONG
TOP
START/STOP
REW
FF
REPEAT
SYNC.START
SONG
1
Select the desired song (page 74, 76).
2
Select the voice and accompaniment style you want to use in the song.
If you want to record to the Layer/Left voices, make sure to set the [LAYER]/[LEFT] buttons to ON.
Make any other desired settings (Reverb, Chorus, etc.) as well.
3
Simultaneously hold down the [REC] button and press the button
corresponding to the track you want to record.
You can select TRACK 1 or TRACK 2 and the EXTRA TRACKS for recording at the
same time.
If the “LAYER” or “LEFT”
button is on before pressing
the REC button, the corresponding Layer and Left parts
are automatically recorded to
different channels.
To record your keyboard performance:
Press either the [TRACK 1] or [TRACK 2] button.
To record the auto accompaniment performance:
Press the [EXTRA TRACKS] button.
REC
The performance of track 1/2
is recorded to the channel
specified in the SONG SETTING display (page 122).
EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2
STYLE
L
TRACK1
R
To stop recording, press
the [REC] button again.
4
Recording starts as soon as you play the keyboard.
You can also start recording by pressing the SONG/STYLE
CONTROL [START/STOP] button. Recording can also be
started by pressing down the pedal, if the song start/stop
function is properly assigned to the pedal (page 128).
END
To stop recording, press the [RECORD] button again.
Recording can also be stopped by pressing down the pedal, if the song start/
stop function is properly assigned to the pedal (page 128).
■ Play back your new song
To play back the performance you just recorded, return the song to the beginning by
using the [TOP] button and press the SONG [START/STOP] button.
Playback stops automatically at the end of the song, and returns to the beginning of the
song.
You can edit the recorded song data from the SONG CREATOR (1 - 16) displays (page 103).
Press the [6▼] button from the Open/Save display for Song to store the recorded data
(page 38, 44).
You can overdub a second
right-hand performance onto
Track 2 after recording the
first right-hand performance
(including the layer voices)
on Track 1. To do this, set the
[LEFT] button to OFF and
repeat steps 2 and 3.
To pause, press the SONG
[START/STOP] button. To
resume recording, press the
SONG [START/STOP] button again.
You can also use the metronome click as a guide while
recording.
The sound of the metronome
is not recorded.
CAUTION
Turning off the power
automatically deletes your
recorded performance. If
you wish to save the
recording, make sure to
store it to internal memory (USER drive) or floppy
disk (page 38, 44).
PF-1000
91
Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs— Song Creator
Multi Recording
This lets you record a song with several different instrument sounds on up to sixteen channels, and create the sound of
a full band or orchestra.
The structure of the channels and parts are shown in the chart below.
Channels
Parts
(default settings)
Available parts
Channels
Voice MAIN, LAYER, LEFT
Accompaniment style RHYTHM 1
Accompaniment style RHYTHM 2
Accompaniment style BASS
Accompaniment style CHORD1
Accompaniment style CHORD2
Accompaniment style PAD
Accompaniment style PHRASE1
Accompaniment style PHRASE2
MIDI
1
Voice MAIN
2
Voice MAIN
3
Voice MAIN
4
Voice MAIN
5
Voice MAIN
6
Voice MAIN
14
7
Voice MAIN
15
8
Voice MAIN
16
9
10
11
12
13
Parts
(default settings)
Accompaniment style
RHYTHM 1
Accompaniment style
RHYTHM 2
Accompaniment style
BASS
Accompaniment style
CHORD1
Accompaniment style
CHORD2
Accompaniment style
PAD
Accompaniment style
PHRASE1
Accompaniment style
PHRASE2
Available parts
Voice MAIN, LAYER, LEFT
Accompaniment style RHYTHM 1
Accompaniment style RHYTHM 2
Accompaniment style BASS
Accompaniment style CHORD1
Accompaniment style CHORD2
Accompaniment style PAD
Accompaniment style PHRASE1
Accompaniment style PHRASE2
MIDI
About the accompaniment style parts
Rhythm .....This is the basis for the accompaniment, containing the drum and percussion rhythm patterns. Usually one of the drum kits is used.
Bass..........The Bass part uses various appropriate instrument sounds to match the style, such as acoustic bass, synth bass, and others.
Chord........This is the rhythmic chord backing, commonly used with piano or guitar voices.
Pad ............This part features sustained chords and commonly uses lush sounds such as strings, organ, and choir.
Phrase ......This part is used for various embellishments and riffs that enhance the song, such as brass section accents and chord arpeggios.
■ When recording over the part of an internal
song or a song on disk with your own
performance:
■ When creating a new song:
1
REC
NEW SONG
TOP
START/STOP
REW
FF
REPEAT
1
SYNC.START
SONG
2
Select the desired channel for recording (set it to “REC”) simultaneously
holding down the [REC] button and pressing the appropriate button [1▲▼]
- [8▲▼]. Several channels can be selected at the same time.
REC ......................... Enables recording for the channel
ON ......................... Enables playback of the channel
OFF......................... Mutes the channel
To cancel or disable recording, press the [REC] button once again.
REC
1
92
Select the desired song (page 74, 76).
PF-1000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
The part is automatically
selected when setting the
several channels to “REC” at
the same time.
Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs— Song Creator
3
Select the part you want to assign to the channel to be recorded.
This determines which of the keyboard-played parts (Main/Layer/Left) and the
accompaniment style parts (RHYTHM 1/2, BASS, etc.) are recorded to the
recording channels selected in step #2.
For a list of the initial default assignments, see page 92.
C
D
4
Recording starts as soon as you play the keyboard.
You can also start recording by pressing the
SONG/STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button.
The recording can be started/stopped by pressing
the pedal if the recording punch in/out function is
set to the pedal (page 99).
When selecting the MIDI
part
• Setting a single channel
to MIDI
All incoming data received
via any of the MIDI channels 1 - 16 is recorded.
When using an external
MIDI keyboard or controller to record, this lets you
record without having to
set the MIDI transmit
channel on the external
device.
• Setting several channels
to MIDI
When using an external
MIDI keyboard or controller to record, this records
data only over the set
MIDI channel — meaning
the external device must
also be set to the same
channel.
A single part (with the
exception of MIDI parts) cannot be assigned to several
channels.
The settings of the recorded
parts is stored temporarily
until you execute Quick
Recording, select a song, or
turn the power off.
5
6
To stop recording, press the [REC] button again.
You can also use the pedal to stop recording by releasing it, if the recording
punch in/out function has been assigned to the pedal (page 99).
Play back your new song.
To play back the performance you just recorded, return the song to the
beginning by using the [TOP] button and press the SONG [START/STOP]
button.
Playback stops automatically at the end of the song, and returns to the
beginning of the song.
To pause, press the SONG
[START/STOP] button. To
resume recording, press the
SONG [START/STOP] button again.
You can also use the metronome click as a guide while
recording.
The sound of the metronome
is not recorded.
CAUTION
END
To record a new part, repeat steps 2 - 6 above.
You can set previously recorded parts to play back, and monitor them
while you record a new part. Continue in this way until you have a
finished song.
You can edit the recorded song data from the SONG CREATOR (1 - 16)
displays (page 103).
Press the [6▼] button from the Open/Save display for Song to store
the recorded data (page 38, 44).
Turning off the power
automatically deletes your
recorded performance. If
you wish to save the
recording, make sure to
store it to internal memory (USER drive) or floppy
disk (page 38, 44).
PF-1000
93
Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs— Song Creator
Recording Individual Notes — Step Record
This method lets you create a song by entering notes one by one, without having to perform them in real time. This is
also convenient for recording the chords and the melody separately.
Operation
1
Select an existing song (page 74, 76) to
which you want to add parts or re-record.
If you want to create a new song,
simultaneously press the [RECORD] button
and the [TOP] button.
3
Press the [A] button to call up the Song
Creator display.
A
B
2
Press the [DIGITAL RECORDING] button.
DIGITAL
STUDIO
SOUND
CREATOR
C
D
E
DIGITAL
RECORDING
MIXING
CONSOLE
PART
4
5
Using the [BACK]/[NEXT]
buttons, select the “1 -16”
tab for recording melodies
and other parts, or select
the “CHD” (Chord) tab for
recording chords, and after
selecting the “1-16” tab,
select a record channel
with the [F] (CH) button.
Call up the Step Record
display by pressing the
[G] button.
BACK
NEXT
F
G
H
I
J
F
G
H
Any voice, effect and other
settings you make in the
Mixing Console are automatically cancelled when you
call up the CHD (Chord)
page.
I
J
94
PF-1000
The voices in the USER and
FLOPPY DISK pages cannot be selected for Step
recording. You can select
voices from the PRESET
page; however, these may
sound slightly different from
the original voice.
Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs— Song Creator
6
First, select the desired voice. To enter the note, first specify the length and loudness in this display,
then enter the pitch by actually playing the note on the keyboard.
Moves the cursor
position up and down.
Returns the cursor to
the beginning of the
song (the first note of
the first measure).
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
Use these to move the selected event,
in units of measures (BAR), beat, and
clocks. For information on measure/
beat/clock settings, see below.
1
Specifies the type of note to be input next.
(Sixteenth notes are available only when
recording the melody.) This also determines
the position to which the pointer will
advance after a note has been entered.
END
2
3
4
5
6
7
Determines the velocity
(loudness) of the note to be
entered (only when recording
the melody). For information
on velocity settings, see
below.
Determines the length of
the note (as a percentage)
from the position at which it
is to be entered. (This is
available only when
recording the melody.) For
information on gate time
settings, see below.
Each press of this button toggles
among the three basic note
selectors at the bottom of the
display: normal, dotted, and triplet.
(This is available only when
recording the melody.)
8
Deletes the event at the cursor.
To close the STEP RECORD display, press the [EXIT] button. Make sure to store the recorded
data by pressing the [I] (SAVE) button (page 44).
■ Measure/Beat/Clock
Measure 1
Beat
Clock
1
2
2
3
4
1
000- 000- 000- 0001919 1919 1919 1919
2
3
4
000- 000- 000- 0001919 1919 1919 1919
■ Velocity
The table below shows the available settings and the corresponding velocity values.
Kbd. Vel
Actual
playing
strength
fff
ff
f
mf
mp
p
pp
ppp
127
111
95
79
63
47
31
15
■ Gate Time
The following settings are available:
Normal .......................
80%
Tenuto ........................
99%
Staccato......................
40%
Staccatissimo ..............
20%
Manual ....................... The gate time (note length) can be specified as a percentage by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial.
PF-1000
95
Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs— Song Creator
Recording Melodies — Step Record (Note)
In this section, we’ll show you how to use Step Recording
by guiding you through this actual music example,
shown at right.
The operations here apply to step 6 on page 95.
1
1-2
1-1
Select this note.
1-3
While holding down this note...
...press this (to input a tie).
The notation display on the instrument may not be accurate,
especially for tied notes or longer notes. To have the notation
displayed accurately, set the gate time to tenuto by using the [H]
button, and input the notes as desired.
2-2
2
2-3
2-4
2-1
Select this note.
3
3-1
Press this button to
display the dotted notes.
3-3
3-2
Select this note.
4
4-1
Call up the normal notes
by pressing this button.
4-3
4-2
Select this note.
To input rests, simply move the measure/beat/clock location for the desired rest time, then input the next note.
■ Play back the newly created melody
Use the [C] ( ▲ ) button to move the cursor to the beginning of the song, and press the SONG [START/STOP] button
to hear the newly entered notes. To actually enter the recorded data, press the [EXIT] button. The entered data can be
edited from the SONG CREATOR (1 - 16) display (page 103).
96
PF-1000
Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs— Song Creator
Recording Chord Changes for the Auto Accompaniment — Step
Record (Chord)
The Chord Step recording feature makes it possible to record auto accompaniment chord changes one at a time with
precise timing. Since the changes don’t have to be played in real time, you can easily create complex, tight chord
changes — over which you can record the melody in normal fashion.
The operations here apply to step 6 on page 95.
Entering Chords and Sections (Chord Step)
For example, you can input the following chord progression by the procedure described below.
MAIN A
C
1
BREAK
F
G
F
MAIN B
G7
Enter the chords by using the currently
selected chord fingering method in the Auto
Accompaniment section of the keyboard.
C
Press the MAIN [A] button to specify the section, and enter the chords as shown at right.
MAIN A
C
B
G
C
MAIN
A
F
C
001:1:000
D
F
Select this note value and play
the chords indicated at right.
2
001:3:000
G
002:1:000
Press the [BREAK] button to specify the Break section, and enter the chords as shown at right.
MAIN A
C
BREAK
F
G
F
G7
F
002:3:000
BREAK
INTRO
G7
002:4:000
Select this note value and play
the chords indicated at right.
PF-1000
97
Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs— Song Creator
3
Press the MAIN [B] button to specify the section and enter the chord indicated at right.
MAIN A
BREAK
MAIN B
MAIN
A
B
C
D
C
F
G
F
G7
C
C
003:1:000
Select this note value and play
the chords indicated at right.
■ Play back the newly created chord progression
Use the [C] ( ▲ ) button to move the cursor to the beginning of the song, and press the
SONG [START/STOP] button to hear the newly entered notes. To actually enter the
recorded data, press the [EXIT] button. The entered data can be edited from the SONG
CREATOR (CHD) display (page 104). Finally, press the [F] (EXPAND) button from the
SONG CREATOR (CHD) display in order to convert the input data into song data.
To enter a fill-in, press the
[AUTO FILL IN] button and
press one of the MAIN [A] –
[D] buttons.
END Mark
An “END” mark is shown in
the display, indicating the
end of the song data.
The actual position of the
End mark differs depending
on the section that is input at
the end of the song. When
an Ending section is input,
the End mark automatically
follows the Ending data.
When a section other than
Ending is input, the End
mark is set two measures
after the final section.
The End mark can be freely
set to any position desired.
98
PF-1000
Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs— Song Creator
Select the Recording Options: Starting, Stopping,
Punching In/Out — Rec Mode
From this display you can set up how recording is started and stopped for either Quick Recording or Multi Recording.
To call up these settings, select the REC MODE display by using the [BACK][NEXT] button, after performing operation
steps 1 - 3 on page 94.
These settings determine how recording will start.
F
Normal
Overwrite recording starts when you press the
SONG [START/STOP] button or when you play the
keyboard with Synchro standby set to ON.
G
H
First Key On
Overwrite recording starts as soon as you start
playing the keyboard. This setting also preserves
the previous lead-in data, letting you record over
the original lead-in without erasing it.
I
Calls up the SONG
display, from which
you can save the
edited data.
J
When this is set to ON, you can use
the sostenuto (center) pedal to control
the punch-in and punch-out points.
Press and hold down the sostenuto
pedal to record. Recording stops when
you release the pedal.
Punch In At
The song plays back normally up to the indicated
Punch In measure (set by the [3▲▼] buttons),
then starts overwrite recording at that Punch In
measure.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Determines the measure at which
Punch In overwrite recording starts
(when “PUNCH IN AT” is selected).
Determines the Punch Out measure —
the measure at which Punch In overwrite
recording stops (when “PUNCH OUT AT”
is selected).
These settings determine how recording will stop as well as what happens to previously recorded data.
Replace All
This deletes all data following the point at which recording is stopped.
Punch Out
When the Pedal Punch In/
This maintains all data following the point at which recording is stopped.
Out function is set to ON, the
Punch Out At
current function assignment
Overwrite recording continues until the indicated Punch Out measure (set by the [6▲▼] buttons),
of the sostenuto pedal is
then stops at that Punch Out measure, after which song playback continues normally.
cancelled.
About Punch In/Out
This feature is useful primarily for re-recording or replacing a specific section of an already recorded channel. The
illustrations below indicate a variety of situations in which selected measures in an eight-measure phrase are re-recorded.
REC START setting
REC END setting
NORMAL
REPLACE ALL
NORMAL
PUNCH OUT
NORMAL
PUNCH OUT AT=006
FIRST KEY ON
REPLACE ALL
FIRST KEY ON
PUNCH OUT
FIRST KEY ON
PUNCH OUT AT=006
PUNCH IN AT=003
REPLACE ALL
PUNCH IN AT=003
PUNCH OUT
PUNCH IN AT=003
PUNCH OUT AT=006
Original data
1
2
3
4
2
3
4
2
3
4
1
1
Start/
play back original data
1
Start/
play back original data
1
Start/
play back original data
1
Start/
play back original data
1
Start/
play back original data
1
8
5
*1 When measures 1 - 2 are not
overwritten, recording starts
from measure 3.
*2 You’ll have to press the [REC]
button at the end of 5 measures.
Deleted
5
6
7
8
7
8
Stop overwrite recording/
play original data
Start/start overwrite recording *1
Start/
play back original data
7
Stop recording *2
Start/start overwrite recording *1
1
6
Stop recording *2
Start/start overwrite recording *1
1
5
2
3
4
Start playing the keys/
start overwrite recording
2
3
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
5
Deleted
Stop recording *2
4
5
6
7
Stop overwrite recording/
play original data
Start overwrite recording
2
5
Stop recording *2
Start overwrite recording
2
Deleted
Stop overwrite recording/
play original data
Start overwrite recording
2
5
Stop recording *2
Start playing the keys/
start overwrite recording
2
6
Stop recording *2
Start playing the keys/
start overwrite recording
2
5
4
5
7
8
Previously recorded data
Newly recorded data
Deleted data
PF-1000
99
Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs— Song Creator
Editing a Recorded Song
Whether you’ve recorded a song using Quick Recording, Multi Recording, or Step Recording, you can use the editing
features to change the song data.
Editing Channel-related Parameters — Channel
Calling up the operations here apply to step 4 on page 94. To call up the display shown below, use the [BACK]/[NEXT]
buttons.
Quantize
Quantize lets you “clean up” or tighten the timing of a previously recorded channel. For example, the following
musical passage has been written with exact quarter-note and eighth-note values.
Even though you think you may have recorded the passage accurately, your actual performance may be slightly ahead
of or behind the beat. Quantize allows you to align all the notes in a channel so that the timing is absolutely accurate to
the specified note value (see below).
Use this to select the
desired edit operation.
Executes the Quantize
operation. After the
operation is completed, this
button changes to [UNDO],
letting you restore the
original data if you’re not
satisfied with the Quantize
results. The Undo function
only has one level; only the
previous operation can be
undone.
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
1
2
3
4
Selects the desired
channel to be quantized.
5
6
7
Calls up the SONG
display, from which you
can save the edited data.
Determines how strongly the notes will
be quantized. If a value less than
100% is selected, notes will be moved
toward the specified quantization
beats only by the specified amount.
Applying less than 100% quantization
lets you preserve some of the “human”
feel in the recording.
8
Selects the quantize size (resolution).
See the below for the details.
■ About Quantize Size
Set the Quantize size to correspond to the smallest notes in the channel you are working with. For example, if the
data was recorded with both quarter notes and eighth notes, use 1/8 note for the Quantize size. If you apply a 1/4
note Quantize size, the eighth notes would be moved on top of the quarter notes.
One measure of eighth notes before quantization
After 1/8 note quantization
Quantize Size
1/4 note
1/4 note triplet
1/8 note
1/8 note triplet
1/16 note
1/16 note triplet
1/32 note
1/8 note +
1/8 note triplet *
1/16 note +
1/8 note triplet *
1/16 note +
1/16 note triplet *
The three Quantize settings marked with asterisks (*) are exceptionally convenient, since they allow you to quantize two different
note values at the same time, without compromising the quantization of either one. For example, if you have both straight 1/8 notes
and 1/8 note triplets recorded to the same channel, and you quantize to straight 1/8 notes, all notes in the channel are quantized to
straight 1/8 notes — completely eliminating any triplet feel in the rhythm. However, if you use the 1/8 note + 1/8 note triplet setting,
both the straight and triplet notes will be quantized correctly.
100
PF-1000
Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs— Song Creator
Delete
This lets you delete recorded data in the specified channel.
Use these to select the
desired edit operation.
Deletes all data in the
selected channel. After the
operation is completed, this
button changes to [UNDO],
letting you restore the
original data. The Undo
function only has one level;
only the previous operation
can be undone.
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Calls up the SONG
display, from which you
can save the edited data.
8
These select the channel to be deleted.
Mix
This function lets you mix the data of two channels and place the results in a different channel. It also lets you copy the
data from one channel to another.
Use these to select the
desired edit operation.
Executes the Mix operation.
After the operation is
completed, this button
changes to [UNDO], letting
you restore the original data
if you’re not satisfied with
the Mix results. The Undo
function only has one level;
only the previous operation
can be undone.
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
1
2
3
These let you specify the two
source channels to be mixed.
4
5
6
7
All data other than the mixed
note data is derived from the
Source 1 channel.
Calls up the SONG
display, from which you
can save the edited data.
8
Determines the channel into which the
mix or copy results will be placed.
If “COPY” is selected here, the data from
Source 1 is copied to the Destination channel.
PF-1000
101
Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs— Song Creator
Channel Transpose
This allows you to transpose the recorded data of individual channels up or down by a maximum of two octaves in
semitone increments.
Use these to select the
desired edit operation.
Executes the Channel
Transpose operation. After
the operation is completed,
this button changes to
[UNDO], letting you restore
the original data if you’re not
satisfied with the Channel
Transpose results. The
Undo function only has one
level; only the previous
operation can be undone.
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
Toggles between the two
channel displays: Channels
1 - 8, and Channels 9 - 16.
To simultaneously set all
channels to the same
value, adjust the Channel
Transpose for one of the
channels while holding
down this button.
Calls up the SONG
display, from which you
can save the edited data.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Determines the amount of transpose for each channel.
Set Up
You can change the initial settings of the song — such as voice, level, and tempo — to the current settings of the mixing
console or panel controls.
Use these to select the
desired edit operation.
Executes the SET
UP operation. Once
SET UP has been
executed, the
operation cannot be
cancelled or undone.
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Calls up the SONG
display, from which you
can save the edited data.
Use this to checkmark the
selected item.
Checkmarked items are
stored with the song.
Determines which playback features and functions will be automatically called up along with the selected song. All
events, with the exception of “KEYBOARD VOICE,” can be recorded only at the beginning of the song.
Before you select or checkmark any of these items (other than Keyboard Voice), make sure to return the song to the
beginning by using the [TOP] button, and stop playback.
Song ............................ Stores the tempo setting and all settings made from the Mixing Console.
Keyboard Voice........... This lets you automatically set the voice of the keyboard-played parts (Main/Layer/Left) when
playing back the song. Stores the keyboard-played voice and the part ON/OFF settings. To
record a voice change for the keyboard-played part in the middle of a song, stop the song at the
desired point, make the voice change, and press the [D] (EXECUTE) button.
Lyrics Language ........ Stores the settings of the Lyrics display.
Score Setting.............. Stores the settings of the Score display.
Mic. Setting ................. Stores the microphone settings in the mixing console.
102
PF-1000
Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs— Song Creator
Editing Note Events — 1 - 16
From this display, you can edit individual note events (see below). Calling up operations here apply to step 4 on
page 94. Use the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons to call up the display below.
Use these to move the
cursor up/down and select
the desired event.
Returns to the beginning
position of the current song
(the first note of the first
measure).
Use these to move the
cursor left/right and select
the desired parameter of
the highlighted event. Keep
in mind that moving the
cursor away from the justedited value automatically
enters that value.
Determines the
channel to be edited.
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
Calls up the Step
Recording display
(page 95).
Calls up the Filter display
(page 105), letting you
select only the events you
wish to shown in the
Event List.
Calls up the SONG
display, from which you
can save the edited data.
Determines the current
position of the event being edited.
1
2
3
4
5
6
For coarse adjustment of the event value.
For fine adjustment of the event value.
Cuts (deletes) all selected events. The cut events
are copied and can be pasted to another location.
Adds a new event to the Event List.
7
8
Holding this button down
while using the [A] and
[B] buttons lets you
select multiple events.
Pastes all cut or copied events to
the selected location.
If the value at the cursor has been changed,
pressing this restores the original value.
Copies all selected events. The copied
events can be pasted to another location.
Deletes the event at the cursor position.
To actually enter an edited
value, move the cursor away
from the value or press the
SONG [START/STOP] button.
Note Events
Parameter
Note
Ctrl (Control change)
Prog (Program change)
P.Bnd (Pitch bend)
A.T. (After touch)
Description
Determines the pitch, velocity (volume) and length of the note.
Determines the control change number and value. For details on control change messages, refer to the separate
Data List booklet (MIDI Data Format).
Determines the voice (program) number. For details on program change messages and how to set them, refer to
the separate Data List booklet (Voice List).
Determines the pitch bend value.
Determines the after touch value.
The sound of the voices
recorded with Step recording
may sound slightly different
from the original.
PF-1000
103
Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs— Song Creator
Editing Chord Events — CHD
From this display, you can edit the chord events you’ve recorded to the song.
Calling up operations here apply to step 4 on page 94. Use the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons to call up the display below.
With the exception of the [F] (EXPAND) button, the operations here are the same as those in Editing Note Events
(page 103).
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
Press this to convert the
recorded chord and section
entries into song data.
To actually enter an edited
value, move the cursor away
from the value or press the
SONG [START/STOP] button.
Chord Events
Parameter
Style (Accompaniment
style)
Tempo
Chord
Sect (Section)
OnOff (Channel on/off)
CH.Vol (Channel volume)
S.Vol (Style volume)
Description
Displays the accompaniment style name. To enter an accompaniment style, call up the STYLE display and select
the desired style.
Determines the tempo value.
Specifies the chord — its root note, chord type, and on-bass note.
Specifies the section — its name and variation.
Determines whether specific channels (rhythm, bass, etc.) are turned on/off.
Determines the level of specific channels (rhythm, bass, etc.).
Determines the level of the entire accompaniment style.
Editing System Events — SYS/EX. (System Exclusive)
From this display, you can edit recorded System events.
Calling up operations here apply to step 4 on page 94. Use the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons to call up the display below. The
operations here are the same as those in Editing Note Events (page 103).
System Events
Parameter
Description
ScBar (Score initial measure) This determines the number of the top measure. The measure number is indicated in the MAIN display or in the
music notation. Only one value can be specified at the beginning of the song data.
Tempo
Determines the tempo value.
Time (Time signature)
Determines the time signature.
Key
Determines the key, as well as the major/minor setting.
XG Prm (XG parameters)
Allows you to make various detailed changes to the data. For more information on XG parameters, refer to the
separate Data List booklet (MIDI Data Format).
SysEx (System Exclusive)
Displays the System Exclusive data in the song. This does not let you change the actual contents of the data;
however, it lets you delete, cut, copy, and paste the data.
Meta (Meta event)
Displays the SMF meta events in the song. This does not let you change the actual contents of the data;
however, it lets you delete, cut, copy, and paste the data.
104
PF-1000
Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs— Song Creator
Inputting and Editing Lyrics
This convenient function lets you enter the song name and the lyrics for the song. It also lets you change or correct
already existing lyrics. For more information on lyric events, see the chart below. Calling up operations here apply to
step 4 on page 94. Use the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons to call up the display below. The operations here are the same as
those in Editing Note Events (page 103).
In the following example, we’ll rewrite a portion of the lyrics to one of the songs, “Twinkle Twinkle Little Star.”
Select the internal song “Twinkle Twinkle Little Star.” The method for selection is the same as described on page 74.
1
2
Move the
cursor to the
event
containing the
lyric “star.”
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
Press this button
to save the newly
changed lyric
data.
The song “Twinkle Twinkle
Little Star” is in the folder
“For Children” in the Song
Book (page 74).
Move the
cursor to the
word “star.”
1
3
4
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
To actually enter an edited value, move
the cursor away from the value or press
the SONG [START/STOP] button.
Use these buttons to call up the Lyric display, from which you can input lyrics.
From the Lyric display (page 45), enter the new word, “(your name).”
Lyrics Events
Parameter
Name (Song name)
Lyrics
Code (Other controls)
Description
Determines the song name. This calls up the NAME display, from which you can enter the name.
Allows you to enter lyrics.
CR : Enters a line break in the lyrics text.
LF : Deletes the currently displayed lyrics and displays the next set of lyrics.
Customizing the Event List — Filter
This function lets you determine which event types will be shown in the event editing displays. To select an event for
display, checkmark the box corresponding to the event name. To filter out an event so that it is not shown on the list,
remove the checkmark so that the box is empty.
To call up the display below, press the [H] (FILTER) button from any of the following displays: CHD, 1 - 16, SysEX, or
LYRICS (page 103 - page 105).
Calls up the Main Filter
display. For more information
on each event type, refer to
the separate Data List
booklet (MIDI Data Format).
Calls up the Control
Change Filter display. For
more information on each
event type, refer to the
separate Data List booklet
(MIDI Data Format).
Enters checkmarks for all items.
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
Calls up the Accompaniment Filter
display. For more information on each
event type, refer to the separate Data
List booklet (MIDI Data Format).
END
Execute the settings
by pressing the
[EXIT] button.
Reverses the checkmark
settings for all boxes. In
other words, this enters
checkmarks to all boxes
that were previously unchecked and vice versa.
Selects the item, scrolling up/down one
item at a time.
1
EXIT
Selects only note data;
checkmarks for all other
boxes are removed.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Enters/removes the checkmark for the
selected item.
When “MAIN FILTER” or “ACCOMPANIMENT FILTER” is selected, these select the
item, scrolling up/down to the top or the bottom. When “CONTROL CHANGE FILTER”
is selected, these select the item, scrolling up/down eight items at a time.
PF-1000
105
Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator
This powerful feature lets you create your own original styles, which can then be used for auto accompaniment — just
as with the preset styles.
ACMP
AUTO FILL IN
BREAK
INTRO
OTS LINK
MAIN
A
B
D
C
LCD
CONTRAST
ENDING/rit.
SYNC.STOP
SYNC.START
BACK
MENU
DEMO
HELP
STYLE CONTROL
A
F
B
G
C
H
START/STOP
NEXT
VOICE
PART
ON/OFF
LAYER
LEFT
FUNCTION
DIGITAL
STUDIO
SOUND
CREATOR
D
I
E
J
MUSIC
FINDER
ENTER
DATA ENTRY
FADE IN/OUT
POP & ROCK POP BALLADS DANCE
SWING & JAZZ
R&B
COUNTRY
LATIN
MARCH &
WORLD
WALTZ
BALLROOM
PIANIST
USER
EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2
STYLE
L
DIGITAL
RECORDING
TRACK1
R
AUTO FILL IN
REC
OTS LINK
START/STOP
TOP
REW
FF
BREAK
MAX
MASTER VOLUME
START/STOP
METRONOME
INTRO
ENDING/rit.
MAIN
A
B
C
DSP
PIANO &
HARPSI.
E.PIANO
SYNC.STOP
SYNC.START
CHANNEL
ON/OFF
SONG
START/STOP
D
STYLE CONTROL
EXIT
PART
SYNC.START
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TAP TEMPO
RESET
RESET
TEMPO
TRANSPOSE
VARIATION
HARMONY/
ECHO
MONO
LEFT HOLD
1
ORGAN &
ACCORDION PERCUSSION
GUITAR
BASS
PIANO
WOODWIND STRINGS CHOIR & PAD
SYNTH.
XG
VOICE EFFECT
BALANCE
REPEAT
DIRECT
ACCESS
NEW SONG
MIN
REVERB
MIXING
CONSOLE
STYLE
ACMP
DIGITAL
RECORDING
BRASS
PART
2
3
4
ONE TOUCH SETTING
USER
FREEZE
1
2
VOICE
3
4
5
6
7
8
MEMORY
REGISTRATION MEMORY
About Creating Accompaniment Styles
The chart at right shows the basic parts (or “channels”) that make up each section
of an accompaniment style. To create an accompaniment style, record patterns to
the various channels one by one, for each of the sections you want to create.
Section
Channel
INTRO A - D
MAIN A - D
■ Realtime Recording (page 108)
FILL IN A - D
You can record accompaniment styles by simply playing the parts from the
keyboard in real time. However, you don’t have to record every part yourself
— you can choose an existing preset accompaniment style that is close to the
style you want, then add or replace parts in that style as needed to create your
own custom style.
BREAK
RHYTHM 1, RHYTHM 2,
BASS, CHORD 1,
CHORD 2, PAD,
PHRASE 1, PHRASE 2
ENDING A - D
For information on the part
structure of accompaniment
styles, see page 92.
Realtime Recording Characteristics
• Loop recording
Since auto accompaniment playback repeats the accompaniment patterns of several measures in a “loop,” you can
also record patterns in a loop. For example, if you start recording with a two-measure Main section, the two
measures are repeatedly recorded. Notes that you record will play back from the next loop (repetition), letting you
record new material while hearing the parts you previously recorded.
• Overdub recording
This feature lets you record new material to a channel already containing recorded data, without deleting the
original data. In style recording, the recorded data remains intact, unless you specifically delete it yourself. For
example, if you start recording with a two-measure Main section, the two measures are repeated. As you record
notes to each pass of the loop (repetition), those notes play back from the next loop, letting you overdub new
material while hearing the previous parts.
■ Step Recording (page 109)
This method is like writing music notation on paper, since it allows you to enter each note or individually, and
specify its length. This is ideal for making precise recordings, or for recording parts that are difficult to play.
■ Assembling an Accompaniment Style (page 110)
This convenient feature lets you create composite styles by combining
various patterns from the internal preset accompaniment styles. For
example, if you want to create your own original 8-beat style, you
could take rhythm patterns from the “8 Beat 1” style, use the bass
pattern from “8 Beat 2,” and import the chord patterns from the “60’s 8
Beat” style — combining the various elements to create one
accompaniment style.
■ Editing the created Accompaniment Style (page 111)
With the editing features, you can custom edit the styles you’ve
created by real time recording, step recording, and assembling from
other styles.
106
PF-1000
8Beat 1
Rhythm 1
Rhythm 2
Bass
Chord 1
Chord 2
Pad
Phrase 1
Phrase 2
60’s 8 Beat
Rhythm 1
Rhythm 2
Bass
Chord 1
Chord 2
8Beat 2
Rhythm 1
Rhythm 2
Bass
Chord 1
Chord 2
Pad
Phrase 1
Phrase 2
Pad
Phrase 1
Phrase 2
Rhythm 1
Rhythm 2
Bass
Chord 1
Chord 2
Pad
Phrase 1
Phrase 2
Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator
Style File Format
The Style File Format (SFF) combines all of
Yamaha’s auto accompaniment know-how into
a single unified format. By using the edit
functions, you can take full advantage of the
SFF format and freely create your own styles.
The chart at right indicates the process by
which the accompaniment is played back.
(This does not apply to the rhythm
channels.)The basic or “source” pattern in the
chart is the original style data. This source
pattern is recorded using accompaniment style
recording (see below).
As shown in the chart at right, the actual
output of the accompaniment is determined by
various parameter settings and chord changes
(played in Auto Accompaniment section of the
keyboard) entered to this source pattern.
These are the patterns
recorded to the
accompaniment styles
(page 114).
Source Pattern
1 Source Root (root note of basic chord)
2 Source Chord (type of basic chord)
Chord changes (in Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard)
This data is created by
chords played in the
Auto Accompaniment
section of the
keyboard (page 62).
Pitch Conversion
3 NTR (Note Transposition Rule)
4 NTT (Note Transposition Table)
These settings are
edited from the
PARAMETER display.
These parameters
determine how the
pitch of the source
pattern is converted
when you play chords
in the Auto
Accompaniment
section of the
keyboard (page 114).
Other Settings
5 High Key (threshold of the pitch
conversion)
6 Note Limit (soundable range)
7 RTR (Retrigger Rule; how the pitches of
the chord change)
Output
Operation
1
Select the desired accompaniment style
for editing. To record a new
accompaniment style from scratch, call
up the BASIC page in the Style Creator
display and select “New Style” by
pressing the [C] button.
3
A
B
C
D
2
DIGITAL
STUDIO
SOUND
CREATOR
E
DIGITAL
RECORDING
MIXING
CONSOLE
PART
4
Record and edit the
accompaniment style. For
details on the operations for
each display, refer to the
explanations starting on the next
page.
BACK
F
G
NEXT
Use the [BACK]/
[NEXT] buttons to
select the various
pages.
H
I
J
5
Call up the Style display by pressing the [I]
(SAVE) button (in Assembly page: [J] button),
then save the recorded / edited data to the
USER or FLOPPY DISK page.
END
Press the [EXIT] button to
close the STYLE CREATOR
display.
PF-1000
107
Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator
Realtime Recording — Basic
You can use the Realtime Recording features to create your own accompaniment style — either from scratch or based
on the preset accompaniment data. The operations here apply to step 4 on page 107.
1
Select the desired channel for recording by simultaneously holding down the [F] (REC CH) button and
pressing the appropriate [1▲▼] - [8▲▼] button.
Before recording to one of the non-rhythm channels (BASS - PHR 2), make sure to delete the existing data
of the appropriate channel. You can make other settings (see the box “Other Parameters in the BASIC
Display” on page 109) after closing the REC CHANNEL display by pressing the [EXIT] button. To call up the
REC CHANNEL display again, press the [F] (REC CH) button.
Calls up the display for changing the
tempo or beat (time signature).
Selects an empty
style, allowing you to
create a new style
from scratch.
A
B
C
D
E
Available only when the channel
is set to [RHY1] or [RHY2], this
lets you delete specific
percussion sounds during
recording. Simultaneously hold
down this button and press the
key corresponding to the
instrument you want to delete.
REC.... Channel is enabled for recording.
ON ...... Channel is enabled for playback.
OFF .... Channel is muted.
2
First, select the desired voice. Start recording by pressing the STYLE
CONTROL [START/STOP] button.
The selected section of the style starts playing back. Since the rhythm pattern
loops repeatedly, you can record new sounds and notes on each pass while
listening to the pattern. Icons above the keys conveniently indicate the
percussion instruments assigned to the keys.
3
Stop recording by pressing the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button
again.
END
108
When this button is pressed, “DELETE” will appear over
channels containing data. To delete data from a specific
channel, simultaneously hold down this button and press the
appropriate [1▲] - [8▲] button. To release or cancel the
selection, press the [1▼] [8▼] button corresponding to
the channel you wish to
F
cancel. As long as you
continue to hold down the [J]
G
button, you can toggle
H
between deleting and
restoring the selected data.
I
Releasing the [J] button
permanently deletes the
J
data. Before recording to one
of the non-rhythm channels
(BASS - PHR 2), make sure to
delete the existing data of the
appropriate channel.
PF-1000
With the REC CHANNEL display shown, close the display by pressing
the [EXIT] button.
If you’ve enabled Sync Start
(by pressing the SYNC.
START button), you can
start recording by simply
pressing a key on the keyboard.
• Only Drum Kit/SFX Kit can
be selected for the RHY 2
channel.
• For the non-rhythm channels (BASS - PHR 2), all
voices with the exception
of the Drum Kit/SFX Kit
can be selected.
Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator
Other Parameters in the BASIC Display
[I] (SAVE) button
Calls up the Style display for saving the accompaniment style data.
[3▲▼][4▲▼] (Section) buttons
Determines the section to be recorded.
[5▲▼][6▲▼] (Pattern Length) buttons
Determines the length of the selected section’s pattern in measures (1 - 32). The Fill
In/Break section is fixed at a length of one measure.
[D] (Execute) button
Executes the Pattern Length change.
You can also select the
desired section for recording
by pressing the appropriate
panel button. Pressing one
of the Section buttons calls
up the SECTION display,
from which you can change
sections by using the [6▲▼]/
[7▲▼] buttons. To actually
enter the change, press the
[8▲] button. To select the Fill
In section, press the [AUTO
FILL IN] button.
Recording — Precautions
• The basic chord used for the accompaniment style is called the source chord. All
chords that play and the pitches that sound are derived from the source chord. When
C R C
C R C
recording the Main and Fill In sections (for a source chord of CM7), keep the
C
=
chord
note
following points in mind:
C, R = recommended note
* When recording to the Bass or Phrase channels, try to use only the recommended
notes; this will ensure that you can play various chords with the accompaniment
style and get optimum results. (Other notes may work, providing you use them as short passing tones.)
* When recording to the Chord or Pad channels, use only the notes of the CM7 chord; this will ensure that
you can play various chords with the accompaniment style and get optimum results. (Other notes may work,
providing you use them as short passing tones.)
The source chord is set by default to CM7; however, you can change this to any chord you prefer. Refer to the
section “Making Style File Format Settings – Parameter” on page 114.
• When recording Intro and Ending sections, you can ignore the source chord and use any notes or chord
progressions you like. In this case, if you set the NTR parameter to “ROOT TRANSPOSE” and NTT to
“HARMONIC MINOR” or “MELODIC MINER” (in the PARAMETER page), the normal pitch conversions that
would result from playing different chords are cancelled (for playback) — meaning that the accompaniment
pitch conversion will only occur for changes in the root note or major/minor shifts.
Step Recording
With this method, you can create a style pattern by entering notes and other data individually, without having to
perform them in real time. The operations here apply to step 4 on page 107.
F
G
H
I
J
The actual recording process is the same as in Step Recording of songs (page 94), with the exception of the points described
below. You can also edit each event from the Edit page, and the editing process the same as in editing songs (page 103).
• In song recording, the end mark position can be changed freely. However, it cannot be changed when creating
accompaniment styles. This is because the length of the accompaniment style is automatically fixed according to the
selected section. For example, when creating an accompaniment style based on a four-measure section, the end mark
position is automatically set to the end of the fourth measure, and cannot be changed from the Step Record screen.
• When editing the data recorded on the Edit page, you can switch between the type of data you want to edit (event
data or control data). Press the [F] (TRACK EVT) button to switch between the Event display (Note, Control Change,
etc.) and the Control display (System Exclusive, etc.).
Make sure to set the record channel from another display (e.g., BASIC display; page 108) beforehand.
PF-1000
109
Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator
Assembling an Accompaniment Style —Assembly
This convenient function lets you combine accompaniment elements — such as rhythm, bass, and chord patterns —
from existing styles, and use them to create your own original accompaniment styles. The operations here apply to step
4 on page 107.
1
These let you select the accompaniment style that
will be used for each channel of your original
style. Select the desired channel by pressing the
[A] – [D], [F] – [I] buttons and press the same
button to call up the Style screen, from which you
can select the accompaniment style.
After repeating steps 1 and 2
as desired, press the [J] (SAVE)
button to save the assembled
style data. From here, you can
store the settings of all
channels (RHYTHM1,
RHYTHM2, BASS, etc.) to a
single accompaniment style.
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
1
2
3
Selects the style section and
channel that will be copied to
the corresponding channels,
selected with the [A]-[D] and
[F]-[I] buttons above.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
If you change the section and channel in steps
#1 and #2, the currently specified section and
channel are also changed. The channels being
recorded are also changed and recording is
stopped automatically.
The PLAY TYPE parameter affects only the
playback, and does not change the actual
accompaniment style data.
Determines the playback settings for each channel. You can
assemble the accompaniment style while the style section and
channel that will be copied are playing.
SOLO ........... Mutes all but the selected channel. RHYTHM
channels set to REC in the REC CHANNEL display
(page 108) are played back simultaneously.
ON ............... Plays back the selected channels. Any channels
set to ON in the REC CHANNEL display
(page 108) are played back simultaneously.
OFF .............. Mutes the selected channel. If the selected
channel is set to ON in the REC CHANNEL
display (page 108), OFF does not appear and is
not available.
110
PF-1000
Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator
Edit the Created Accompaniment Style
Change the Rhythmic Feel — Groove and Dynamics
These versatile features give you a wide variety of tools for changing the rhythmic feel of your created accompaniment
style. The operations here apply to step 4 on page 107.
■ Groove
Use these to select the
desired edit operation.
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
Executes the Groove operation. After
the operation is completed, this button
changes to [UNDO], letting you
restore the original data if you’re not
satisfied with the Groove results. The
Undo function only has one level; only
the previous operation can be undone.
Calls up the Style display and
lets you store the edited
accompaniment style data.
Determines the settings for each of the
Groove parameters (see the list below).
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Groove parameters
Original Beat
Specifies the beats to which Groove timing is to be applied. In other words, if “8 Beat” is selected, Groove timing is
applied to the 8th notes; if “12 Beat” is selected, Groove timing is applied to 8th-note triplets.
Beat Converter
Actually changes the timing of the beats (specified in the ORIGINAL BEAT parameter above) to the selected value. For
example, when ORIGINAL BEAT is set to “8 Beat” and BEAT CONVERTER is set to “12,” all 8th notes in the section are
shifted to 8th-note triplet timing. The “16A” and “16B” Beat Converter which appear when ORIGINAL BEAT is set to “12
Beat” are variations on a basic 16th-note setting.
Swing
Produces a “swing” feel by shifting the timing of the back beats, depending on the ORIGINAL BEAT parameter above.
For example, if the specified ORIGINAL BEAT value is “8 Beat”, the Swing parameter will selectively delay the 2nd, 4th,
6th, and 8th beats of each measure to create a swing feel. The settings “A” through “E” produce different degrees of
swing, with “A” being the most subtle and “E” being the most pronounced.
Fine
Selects a variety of Groove “templates” to be applied to the selected section. The “PUSH” settings cause certain beats to
be played early, while “HEAVY” settings delay the timing of certain beats. The numbered settings (2, 3, 4, 5) determine
which beats are to be affected. All beats up to the specified beat —but not including the first beat — will be played early
or delayed (for example, the 2nd and 3rd beats, if “3” is selected). In all cases, “A” types produce minimum effect, “B”
types produce medium effect, and “C” types produce maximum effect.
PF-1000
111
Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator
■ Dynamics
Use these to select the
desired edit operation.
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
Executes the Dynamics operation. After the
operation is completed, this button changes
to [UNDO], letting you restore the original
data if you’re not satisfied with the
Dynamics results. The Undo function only
has one level; only the previous operation
can be undone.
1
2
3
Select the desired channel to which
Dynamics is to be applied.
4
5
6
7
Calls up the Style display
and lets you store the
edited accompaniment
style data.
8
Determines the settings for each of the
Dynamics parameters (see the list below).
Dynamics parameters
Accent Type
Selects the type of accent.
Strength
Determines how strongly the selected Accent Type (above) will be applied. The
higher the value, the stronger the effect.
112
Expand/Compress
Expands or compresses the range of velocity values, around a central velocity
value “64.” Values higher than 100% expand the dynamic range, while values lower
than 100% compress it.
Boost/Cut
Boosts or cuts all velocity values in the selected section/channel. Values above
100% boost the overall velocity, while values below 100% reduce it.
PF-1000
Velocity is determined by
how strongly you play the
keyboard.
The more strongly you play
the keyboard, the higher the
velocity value and, hence,
the louder the sound.
Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator
Editing the Channel Data
In this display, there are five different channel-related edit functions, including Quantize, for editing the recorded
accompaniment style data. The operations here apply to step 4 on page 107.
See the explanations below.
Preset channel BASSPHRASE2 can not be
edited.
■ Quantize
Refer to page 100.
■ Velocity Change
Boosts or cuts the velocity of all notes in the specified channel (selected with the [1▲▼]/[2▲▼] (CHANNEL)
buttons), according to the specified percentage (selected with the [4▲▼]/[5▲▼] (BOOST/CUT) buttons).
■ Bar Copy
This function allows data to be copied from one measure or group of measures to another location within the
specified channel. Use the [4▲▼] (TOP) and [5▲▼] (LAST) buttons to specify the first and last measures in the
region to be copied. Use the [6▲▼] (DEST) button to specify the first measure of the destination location, to which
the data is to be copied.
■ Bar Clear
This function clears all data from the specified range of measures within the selected channel. Use the [4▲▼] (TOP)
and [5▲▼] (LAST) buttons to specify the first and last measures in the region to be cleared.
■ Remove Event
This function lets you remove specific events from the selected channel. Use the [4▲▼] - [6▲▼] (EVENT) buttons
to select the desired event type to be removed.
PF-1000
113
Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator
Making Style File Format Settings —Parameter
This display provides a variety of style controls— such as determining how the pitch and sound of the recorded style
change when playing the chords in the left-hand range of the keyboard. For details about the relationship between the
parameters, refer to “Style File Format” on page 107. The operations here are the same as described in step 4 on page 107.
When NTR is set to “Root
Fixed” and NTT is set to
“Bypass,” the “Source
Root” and “Source Chord”
parameters are changed to
“Play Root” and “Play
Chord,” respectively. In this
case, you can change
chords and hear the resulting sound for all channels.
See the explanations below.
■ Source Root/Chord
These settings determine the original key of the source pattern (i.e., the key used when recording the pattern). The default
setting of CM7 (with a Source Root of “C” and a Source Type of“M7”), is automatically selected whenever the preset data
is deleted prior to recording a new style, regardless of the Source Root and Chord included in the preset data. When you
change Source Root / Chord from the default CM7 to another chord, the chord notes and recommended notes will also
change, depending on the newly selected chord type. For details on chord notes and recommended notes, see page 109.
When the Source Root is C:
C6
CMaj
CM711
CM7
CM79
C9
C69
C
C R C
C R
C R C
C C R
Cm
Caug
R C R
Cm711
C
R C
C7 5
C
C
C
C C C
C
C R C R
C
R C
C
C
C
C C
C1+5
C C
C
C R
C
C
C
C
C
R
C
C C
C R C
C
C
C
C
C R
C C
C C
C C R
C
C
C
R
C
C
C = chord note
C, R = recommended
note
R C C
C R C
C
C
C79
Csus2
Csus4
C
R C
C7sus4
C713
C
C C R
C
R C
C R
R
C C C
C
C7
C
C
C R C
Cm79
C C
C79
C
C R C
C R C
R
C R
C
C R
R C
C R
R
C C C
Cm9
C
C713
C
C R C
C R
Cdim7
C
R C
C1+8
C7aug
CM7aug
C C
C
R C
Cdim
C711
C79
C R C
C
C
C
C C C
Cm75
C
R C C
CmM79
R C
C R C
Cm7
C R
C
C R
C C
C R C
C
C
CmM7
C
C R
C R C
Cm6
C R
C R C
C R C
C R
■ NTR (Note Transposition Rule) and NTT (Note Transposition Table)
• NTR (Note Transposition Rule)
This determines the system for pitch conversion of the source pattern. Two settings are available.
Root Trans (Root Transpose)
When the root note is transposed, the pitch relationship between notes is maintained. For example, the notes C3,
E3 and G3 in the key of C become F3, A3 and C4 when they are transposed to F. Use this setting for channels that
contain melody lines.
Root Fixed
The note is kept as close as possible to the previous note range. For example, the notes C3, E3 and G3 in the key
of C become C3, F3 and A3 when they are transposed to F. Use this setting for channels that contain chord parts.
114
PF-1000
Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator
• NTT (Note Transposition Table)
This sets the note transposition table for the source pattern. Six transposition types are available.
Bypass
No transposition.
Melody
Suitable for melody line transposition. Use this for melody channels such as Phrase 1 and Phrase 2.
Chord
Suitable for chord transposition. Use for the Chord 1 and Chord 2 channels, especially when they contain piano
or guitar-like chordal parts.
Bass
Suitable for bass line transposition. This table is basically similar to the Melody table above, but recognizes onbass chords allowed in the FINGERED ON BASS fingering mode. Use this primarily for bass lines.
Melodic Minor
When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this table lowers the third interval in the scale by
a semitone. When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor third interval is raised by a
semitone. Other notes are not changed.
Harmonic Minor
When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this table lowers the third and sixth intervals in
the scale by a semitone. When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor third and flatted sixth
intervals are raised by a semitone. Other notes are not changed.
■ High Key/Note Limit
• High Key
This sets the highest key (upper octave limit)
of the note transposition for the chord root
change. Any notes calculated to be higher
than the highest key are transposed down to
the octave just below the highest key. This
setting is effective only when the NTR
parameter (page 114) is set to “Root Trans.”
• Note Limit
This sets the note range (highest and lowest
notes) for voices recorded to the style
channels. By judicious setting of this range,
you can ensure that the voices sound as
realistic as possible — in other words, that no
notes outside the natural range are sounded
(e.g., high bass sounds or low piccolo
sound). The actual notes that sound are
automatically shifted to the set range.
Example — When the highest key is F
Root changes
CM
CM
Notes played
C3-E3-G3
C 3-F3-G 3
FM
F3-A3-C4
FM
F 2-A 2-C 3
Example — When the lowest note is C3 and the highest is D4
Root changes
CM
CM
FM
3-C4
E3-G3-C4
F3-G
F3-A3-C4
Notes played
High Limit
Low Limit
■ RTR (Retrigger Rule)
These settings determine whether notes stop sounding or not and how they change pitch in response to chord
changes.
Stop
The notes stop sounding.
Pitch Shift
The pitch of the note will bend without a new attack to match the type of the new chord.
Pitch Shift to Root
The pitch of the note will bend without a new attack to match the root of the new chord.
Retrigger
The note is retriggered with a new attack at a new pitch corresponding to the next chord.
Retrigger To Root
The note is retriggered with a new attack at the root note of the next chord. However, the octave of the new note
remains the same.
PF-1000
115
Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices
— Mixing Console
Set up just like a real mixing console, this display gives you comprehensive control over
the sound.
MIXING
CONSOLE
Mixing Console
This set of controls lets you
adjust the balance of the
voices and their stereo position, as well as the amount
of effect that is applied to
each voice.
LCD
CONTRAST
BACK
MENU
DEMO
HELP
A
F
B
G
C
H
NEXT
VOICE
PART
ON/OFF
LAYER
LEFT
FUNCTION
PART
DIGITAL
STUDIO
SOUND
CREATOR
D
I
E
J
MUSIC
FINDER
ENTER
DATA ENTRY
POP BALLADS DANCE
SWING & JAZZ
R&B
COUNTRY
LATIN
MARCH &
WORLD
WALTZ
BALLROOM
PIANIST
USER
EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2
STYLE
L
DIGITAL
RECORDING
TRACK1
R
REC
OTS LINK
START/STOP
TOP
REW
FF
NEW SONG
ENDING/rit.
MAIN
A
B
C
DSP
PIANO &
HARPSI.
E.PIANO
SYNC.STOP
SYNC.START
CHANNEL
ON/OFF
SONG
D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
MONO
LEFT HOLD
1
GUITAR
BASS
PIANO
WOODWIND STRINGS CHOIR & PAD
SYNTH.
XG
2
3
ONE TOUCH SETTING
8
TAP TEMPO
RESET
STYLE CONTROL
HARMONY/
ECHO
ORGAN &
ACCORDION PERCUSSION
EXIT
PART
SYNC.START
START/STOP
VARIATION
VOICE EFFECT
BALANCE
REPEAT
DIRECT
ACCESS
INTRO
REVERB
MIXING
CONSOLE
STYLE
AUTO FILL IN
BRASS
RESET
TEMPO
TRANSPOSE
PART
USER
FREEZE
1
2
VOICE
You can call up additional basic mixing controls by using the [BALANCE] button and the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button
(page 61).
Operation
1
MIXING
CONSOLE
PART
From the MIXING CONSOLE display, press the button
repeatedly until the desired display is called up. Each press of the
button switches among the displays listed below.
PANEL PART
Includes the keyboard-played parts (Main/
Layer, Left), accompaniment parts, song,
microphone input
STYLE PART
Accompaniment parts
SONG CH 1 - 8
Channels 1 - 8 of song playback
SONG CH 9 -16
Channels 9 - 16 of song playback
2
Select the other Mixing Console pages by using the [BACK]/
[NEXT] buttons and set the desired parameters.
For information on the various parameters and settings and how
to use them, refer to the explanations starting on page 117.
You can quickly and easily
set all parts to the same
value for the same parameter (except for the VOICE
parameter). Simultaneously hold down the [A] [J] button that corresponds
to the parameter you want
to change and use the [1] [8] buttons or the [DATA
ENTRY] dial to change the
value.
n
For details on parameters
related to the Sound Creator, see page 86.
END
Close the Mixing
Console display by
pressing the [EXIT]
button.
■ About the parameters
• VOL/VOICE (Volume/Voice) (page 117)
This contains settings related to the volume and voice of each part/channel. Here you can also enable the Auto
Revoice feature — which automatically plays XG-compatible songs (page 149) with the rich and dynamic voices
that are exclusive to the PF-1000. This gives you much more authentic and realistic instrument sounds for your song
playback.
• FILTER (page 118)
These controls affect the tone quality of the voice, letting you add power, punch, or brightness to the sound.
• TUNE (page 118)
These give you various tuning controls.
• EFFECT (page 119)
These control the amount of effect applied to the sound.
116
PF-1000
Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices — Mixing Console
Setting the Level Balance and Voice — Volume/Voice
The operations for this page apply to step 2 of the procedure on page 116.
1
Set this to ON to enable automatic replacement of
the XG voices (in XG song data) with the special
voices of the PF-1000. To use the normal XG voice
set, turn this off.
Use these to select the
VOICE, PANPOT, or
VOLUME parameter rows.
Each press of this
button switches
among the various
parts/channels.
DIGITAL
STUDIO
SOUND
CREATOR
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
Allows you to select
the specific voice to
be replaced.
DIGITAL
RECORDING
MIXING
CONSOLE
BALANCE
PART
CHANNEL
ON/OFF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PART
When playing GM song data,
channel 10 (in the SONG
CH 9 - 16 page) can only be
used for a Drum Kit voice.
When changing the rhythm/
percussion voices (drum
kits, etc.) of the accompaniment style and song from
the VOICE parameter, the
detailed settings related to
the drum voice are reset,
and in some cases you may
be unable to restore the
original sound. In the case
of song playback, you can
restore the original sound
by returning to the beginning of the song and playing
back from that point. In the
case of accompaniment
style play, you can restore
the original sound by selecting the same style again.
These let you select the voice of each part, and adjust the panpot and volume.
VOICE
Calls up the VOICE display, from which you can select the desired voice (page 54). When
the Style/Song part is selected, User voices cannot be selected.
PANPOT Determines the stereo position of the selected voice or track. A setting of 0 pans the sound
hard left, while 64 is at center, and 127 is at hard right.
VOLUME Determines the level of each channel, giving you fine control over the balance of all the
parts.
ALL REVOICE
Replaces all of the replaceable XG voices with the
rich and authentic voices of the PF-1000.
2
F
G
PIANO REVOICE
Replaces only the piano
voices.
H
I
J
PIANO and BASIC can be
called up simultaneously.
Keep in mind that using the
Revoice function may result
in unnatural or unexpected
sound, depending on the
particular song data.
BASIC REVOICE
Replaces only the
recommended voices that
are suitable for playing
back the song.
ALL NO REVOICE
All the voices are returned
to the original XG voices.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Executes the settings and closes the
Auto Revoice Setup display.
Selects the XG voices
to be replaced (voices
usually used when
playing back)
Selects the voices used to
replace the XG voices (when
SONG AUTO REVOICE is
set to ON).
Closes the Auto Revoice
Setup screen without
executing the settings.
PF-1000
117
Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices — Mixing Console
Changing the Tone of the Voice — Filter
The operations for this page apply to step 2 of the procedure on page 116.
Switches between the HARMONIC and BRIGHTNESS parameters.
Each press of this
button switches among
the various parts/
channels.
DIGITAL
STUDIO
SOUND
CREATOR
For details about the Filter,
see page 88.
n
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
When a Natural voice is
selected, Harmonic and
Brightness cannot be
changed.
n
Be careful with these controls. Depending on the
selected voice, extreme settings may result in noise or
distortion.
DIGITAL
RECORDING
MIXING
CONSOLE
BALANCE
PART
CHANNEL
ON/OFF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
HARMONIC .........Allows you to adjust the resonance effect
(see “Harmonic Content” on page 88).
BRIGHTNESS .....Determines the brightness of the sound by
adjusting the cutoff frequency (page 88).
PART
Changing Pitch-related Settings — Tune
The operations for this page apply to step 2 of the procedure on page 116.
Switches among the available parameters: PORTAMENTO
TIME, PITCH BEND RANGE, OCTAVE, and TUNING.
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
Portamento is used to create a smooth transition in
pitch from one note to the
next.
When a Natural voice is
selected, Portamento Time
cannot be changed.
Refer to the explanation below.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
These increase/decrease (transpose) the pitch in semitone units.
MASTER... Transposes both the pitch of the keyboard and that of the song playback.
SONG ....... Transposes the pitch of the song playback.
KBD .......... Transposes the pitch of the keyboard.
PORTAMENTO TIME ............When the part is set to Mono (page 58, 87), this determines the Portamento time. The
higher the value, the longer the time it takes for the pitch to change. Portamento is only
applied when you play legato (playing the next note before releasing the previous one).
PITCH BEND RANGE ...........When the Pitch Bend or Glide effect is assigned to the pedal, this determines the range of
the pitch change in semitones.
OCTAVE................................Determines the range of the pitch change in octaves, over two octaves up or down.
TUNING...............................Determines the pitch of the instrument.
118
PF-1000
Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices — Mixing Console
Adjusting the Effects
The operations for this page apply to step 2 of the procedure on page 116.
1
Each press of this
button switches among
the various parts/
channels.
DIGITAL
STUDIO
SOUND
CREATOR
Indicates the type name for
each effect block.
Press this to edit and store
the effect (page 119, 120).
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
There are three effect sections: Reverb, Chorus, and
DSP (which contains a variety of effect types). These
are available independently
for the Natural voices and
Regular voices. For details,
refer to the Effect Block list
(page 120).
DIGITAL
RECORDING
MIXING
CONSOLE
BALANCE
PART
CHANNEL
ON/OFF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Switches among the
effect sections:
REVERB, CHORUS,
and DSP.
PART
Determines the amount of effect that is applied to each part. For more information about the
characteristics of each effect, see the Effect Block list on page 120.
When the BLOCK parameter is set to REVERB1, CHORUS1, or
DSP1, press this to call up the display from which you can change the
detailed settings for the effects.
2
F
G
H
I
J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
These determine the effect block and let you assign the effect.
BLOCK............ Determines the effect block (group of similar or related effects).
PART ............... Determines the part to which the Insertion effect is applied. It is effective only
when the block is set to “DSP1” and the CONNECTION parameter is set to
“Insertion” (page 120).
CATEGORY..... The various effect programs (in Type below) are grouped into categories. This
parameter may not be available depending on the selected block.
TYPE ............... Determines the type of effect that is assigned to the selected effect block. The
actual effect types that are available may differ depending on the selected block.
PF-1000
119
Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices — Mixing Console
3
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
Calls up the
display for storing
the effect.
This parameter cannot be
set when BLOCK is set to
“REVERB2,” “CHORUS2,”
or “DSP2” (or “BRILLIANCE”).
Determines the level of the
effect (return level). This is
not available when BLOCK
is set to “DSP1,”
PARAMETER is set to
“CONNECTION,” and
VALUE is set to “Insertion.”
Switches between
the upper/lower
parameters. For the
lower parameter, the
depth can be
changed when the
[VARIATION] button
is on.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Determines the value of
the selected parameter.
Determines the effect parameter to be adjusted.
Determines the effect block.
Determines the effect category.
Determines the effect type.
4
F
Calls up the display
for naming the User
Effect (page 45).
G
Keep in mind that in some
cases noise may result if
you adjust the effect parameters while playing the
instrument.
H
I
J
Select the
destination to
which the effect is
to be stored. The
number of memory
spaces available
for the destination
differs for each
block (refer to the
chart below).
Stores the effect settings you
made above to a User Effect
location (SYSTEM) for future
recall. To call up the effect, select
USER from the CATEGORY
parameter and select the desired
effect from the TYPE parameter.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Effect Block
120
Block
Parts
REVERB 1
(for Regular Voices)
All parts
REVERB 2
(for Natural Voices)
All parts except microphone (MIC)
CHORUS 1
(for Regular Voices)
All parts
CHORUS 2
(for Natural Voices)
All parts except microphone (MIC)
DSP 1
(for Regular Voices)
Main, Layer, Left, Song (Ch. 1 - 16),
MIC
DSP 2
(for Natural Voices)
All parts except microphone (MIC)
BRILLIANCE
(for Natural Voices)
All parts except microphone (MIC)
PF-1000
Characteristics
Reproduces the warm ambience of playing in
a concert hall or jazz club.
Produces a rich “fat” sound as if several parts
are being played simultaneously.
In addition to reverb and chorus effects, this
section features a variety of special effects,
including distortion.
Changes the brightness and clarity of the
sound.
Number of User Effect
3
—
3
—
3
—
—
Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices — Mixing Console
Effect Structure
The PF-1000 features the following digital effect systems, which can be applied independently for the Natural voices
(page 86) and the Regular voices (page 86). The effect type, depth, and various parameters can be set with the panel
controls.
• Reverb .......... Normally the settings that fit the selected style are called up. For most of the Natural voices, settings
that fit the voice are called up.
• Chorus.......... Normally the settings that fit the selected style are called up. For most of the Natural voices, settings
that fit the voice are called up.
• DSP .............. Normally the settings which fit the selected voice are called up. Variation (settings in which the
expression of the effect is changed) is prepared for each type, and it can be turned ON/OFF by the
[VARIATION] button on the panel.
When the Natural voice is selected, the [VARIATION] button does not work.
The illustration below shows how the various effect blocks are set up and traces the signal flow for the send/return
controls set on the PF-1000.
For Regular Voices (REVERB1, CHORUS1, DSP1)
For Natural Voices (REVERB2, CHORUS2, DSP2)
When DSP is set as an Insertion effect
(here, PART is set to MAIN),
it is put here in the signal flow.
(For Natural voices,
DSP can only be used
as a System effect.)
Dry
MAIN VOICE
DSP
DRY LINE
Reverb
Return
REVERB
Rev Send
Cho Send
DSP Send
Dry
LAYER VOICE
Rev Send
Cho Send
DSP Send
Chorus
Return
CHORUS
Dry
LEFT VOICE
BRILLIANCE
OUT
(Natural Voices only)
Rev Send
Cho Send
DSP Send
Dry
MIC
Rev Send
Cho Send
DSP Send
Dry
STYLE/SONG
(each channel)
Rev Send
Cho Send
DSP
Return
DSP Send
DSP
When DSP is set as a System effect,
it is put here in the signal flow.
(For Natural voices, DSP can only
be used as a System effect.)
PF-1000
121
Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function
The Function mode gives you access to various advanced functions related to the instrument as a whole. These
sophisticated functions let you customize the PF-1000 to your own musical needs and preferences.
LCD
CONTRAST
BACK
FUNCTION
MENU
DEMO
HELP
A
F
B
G
C
H
NEXT
VOICE
PART
ON/OFF
LAYER
LEFT
FUNCTION
DIGITAL
STUDIO
SOUND
CREATOR
D
I
E
J
MUSIC
FINDER
ENTER
DATA ENTRY
FADE IN/OUT
POP & ROCK POP BALLADS DANCE
SWING & JAZZ
R&B
COUNTRY
LATIN
MARCH &
WORLD
WALTZ
BALLROOM
PIANIST
USER
EXTRA TRACKS TRACK2
STYLE
L
DIGITAL
RECORDING
TRACK1
R
AUTO FILL IN
REC
OTS LINK
START/STOP
TOP
REW
FF
BREAK
MAX
MASTER VOLUME
START/STOP
INTRO
ENDING/rit.
MAIN
A
B
C
E.PIANO
SYNC.STOP
SYNC.START
CHANNEL
ON/OFF
SONG
START/STOP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
BRASS
RESET
TEMPO
HARMONY/
ECHO
MONO
LEFT HOLD
1
ORGAN &
ACCORDION PERCUSSION
GUITAR
BASS
PIANO
WOODWIND STRINGS CHOIR & PAD
SYNTH.
XG
2
3
4
ONE TOUCH SETTING
8
TAP TEMPO
RESET
VARIATION
EXIT
PART
SYNC.START
D
STYLE CONTROL
METRONOME
DSP
PIANO &
HARPSI.
VOICE EFFECT
BALANCE
REPEAT
DIRECT
ACCESS
NEW SONG
MIN
REVERB
MIXING
CONSOLE
STYLE
ACMP
PART
TRANSPOSE
VOICE
USER
FREEZE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
MEMORY
REGISTRATION MEMORY
Operation
1
MENU
DEMO
2
Select the desired function.
HELP
FUNCTION
END
To return to the previous
display, press the [EXIT]
button.
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
3
Set the parameters of the selected function.
The operations for each function are covered in the
following explanations.
Adjusting the Pitch and Tuning — Master Tune and Scale Tune
■ Master Tune (page 124)
This allows you to make fine adjustments to the overall pitch of the instrument — letting you accurately match the
tuning with that of other instruments.
■ Scale Tune (page 124)
This determines the particular tuning system (or temperament) for the instrument. This is especially useful for playing
period pieces, to match the tuning system used during specific musical eras.
Setting Song-related Parameters — Song Settings (page 126)
These allow you to set parameters related to song playback.
Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters — Style Setting, Split Point, and Chord
Fingering
■ Style Setting / Split Point (page 127)
These determine the auto accompaniment-related settings, and let you set the split point.
■ Chord Fingering (page 128)
This determines the method for playing/indicating chords when using the auto accompaniment features. You can
even check how to play the chord, since the individual notes are indicated in the display.
122
PF-1000
Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function
Making Settings for the Pedals and
Keyboard — Controller
■ Pedal (page 128)
These settings determine how the connected pedals
(including foot controllers and footswitches) are used.
They can be assigned to a variety of functions, letting
you control operations with your feet — such as
turning the accompaniment style on/off, or triggering
Fill In patterns.
■ Keyboard / Panel (page 130)
These settings determine the touch sensitivity of the
keyboard (how touch affects volume), and let you
independently transpose the keyboard, song data,
and the entire instrument.
Setting the Registration Sequence, Freeze,
and Voice Set
■ Registration Sequence (page 131)
This determines the order in which the Registration
Memory presets (1 - 8) are called up — by using the
[BACK][NEXT] buttons or the pedal.
■ Freeze (page 131)
This lets you specify the settings you want to be
maintained or left unchanged, even when changing
Registration Memory presets.
■ Voice Set (page 132)
This lets you determine whether certain voice-related
settings (such as Effects, EQ, Harmony, etc.) are
automatically called up or not when you select a
voice.
Setting Harmony and Echo (page 132)
These let you set the type of Harmony or Echo effect
applied to the keyboard-played voices, as well as the
amount of effect.
Showing the PF-1000 Display on a TV —
Video Out (page 133)
These settings determine the display characteristics when
outputting the PF-1000’s display contents to a TV
monitor (connected to the VIDEO OUT terminal). You
can set the size and color of the displayed characters, as
well as the color of the display background.
Making MIDI Settings
■ System (page 134)
These determine various system messages settings
(such as Clock, Start/Stop, System Exclusive), as well
as Local Control on/off.
■ Transmit (page 135)
This determines how playback data is sent to
connected MIDI devices — i.e., which parts are
assigned to which MIDI Transmit channels. This also
lets you specify the type of data to be transmitted over
each channel.
■ Receive (page 136)
This determines how the parts of the PF-1000 respond
to data from connected MIDI devices — i.e., which
parts are assigned to which MIDI Receive channels.
This also lets you specify the type of data to be
received over each channel.
■ Root (page 136)
This determines the channel(s) recognized for the root
notes, for use with the auto accompaniment.
■ Chord Detect (page 136)
This determines the channel(s) recognized for the
chords, for use with the auto accompaniment.
Other Settings — Utility
■ Config 1 (page 137)
This page contains settings for Fade In/Out,
Metronome, Parameter Lock, and the Tap sound.
■ Config 2 (page 138)
From this page, you can adjust the display, make
speaker settings, and change the voice number
indication.
■ Disk (page 139)
From this page, you can format disks, and copy from
disk to disk.
■ Owner (page 140)
From this page, you can set the language of the
instrument, and input your own name — which is
shown automatically every time the power is turned
on.
■ System Reset (page 140)
This function restores the PF-1000 to its original
factory settings. You can also specify which types of
settings are to be restored, as well as store your own
original settings for future recall.
PF-1000
123
Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function
Fine Tuning the Pitch/Selecting a Scale — Master Tune/Scale Tune
The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 122.
Tuning the Overall Pitch — Master Tune
Hz (Hertz)
This unit of measurement
refers to the frequency of a
sound, and represents the
number of times a sound
wave vibrates in a second.
n
The Tune function does not
affect the Drum Kit or SFX
Kit voices.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Determines the overall
pitch of the PF-1000, from
414.8 - 466.8 Hz. Press the
4 or 5 [▲▼] buttons
simultaneously to instantly
reset the value to the
factory setting of 440.0 Hz.
8
Selecting a Scale — Scale Tune
Cent
A unit of pitch equal to 1/100
of a semitone (100 cents = 1
semitone).
n
Selects which parts
should be affected by the
scale setting. Select the
part to be set by pressing
6 or 7 [▲/▼] and set the
function ON or OFF by
pressing [8▲/▼].
You can register your original
scale tunings to a REGISTRATION MEMORY button.
To do this, checkmark
“SCALE” in the REGISTRATION MEMORY display
(page 82).
Determines the Scale
(page 125).
1
Determines the base note for
each scale.
When the base note is changed,
the pitch of the keyboard is
transposed, yet maintains the
original pitch relationship
between the notes.
124
PF-1000
2
3
4
5
6
7
Selects the note to be tuned.
8
Adjusts the scale tuning of the selected note.
[4▲/▼] : in 50-cent steps
[5▲/▼] : in 1-cent steps (–64 through +63)
Press the 4 or 5 [▲/▼] buttons simultaneously to
instantly reset the value to the factory setting.
When you adjust the scale tuning, the scale template
name shown at the top of the display will change to
“EDITED SCALE” indicating some adjustment has
been done from the preset scale template.
Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function
Scale
■ Equal Temperament
The pitch range of each octave is divided equally into twelve parts, with each half-step evenly spaced in pitch. This
is the most commonly used tuning in music today.
■ Pure Major/Pure Minor
These tunings preserve the pure mathematical intervals of each scale, especially for triad chords (root, third, fifth).
You can hear this best in actual vocal harmonies — such as choirs and acapella singing.
■ Pythagorean
This scale was devised by the famous Greek philosopher and is created from a series of perfect fifths, which are
collapsed into a single octave. The 3rd in this tuning are slightly unstable, but the 4th and 5th are beautiful and
suitable for some leads.
■ Mean-Tone
This scale was created as an improvement on the Pythagorean scale, by making the major third interval more “in
tune.” It was especially popular from the 16th century to the 18th century. Handel, among others, used this scale.
■ Werckmeister/Kirnberger
This composite scale combines the Werckmeister and Kirnberger systems, which were themselves improvements on
the mean-tone and Pythagorean scales. The main feature of this scale is that each key has its own unique character.
The scale was used extensively during the time of Bach and Beethoven, and even now it is often used when
performing period music on the harpsichord.
■ Arabic
Use these tunings when playing Arabic music.
Pitch settings for each scale (in cents; example scale of C)
The values shown in this chart are actually rounded off to the nearest whole number for use on the instrument.
C
C
D
E
E
F
F
G
A
A
B
B
Equal Temperament
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Pure Major
0.0
-29.7
3.9
15.6
-14.1
-2.3
-9.4
2.3
-27.3
-15.6
18.0
-11.7
Pure Minor
0.0
33.6
3.9
15.6
-14.1
-2.3
31.3
2.3
14.1
-15.6
18.0
-11.7
Pythagorean
0.0
14.1
3.9
-6.3
7.8
-2.3
11.7
2.3
15.6
6.3
-3.9
10.2
Mean-Tone
0.0
-24.2
-7.0
10.2
-14.1
3.1
-20.3
-3.1
-27.3
-10.2
7.0
-17.2
Werckmeister
0.0
-10.2
-7.8
-6.3
-10.2
-2.3
-11.7
-3.9
-7.8
-11.7
-3.9
-7.8
Kirnberger
0.0
-10.2
-7.0
-6.3
-14.1
-2.3
-10.2
-3.1
-7.8
-10.2
-3.9
-11.7
Arabic1
0.0
0
-50.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
-50.0
0.0
0.0
Arabic2
0.0
0
0.0
0.0
-50.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
-50.0
PF-1000
125
Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function
Setting Song-related Parameters — Song Settings
The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 122.
Allows you to play back all songs
from the same folder continuously.
Turns Quick Start on/off (see note).
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
Quick Start
On some commercially available song data, certain settings related to the song
(such as voice selection, volume, etc.) are recorded to
the first measure, before the
actual note data. When
Quick Start is set to “ON,”
the PF-1000 reads all initial
non-note data of the song at
the highest possible speed,
then automatically slows
down to the appropriate
tempo at the first note. This
allows you to start playback
as quickly as possible, with a
minimum pause for reading
of data.
n
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Channel
Refers to the MIDI channel
(page 147). The channels
are assigned as follows:
Song
1 - 16
Accompaniment Style
9 - 16
n
Determines the MIDI channel assigned
to the [TRACK2] button.
Determines the MIDI channel assigned
to the [TRACK1] button.
Determines whether the Phrase
Mark Repeat function for the song is
on or off. When this is on, you can
repeatedly play back a specified
phrase (selection of measures) of
the song. The method for specifying
a phrase mark is the same as that in
the SONG POSITION display
(page 76).
Determines the language of the
displayed lyrics.
When this is set to “AUTO,” the
language defaults to that of the
song data. When not set to “AUTO,”
the language defaults to Japanese,
when the internal setting
(page 140) is “JAPANESE”; for all
other languages, this is set to
“INTERNATIONAL.”
When set to “ON,” this automatically sets
the proper Track 1 and Track 2 channels.
Normally, this should be set to “ON.”
126
PF-1000
Phrase Mark
This data specifies a certain
location in the song data.
Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function
Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters —
Style Setting, Split Point, and Chord Fingering
The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 122.
Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters — Style Setting
and Split Point
F
G
H
I
J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
These select the part to which the split point
About Section Set
setting is applied: accompaniment, left-hand
range, or both. Press the desired key for the split When any of the Main A-D
sections is not included in
point while holding down one of these buttons.
The pressed key is included in the range for the the accompaniment style
data, the nearest section is
Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard
automatically selected. For
(ACMP) or the left-hand range (LEFT).
example, when Main D is not
A+L (ACMP + LEFT)
contained in the selected
Allows you to simultaneously set the split
accompaniment style, Main
point for both the left-hand range and the
C will be called up.
Auto Accompaniment section of the
keyboard.
L (LEFT)
Allows you to set the split point for the left-hand range of the keyboard.
A (ACMP)
Allows you to set the split point for the Auto Accompaniment section of the
keyboard.
Determines the split points for the auto accompaniment (ACMP) and the lefthand range (LEFT). The same value can be set for both or for each
independently, using buttons [F], [G], and [H] (see above). You can use these
buttons by themselves to set the split point value.
Determines the default section that is automatically called up when selecting
different accompaniment styles (when accompaniment is stopped).
Turns touch response for the accompaniment on/off. When this is set to “ON,”
the accompaniment volume changes in response to your playing strength (in
the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard).
The PF-1000 lets you automatically enable Sync Stop (page 65) simply by
quickly pressing/releasing keys in the Auto Accompaniment section of the
keyboard. This parameter lets you set the length of the key-hold time.
This applies to the OTS Link function, in which One Touch Settings are automatically called up
with changes in the section. This determines the timing in which the One Touch Settings change
with the section. (The [OTS LINK] button must be on.)
Real Time
One Touch Setting is immediately called up when you press a section button.
Next Bar
One Touch Setting is called up at the next measure, after you press a section button.
Split point can be set in the
MAIN display.
Turns the Stop Accompaniment (ACMP) function on/off. When this is set to “ON,”
you can play the chord and bass sounds of the accompaniment by playing chords
— even when the accompaniment style is not playing back.
About Split Point
Split point is the position on keyboard that separates the Auto
Accompaniment section (ACMP) and left-hand section (LEFT) from the
right-hand section (MAIN). The LEFT split point cannot be set lower than
the ACMP split point, and the ACMP split point cannot be set higher than
the LEFT split point.
Split point (A)
Auto
Accompaniment
section
Split point (L)
Right-hand
Left-hand
section
section
Split point (A) + (L)
Auto Accompaniment section
+ Left-hand section
Right-hand
section
PF-1000
127
Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function
Setting the Fingering Method — Chord Fingering
This determines how the notes you play on the keyboard indicate or play the chords of the accompaniment. To learn
how to play certain chords, use the convenient Chord Tutor function (see note below).
The chord indication in the
display applies to the Fingered method, regardless if
another method is actually
selected.
Indicates the note that
belongs to a chord. Some
notes can be omitted. The
chord name is indicated
next to “CHORD NAME.”
...Required
...Can be omitted
...Either note can be
omitted
...Can be omitted when
the note indicated by
is omitted
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Chord Tutor
The Chord Tutor feature is
essentially an electronic
“chord book” that shows you
appropriate fingerings for
chords; it is useful when you
want to play certain chords.
Simply specify the desired
chord via the [6▲▼] - [8▲▼]
buttons, and the fingerings
for the Fingered method are
indicated in the display.
8
Determines the fingering
type (page 62).
This lets you change the
chord type.
Indicates the note that belongs to a
chord in the music.
This lets you change the root
note from the chord.
Making Settings for the Pedals and Keyboard — Controller
The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 122.
Making Settings for the Pedals
Determines the particular
pedal to which a function is
to be assigned.
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
1
2
Determines the function to be assigned to the
selected pedal. Any one of the available functions
can be assigned to each pedal.
For information on the assignable functions, see
“Pedal-controllable Functions” on page 129.
128
PF-1000
3
4
5
6
7
8
If necessary, you can turn
the corresponding part ON/
OFF or set the control depth
(see the next page).
Pedal on/off operation may
differ depending on the
particular pedal you’ve
connected to the [AUX
PEDAL] jack. For example,
pressing down on one pedal
may turn the selected
function on, while pressing
a different make/brand of
pedal may turn the function
off. If necessary, use this
setting to reverse the
operation.
Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function
Pedal-controllable Functions
VOLUME*
Allows you to use a foot controller (AUX pedal only) to control the volume.
SUSTAIN
When the pedal is pressed notes played have a long sustain. Releasing the pedal immediately stops (damps) any
sustained notes.
SOSTENUTO
If you press and hold the pedal here, only the first note will be sustained (the note that you played and held when pressing
the pedal). This makes it possible to sustain a chord, for example, while other notes are played staccato.
SOFT
Pressing the pedal subtly reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of notes played. It only applies to certain
voices — PIANO, for example.
GLIDE
When the pedal is pressed the pitch changes, and then back to normal pitch when the pedal is released.
PORTAMENTO
The portamento effect (a smooth slide between notes) can be produced while the pedal is pressed. Portamento is
produced when notes are played legato style (i.e., a note is played while the preceding note is still held). The portamento
time can be set via the Mixing Console display (page 118). It does not work for Natural voices.
PITCHBEND*
Bend notes up or down while pedal is pressed.
MODULATION*
Applies a vibrato effect to notes played on the keyboard. The depth of the effect increases while pedal is pressed. This
does not work for the Natural voices.
DSP VARIATION
Same as the [VARIATION] button. This does not work for the Natural voices.
VIBROTOR ON/OFF
Turns the “VibRotor” effect type (page 119) on and off. This only works for the Natural voices.
HARMONY/ECHO
Same as the [HARMONY/ECHO] button.
SCORE PAGE+
While the song is stopped, you can turn to the previous score page (one page only).
SCORE PAGE-
While the song is stopped, you can turn to the next score page (one page only).
SONG START/STOP
Same as the SONG [START/STOP] button.
STYLE START/STOP
Same as the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button.
TAP TEMPO
Same as the [TAP TEMPO] button.
SYNCRO START
Same as the [SYNC. START] button.
SYNCRO STOP
Same as the [SYNC. STOP] button.
INTRO
Same as the [INTRO] button.
MAIN A
Same as the [MAIN A] button.
MAIN B
Same as the [MAIN B] button.
MAIN C
Same as the [MAIN C] button.
MAIN D
Same as the [MAIN D] button.
FILL DOWN
A fill-in plays, automatically followed by the Main section of the button on the immediate left.
FILL SELF
Fill-in starts playing.
BREAK
Break starts playing.
FILL UP
A fill-in plays, automatically followed by the Main section of the button on the immediate right.
ENDING
Same as the [ENDING/rit.] button.
FADE IN/OUT
Same as the [FADE IN/OUT] button.
FING/ON BASS
The pedal alternately switches between the Fingered and On Bass modes (page 62).
BASS HOLD
While the pedal is pressed, the Accompaniment Style bass note will be held even if the chord is changed. If the fingering
is set to “FULL KEYBOARD,” the function does not work.
PERCUSSION
The pedal plays a percussion instrument selected by the [4▲▼] - [8▲▼] buttons. You can use the keyboard to select the
desired percussion instrument.
LAYER ON/OFF
Same as the [LAYER] button.
LEFT ON/OFF
Same as the [LEFT] button.
OTS+
Calls up the next One Touch Setting.
OTS-
Calls up the previous One Touch Setting.
* For best results, use the optional Yamaha FC7 Foot Controller.
The parameters below correspond to buttons [2▲▼] - [8▲▼], and their availability depends on the selected control Type. For example, if
SUSTAIN is selected as the Type, the parameters “HALF PEDAL POINT”, “MAIN”, “LAYER” and “LEFT” automatically appear in the display.
SONG, STYLE, MIC, LEFT,
LAYER, MAIN
These specify the part(s) that will be affected by the pedal.
HALF PEDAL POINT*
You can specify how far down you should press on the right pedal until the damper effect (page 58) starts working.
DEPTH
Determines the depth of the left pedal effect, when SOFT is selected. This only works for the Natural voices.
UP/DOWN
When GLIDE or PITCH BEND is selected, this determines whether the pitch change goes up (is raised) or down (is lowered).
RANGE
When GLIDE or PITCH BEND is selected, this determines the range of the pitch change, in semitones.
ON SPEED
When GLIDE is selected, this determines the speed of the pitch change, when the pedal is pressed.
OFF SPEED
When GLIDE is selected, this determines the speed of the pitch change, when the pedal is released.
KIT
When PERCUSSION is assigned to the pedal, all available drum kits are shown here, letting you select the particular
drum kit used for the pedal.
PERCUSSION
When PERCUSSION is assigned to the pedal, all sounds of the selected drum kit (in KIT above) are shown here. This
determines the particular instrument sound assigned to the pedal.
* For best results, use the optional Yamaha FC7 Foot Controller.
PF-1000
129
Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function
Changing the Touch Sensitivity and Transpose — Keyboard/Panel
Keyboard Touch
The Touch feature lets you control the volume of the voices by your playing strength. These settings allow you to
customize the keyboard’s touch response (sensitivity) to your personal playing preferences.
HARD 2
Requires strong playing to produce
high volume. Best for players with a
heavy touch.
HARD 1
Requires moderately strong playing for
higher volume.
A
B
C
NORMAL Standard touch response.
D
SOFT 1
Produces high volume with moderate
playing strength.
SOFT 2
Produces relatively high volume even
with light playing strength. Best for
players with a light touch.
E
Determines the fixed volume
level when Touch is set to “OFF.”
Determines the Touch sensitivity
setting (refer to the table at right).
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
The TOUCH setting affects all voices globally. Keep
in mind that you can set each voice to a different
touch sensitivity (TOUCH SENSE). For example, to
play a pipe organ voice most authentically, you can
set this so that the voice is not affected by touch
(page 87).
Determines whether touch is on or not for the corresponding parts.
Transpose Assign
This determines which aspect of the instrument is affected by the [TRANSPOSE] button.
Transpose
Allows you to shift the pitch of the keyboard-played voices,
accompaniment style playback, and song data in semitone
units.
1
Press one of the [TRANSPOSE] buttons.
RESET
TRANSPOSE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SONG
For this setting, Transpose affects only the pitch of
the songs.
MASTER
For this setting, Transpose affects the pitch of the
entire instrument (keyboard voices,
accompaniment styles, and songs).
The transpose function
does not affect the Drum
Kit or SFX Kit voices.
PF-1000
A TRANSPOSE pop-up window, selected via
TRANSPOSE ASSIGN, appears.
3
Adjust the value by using the [TRANSPOSE] buttons.
8
KEYBOARD
For this setting, Transpose affects the pitch of the
keyboard-played voices (Main, Layer, and Left) and
the accompaniment styles.
130
2
END
Close the TRANSPOSE windows by pressing the
[EXIT] button.
• Selectively Transposing Keyboard/Song
These settings can be used to match both the song and your
keyboard performance to a certain key. For example, let’s say
you wish to play and sing along with a certain recorded song.
The song data is in F, but you feel most comfortable singing in
D, and you are accustomed to playing the keyboard part in C.
To match up the keys, keep the Master Transpose setting at
“0,” set the Keyboard Transpose to “2,” and set Song Transpose
to “-3.” This brings the keyboard part up in pitch and the song
data down to your comfortable singing key.
Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function
Setting the Registration Sequence, Freeze, and Voice Set
The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 122.
Specifying the Order for Calling Up Registration Memory Presets —
Registration Sequence
You can save your custom panel settings to the Registration Memory presets, and call them up by pressing the
appropriate REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons [1] - [8]. The convenient Registration Sequence function lets you call up
the presets in any order you specify, by simply using the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons or the pedal as you play.
Indicates the file name of the selected
Registration Memory bank.
Determines which pedal is used to advance
(increment) through the sequence.
Determines which
pedal is used to
reverse (decrement)
through the
sequence.
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
n
E
J
When both “Regist (+)
Pedal” and “Regist (-) Pedal”
are set to “OFF,” the pedals
cannot be used to step
through the Registration
Sequence; only the [BACK]/
[NEXT] buttons can be used
in the MAIN display.
Determines how Registration
Sequence behaves when
reaching the end of the
sequence.
Stop
Pressing the [NEXT] button or
the “advance” pedal has no
effect. The sequence is
“stopped.”
Top
The sequence starts again at
the beginning.
Next Bank
The sequence automatically
moves to the beginning of the
next Registration Memory bank
in the same folder.
1
2
3
4
5
6
These move the cursor position in the sequence.
7
8
Turns the Registration
Sequence function
on/off. When this is
set to “ON,” the
programmed
Registration
Sequence is shown at
the top right of the
Main display, and you
can step through the
sequence in this
display by using the
[BACK]/[NEXT]
buttons or the pedals.
n
When both “Regist (+)
Pedal” and “Regist (-) Pedal”
are set to the same pedal,
“Regist (+) Pedal” takes
priority.
Deletes all Registration
Memory numbers in the
sequence.
Deletes the number at the
cursor position.
Indicates the Registration Memory preset
numbers, in the order of the current
Registration Sequence.
Inserts the number of the currently
selected Registration Memory preset
immediately before the cursor position.
Replaces the number at the cursor position with the
currently selected Registration Memory number.
END
Setting Registration
Sequence Enable to “ON”
overrides any other Pedal
settings (for pedals assigned
to “Regist (+) Pedal” and
“Regist (-) Pedal” here).
These include the pedal settings on page 128, and in
Voice Set on page 132.
Execute the settings by pressing the [EXIT] button.
Registration Sequence data
is included as part of the
Registration Memory bank
file. To save your newly programmed Registration
Sequence, store the current
Registration Memory bank
file (page 38, 44). Any Registration Sequence data is
lost when changing Registration Memory banks,
unless you’ve stored it with
the Registration Memory
bank file.
Maintaining Panel Settings — Freeze
This lets you specify the settings you want to be maintained or left unchanged, even when changing Registration
Memory presets. For details, see page 84.
PF-1000
131
Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function
Changing the Automatically Selected Voice Settings — Voice Set
When changing voices (selecting a voice file), the settings best matching the voice — the same as those set in the Sound
Creator — are always and automatically called up. From this page , you can set the on/off status for each part. For
example, each of the preset voices has its own LEFT PEDAL setting; however, even changing voices will not change the
LEFT PEDAL setting, if it is set to "OFF" in this page.
Normally, these should all be
set to "ON."
A
Use these to select the
desired part.
B
C
D
Harmony/Echo and Left
pedal assignment cannot be
set for the Layer and Left
parts.
E
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
These determine whether the corresponding voice-related settings (Voice
selection, Effects, Harmony/Echo, and left pedal assignment) are automatically
called up or not when you select a voice. These settings can be turned on or off
independently for each part.
Setting Harmony and Echo
The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 122.
Determines the lowest velocity value at
which the harmony note will sound. This
allows you to selectively apply the harmony
by your playing strength, letting you create
harmony accents in the melody. The
harmony effect is applied when you play
the key strongly (above the set value).
Determines the Harmony type.
For details, see page 133.
1
2
3
4
5
Determines the level of the Harmony effect.
Determines the speed of the Echo, Tremolo, and Trill
effects. This parameter is only available when Echo,
Tremolo, or Trill is selected in Type above.
132
PF-1000
6
7
8
When this is set to “ON,” the Harmony
effect is applied only to the note that
belongs to a chord played in the Auto
Accompaniment section of the keyboard.
This parameter is not available when Multi
Assign, Echo, Tremolo, or Trill is selected in
Type above.
This lets you assign the Harmony
effect to various parts. For details,
see page 133.
Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function
About the Harmony Types
When a normal Harmony type (“Standard Duet” through “Strum”) is selected
Split point
Harmony notes (based on the chord
and the selected type) are automatically
added to the melody played to the right
of the split point.
Chords played to the left of the
split point control the harmony.
When “Multi Assign” is selected
Multi Assign automatically assigns notes played simultaneously on the right-hand section of the keyboard to
separate parts (voices). For example, if you play two consecutive notes, the first is played by the Main voice and the
second by the Layer voice.
When “Echo” is selected
An echo effect is applied to the note played on the keyboard, in time with the currently set tempo.
When “Tremolo” is selected
A tremolo effect is applied to the note played on the keyboard, in time with the currently set tempo.
When “Trill” is selected
Two notes held on the keyboard are played alternately, in time with the currently set tempo.
About the Harmony Assignments
Multi
This automatically assigns the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th added harmony notes to different parts (voices). For example, if the
Main and Layer parts are turned on and the “Standard Duet” type is selected, the note you play on the keyboard will be
played by the Main voice, and the added harmony note will be played by the Layer voice.
Main
Harmony is applied only to the Main part.
Layer
Harmony is applied only to the Layer part. When the Layer part is turned off, Harmony is not applied.
Showing the PF-1000 Display on a TV — Video Out
The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 122.
Television
VIDEO IN
Set this to
correspond to the
standard used by
your particular
television/video
equipment: NTSC
or PAL.
VIDEO OUT
1
2
Set this to “SMALL” if the contents of the
display do not fit in your monitor screen.
3
4
5
6
7
8
• Occasionally some flashing parallel
lines may appear in the television or
video monitor. This does not necessarily
indicate that the monitor is malfunctioning. You may be able to remedy the situation by changing the Character Color
or Background Color parameters. For
optimum results, also try adjusting the
color settings on the monitor itself.
• Avoid looking at the television or video
monitor for prolonged periods of time
since doing so could damage your eyesight. Take frequent breaks and focus
your eyes on distant objects to avoid
eyestrain.
• Keep in mind that even after adjusting
all settings as recommended here, the
monitor you are using may not show the
PF-1000’s display contents as expected
(e.g., the display contents may not fit on
the screen, the characters may not be
completely clear, or the colors may be
incorrect).
Determines the background color
of the display.
Determines the colors of the characters
displayed on the video screen.
PF-1000
133
Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function
Setting the MIDI Parameters
In this section, you can make MIDI-related settings for the instrument. These settings can be stored all together from the
USER display, for future recall.
For general information and details about MIDI, see “What is MIDI?” (page 145).
The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 122.
Preset MIDI Templates (Factory Set)
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
1
3
2
3
4
Call up the User display
and press this button to
save the newly edited
MIDI settings.
Up to ten setups can
be saved.
END
5
2
6
7
8
1
Select the
desired
template.
Call up the Edit display, then
select and set the desired
functions/parameters.
For details about each of the
MIDI edit displays, see the
following pages.
Press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous display.
All Parts
Transmit all parts including Main, Layer
and Left.
Master KBD
The PF-1000 functions as a master
keyboard for controlling external tone
generators or other devices.
KBD & Style
Transmit Upper and Lower keyboard
play instead of the individual parts
(Main/Layer/Left).
Song
All Transmit channels are set to
correspond to the Song channels 1-16.
Use this to play the PF-1000 song data
with an external tone generator, or to
record your entire performance to an
external sequencer.
Clock Ext.
MIDI IN terminal receives MIDI clock
and PF-1000 synchronizes with a
external MIDI device.
MIDI Accord 1
An ideal setup for controlling the
keyboard voice and accompaniment
style with a MIDI accordion.
MIDI Accord 2
Chord and bass buttons on a MIDI
accordion control the accompaniment
style, as well as play the chord and
bass parts.
MIDI Pedal 1
The MIDI pedal connected to MIDI IN
terminal controls the bass note of the
accompaniment.
MIDI Pedal 2
The MIDI pedal connected to MIDI IN
terminal plays the bass part.
MIDI OFF
MIDI signals are neither sent nor
received.
The saved settings can be named (page 41)
or deleted (page 43) in the User page.
Making Overall System Settings (Local Control, Clock, etc.) — System
Call up the display as described in step 2 above.
For editing the Local Control parameters.
For editing the Clock, Transmit Clock,
Receive Transpose, and Start/Stop
parameters.
For editing the Message Switch
parameters.
Local Control
Turns the Local Control for each part on or off. When Local Control is set to “ON,” the keyboard of the PF-1000 controls
its own (local) internal tone generator, allowing the internal voices to be played directly from the keyboard. If you set
Local to “OFF,” the keyboard and controllers are internally disconnected from the PF-1000’s tone generator section so
that no sound is output when you play the keyboard or use the controllers. For example, this allows you to use an
external MIDI sequencer to play the PF-1000’s internal voices, and use the PF-1000 keyboard to record notes to the
external sequencer and/or play an external tone generator.
134
PF-1000
Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function
Clock, Transmit Clock, Receive Transpose, Start/Stop
■ Clock
Determines whether the PF-1000 is controlled by its own internal clock or a MIDI clock signal received from an
external device. “INTERNAL” is the normal Clock setting when the PF-1000 is being used alone. If you are using the
PF-1000 with an external sequencer, MIDI computer, or other MIDI device, and you want the PF-1000 to be
synchronized to the external device, set this function to “EXTERNAL.” In the latter case, the external device must be
connected to the PF-1000 MIDI IN terminal, and must be transmitting an appropriate MIDI clock signal.
■ Transmit Clock
Turns MIDI clock transmission on or off. When this is set to “OFF,” no MIDI clock or START/STOP data is
transmitted.
■ Receive Transpose
When this parameter is set to “OFF,” note data received by the PF-1000 is not transposed, and when it is set to “ON,” the
received note data is transposed according to the current PF-1000 keyboard transpose (page 130) setting.
■ Start/Stop
Determines whether incoming FA (start) and FC (stop) messages affect song or
style playback.
FA, FC
MIDI messages for starting/stopping the song or style. The “FA”
message corresponds to start,
and “FC” corresponds to stop.
Message Switch
SYS/EX. Tx (TRANSMIT)..................... Turns MIDI transmission of MIDI system
exclusive message data ON or OFF.
SYS/EX. Rx (RECEIVE) ........................ Turns MIDI reception of MIDI exclusive data generated by external equipment
ON or OFF.
CHORD SYS/EX. Tx (TRANSMIT) ...... Turns MIDI transmission of MIDI chord exclusive data (chord detect — root and
type) ON or OFF.
CHORD SYS/EX. Rx (RECEIVE).......... Turns MIDI reception of MIDI chord exclusive data generated by external
equipment ON or OFF.
Transmitting MIDI Data — Transmit
This determines which parts will
send MIDI data and over which
MIDI channel the data will be sent.
A
B
C
Determines the
channel for changing
transmit settings.
D
The dots corresponding
to each channel (1-16)
flash briefly whenever
any data is transmitted
on the channel(s).
E
Determines the Part for the
selected channel.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Turns transmission of the
specified data type on or
off. See below for details
on the data types.
Data Types in the MIDI TRANSMIT/RECEIVE Display
Note
Control Change (CC)
Program Change (PC)
Pitch Bend (PB)
After Touch (AT)*
Messages which are generated when the keyboard is played. Each message includes a specific note number
which corresponds to the key which is pressed, plus a velocity value based on how hard the key is played.
Control change data includes pedal and any other controller data.
Program change data corresponds to voice or “patch” numbers.
See page 129.
With this function, the PF-1000 senses how much pressure you apply to the keys while playing, and uses that
pressure to affect the sound in various ways, depending on the selected voice. This allows you to play with greater
expressiveness and add effects with your playing technique.
* Available in RECEIVE display only (page 136).
PF-1000
135
Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function
Receiving MIDI Data — Receive
This determines which parts will
receive MIDI data and over which
MIDI channel the data will be
received.
The MIDI IN/OUT terminals
and Port A of the TO HOST
terminal (Port A of the CBX
driver) correspond to channels 1 - 16. Port B of the TO
HOST terminal (Port B of the
CBX driver) corresponds to
channels 17 - 32.
A
B
C
Determines the channel for
changing receive settings.
D
E
The dots corresponding to each
channel (1 - 32) flash briefly
whenever any data is received
on the channel(s).
Determines the Part for the
selected channel. See below for
details about the receive parts.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Turns reception of the
specified data type on or off.
See page 135 for details on
the data types.
MIDI Receive Parts
OFF
SONG
MAIN
LAYER
LEFT
KEYBOARD
ACMP RHYTHM1-2
ACMP BASS
ACMP CHORD1-2
ACMP PAD
ACMP PHRASE1-2
EXTRA PART1-5
No MIDI data is received.
Normally, the part receiving the MIDI data corresponds to the part/voice used in playing back the song data. Channels 1 - 16
correspond to song channels 1 - 16, respectively.
The MAIN part is controlled by the MIDI data received on the corresponding channel.
The LAYER part is controlled by the MIDI data received on the corresponding channel.
The LEFT part is controlled by the MIDI data received on the corresponding channel.
MIDI note data received by the PF-1000 plays the corresponding notes in the same way as if they are played on the keyboard.
The received notes are used as the accompaniment RHYTHM 1 and RHYTHM 2 notes.
The received notes are used as the accompaniment BASS notes.
The received notes are used as the accompaniment CHORD 1 and CHORD 2 notes.
The received notes are used as the accompaniment PAD notes.
The received notes are used as the accompaniment PHRASE 1 and PHRASE 2 notes.
There are five parts specially reserved for receiving and playing MIDI data. Normally, these parts are not used by the instrument
itself. When these five channels are enabled, you can use the instrument as a 32-channel multi-timbral tone generator.
Setting Root Note Channels — Root
The note ON/OFF messages received at the channel(s) set to “ON” are recognized as the root notes in the
accompaniment section. The root notes will be detected regardless of the accompaniment ON/OFF and split point
settings.
The MIDI IN/OUT terminals
and Port A of the TO HOST
terminal (Port A of the CBX
driver) correspond to channels 1 - 16. Port B of the TO
HOST terminal (Port B of the
CBX driver) corresponds to
channels 17 - 32.
A
Selects the channels in groups
of eight: 1 - 8, 9 - 16, 17 - 24,
and 25 - 32, respectively.
B
C
D
E
When several channels are
simultaneously set to “ON,”
the root note is detected
from merged MIDI data
received over the channels.
Sets the desired channel to ON or OFF.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Sets all channels to OFF.
Setting Chord Channels — Chord Detect
The note ON/OFF messages received at the channel(s) set to “ON” are recognized as the chord notes in the
accompaniment section. The chords to be detected depend on the fingering type. The root notes will be detected
regardless of the accompaniment ON/OFF and split point settings. The operation procedure is basically the same as that
of the ROOT display above.
136
PF-1000
Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function
Other Settings — Utility
The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 122.
Making Settings for Fade In/Out, Metronome, Parameter Lock, and
Tap — CONFIG 1
Fade In Time, Fade Out Time, Fade Out Hold Time
These determine how long it takes for the accompaniment style and song to fade in or fade out.
Determines the time the volume is held
at 0 following the fade out (range of 0 5.0 seconds).
Determines the time it takes for the
volume to fade in, or go from minimum to
maximum (range of 0 - 20.0 seconds).
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Determines the time it takes for the volume
to fade out, or go from maximum to
minimum (range of 0 - 20.0 seconds).
Metronome
These let you make settings for the metronome-related parameters.
Determines the level of the
metronome sound.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Determines which sound is used for the metronome.
Bell Off ........................ Conventional metronome sound, with no bell.
Bell On......................... Conventional metronome sound, with bell.
English Voice .............. Count in English (One, Two, Three, Four)
German Voice.............. Count in German (Eins, Zwei, Drei, Vier)
Japanese Voice........... Count in Japanese (Ichi, Ni, San, Shi)
French Voice ............... Count in French (Un, Deux, Trois, Quatre)
Spanish Voice ............. Count in Spanish (Uno, Dos, Tres, Cuatro)
Determines the time
signature of the metronome
sound.
When you start the song or
accompaniment style, the
values matching to them are
automatically set.
PF-1000
137
Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function
Parameter Lock
This function is used to “lock” the specified parameters so that they can only be changed directly via the panel controls
— in other words, instead of via Registration Memory, One Touch Setting, Music Finder, or song and sequence data.
Selects the desired
parameter for locking/
unlocking.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Determines whether the selected
parameter is locked (checkmarked)
or unlocked (empty).
Tap Count
This lets you change settings of the tap sound, used for the Tap Start function (page 51).
Determines the particular sound
used for the Tap Start function.
Any drum or percussion sound in
the Standard Kit (page 55) can be
selected.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Determines the level of the tap
sound.
Making Settings for the Display, Speaker System, and Voice Number
Indication — CONFIG 2
HEADPHONE SW (SWITCH)
Speaker sounds normally, but is cut off
when headphones are inserted to the
PHONES jack.
ON
Speaker sound is always on.
OFF
Speaker sound is off.
Determines the brightness of
the backlit display.
1
138
PF-1000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Determines whether or not the voice bank
and number are shown in the PRESET
page of the VOICE display (page 54). This is
useful when you want to check the proper
bank select MSB/LSB values and program
number to specify when selecting the voice
from an external MIDI device.
Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function
Copying and Formatting Disks — Disk
F
G
H
• Copying cannot be done
between a 2DD disk and
2HD disk. When copying,
make sure both disk are
the same type.
• Depending on the amount
of data contained in the
original source disk, you
may have to swap the two
disks several times until all
of the data is properly
copied.
• Make sure to read the
section “Using the Floppy
Disk Drive (FDD) and
Floppy Disks” on page 6.
This function copies all the data
from one disk to another, letting
you back up all your important
data before editing. For
instructions, see “Copying from
Disk to Disk” below.
I
J
This function formats a floppy
disk (see below).
Turns the Song Auto Open function on
or off. When this is set to “ON,” the PF1000 automatically calls up the first disk
song when a disk is inserted.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Copying from Disk to Disk
As shown below, first copy the data of the original (source) disk to the PF-1000, then
copy the data to the backup (destination) disk.
1
3
Press the [F] button. A message
appears, prompting you to insert
the source disk.
At the “Please insert a destination
disk and press the OK button ”
prompt, eject the source disk and
replace it with a blank, formatted
disk, then press “OK.” To abort the
operation, press “CANCEL.”
2
4
Internal memory
Copy
Insert the disk containing the
original data into the drive and
press “OK.”
A “Now copying” message
appears, and the PF-1000
begins copying data to internal
memory. To abort the operation,
press “CANCEL.”
When the operation is finished
(or when prompted), eject the
destination disk.
Source
disk
Copy
Destination
disk
Commercially available
music data is subject to
protection by copyright
laws. Copying commercially available data is
strictly prohibited,
except for your own personal use. Some music
software is purposely
copy-protected and
cannot be copied.
Formatting a Disk
When using an unformatted disk for
the first time, make sure to properly
format it on the PF-1000. This
includes blank disks as well as disks
already initialized in a different
format. Formatting erases all data on
the disk.
Disk Lamp
When the power is turned on, the disk lamp
(at the bottom left of the drive) lights to
indicate the drive can be used.
Insert the disk with shutter facing
away from you and the label side
up. To start the Format operation,
press the [H] (DISK FORMAT)
button, in the DISK page above.
The Format operation initializes a disk with a specific file
system, allowing the corresponding device (in this case,
the PF-1000) to access it
properly.
Since there are several types
of formats and disks available, you should know which
ones to use with the PF1000. 2DD disks are formatted to a capacity of 720 KB,
and 2HD disks are formatted
to a capacity of 1.44 MB.
CAUTION
Formatting a disk completely
erases all data on the disk.
Make sure that the disk
you’re formatting does not
contain important data!
PF-1000
139
Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function
Entering Your Name and Language Preference — Owner
F
G
H
I
J
Determines the language
used for the display
messages. Once you
change this setting, all
messages will be shown in
the selected language.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Press this button to enter an
Owner name (page 16; for
instructions on naming see
page 45). This name is
automatically shown when you
turn the power on.
When “JAPANESE” is selected for the Language parameter, and you change this to one of the western languages,
the kanji and kana characters of the file name stored in
the disk drive are changed to western characters. In the
opposite case, special Latin characters and marks are
changed into normal characters. Also, in the case of
floppy disk data, text in the files are changed to characters
that cannot be read by the instrument.
Keep in mind that similar problems may occur when trying
to access files originating or edited by a computer having
a different language operating system. In general, be
careful when switching languages — you risk not being
able to access the data properly.
8
Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings of the PF-1000 —
System Reset
This operation lets you restore the PF-1000 to its original factory settings. These settings include System Setup, MIDI
Setup, User Effect, Music Finder, and Files & Folders.
Restores the System Setup parameters to the original
factory settings. You can also restore only the System
Setup settings by simultaneously holding down the highest
key on the keyboard (C7) and turning on the power.
Restores the MIDI
templates to the original
factory settings.
Restores the User Effects
(page 120) to the original
factory settings.
A
F
B
G
C
H
D
I
E
J
Restores the Music
Finder data to the
original factory settings.
Deletes all files and
folders stored in the User
page.
1
2
Executes the Factory Reset operation
for all items checkmarked above.
140
PF-1000
3
4
5
6
7
8
These call up the corresponding Open/Save
displays. These let you store the
corresponding data as files to disk, for future
recall. Pressing each of these buttons calls
up the corresponding Open/Save display,
from which you can select the corresponding
PRESET page. From this PRESET page,
you can save the relevant data.
The functions and settings
below do not apply to the
Factory Reset operation.
However, you can restore
these to their original settings by calling up the preset
System Setup files, using
the Open/Save System Files
function.
Language
Owner Name
LCD Brightness
Video Out settings (NTSC/
PAL, Size, Character Color,
Background Color)
All Music Finder records can
be stored together as a single file. When calling up a
stored file, a message
appears prompting you to
replace or append the
records as desired.
Replace:
All Music Finder records currently in the instrument are
deleted and replaced with
the records of the selected
file.
Append:
The records called up are
added to the vacant record
numbers.
Using Your PF-1000 with Other Devices
CAUTION
Before connecting the PF-1000 to other electronic components,
turn off the power to all the components. Before turning the power
on or off to all components, set all volume levels to minimum (0).
Otherwise, electrical shock or damage to the components may
occur.
P.142
P.142
P.142
4
3
5
VIDEO OUT
AUX IN
L/L+R
AC INLET
1
AUX OUT
L/L+R
R
PEDAL
R
PHONES
POWER
L LEVEL FIXED R
AUX PEDAL
ON
MIDI
HOST SELECT
OUT
6
7
P.143
P.143
By connecting a microphone to the PF-1000, you can
enjoy singing along with your own performance or song
playback. (A dynamic microphone is recommended.) The
PF-1000 outputs your vocals or guitar sounds through the
built-in speakers.
1
Connect your microphone to the MIC/LINE IN jack
(standard 1/4" phone jack).
OFF
TO HOST
MIDI PC-2 PC-1 Mac
IN
2 Connecting the Microphone
or Guitar (MIC/LINE IN jack).
Use an unidirectional microphone for best results.
THRU
8
2
Set the [MIC LINE] switch (located next to the [MIC/
LINE IN] jack) to the MIC position.
P.143
MIC LINE
INPUT
VOLUME MIC/LINE IN
MIN
MIC LINE
MIC LINE
MAX
When connecting a microphone
When connecting a guitar
2
1 Using the Headphones
(PHONES jacks).
To use headphones, connect them to one of the PHONES
jacks (standard 1/4" phone jacks) located on the left side
of the keyboard. You can also determine whether or not
the internal stereo speaker system is shut off when a pair
of headphones is plugged into the PHONES jack
(page 138). Two people can enjoy listening to the PF1000 together by connecting two pairs of headphones to
the two jacks.
You should set the [MIC LINE] switch to the LINE position when
connecting an audio source with line-level output to the MIC/LINE
IN jack.
3
Use the [INPUT VOLUME] knob (located next to the
MIC/LINE IN jack) to set the microphone volume.
INPUT
VOLUME
MIN
MAX
PF-1000
141
Using Your PF-1000 with Other Devices
345 Connecting Audio &
Video Devices
You can connect the PF-1000 to a wide range of audio
equipment by using the AUX IN and AUX OUT jacks,
which are located at the bottom left of the instrument.
Connect as shown in the illustrations below using
standard audio cables.
4 Outputting the sound of an external
device through the built-in speakers of
the PF-1000 (AUX IN jacks)
CAUTION
When the PF-1000’s AUX IN jacks are connected to an external
device, first turn on the power of the external device, then that of
the PF-1000.
PF-1000
Use audio cables and adaptor plugs with no resistance.
AUX IN
L/L+R
R
Tone generator
CAUTION
LINE OUT
When the PF-1000 AUX OUT jacks are connected to an external
audio system, first turn on the power to the PF-1000, then to the
external audio system. Reverse this order when you turn the power
off.
3 Playing the sounds of the PF-1000
through an external audio system, and
recording the sounds to an external
recorder (AUX OUT jacks)
CAUTION
Never connect the PF-1000 AUX OUT jacks to its AUX IN jacks,
either directly or via external audio equipment. Such connections
could result in a feedback loop that will make normal performance
impossible, and may even damage the PF-1000.
PF-1000
Cassette tape recorder
stereo system
AUX OUT
L/L+R
R
L LEVEL FIXED R
RCA pin plug
Phone plug
(standard)
To powered speaker
When these are connected
(with standard phone
plugs), you can use the
[MASTER VOLUME]
control to adjust the volume
of the sound output to the
external device.
Audio cable
AUX IN
RCA pin
plug
When these are connected
(with RCA pin plug; LEVEL
FIXED), the sound is output to
the external device at a fixed
level, regardless of the
[MASTER VOLUME] control
setting.
Phone plug
(standard)
Audio cable
• The PF-1000’s [MASTER VOLUME] setting affects the input signal from the AUX IN jacks.
• If you connect the PF-1000 to a monaural device, use only the
AUX IN L/L+R jack.
5 Showing the display of the PF-1000 on a
connected TV monitor (VIDEO OUT)
You can connect the PF-1000 to a television or video
monitor to display the lyrics in your song data or LCD
on a larger screen.
The size and color of the displayed characters can also
be set, as well as the color of the display background
(page 133).
• For information on setting the video standard (NTSC or PAL),
refer to page 133. The default setting is “PAL.”
• Use an audio-video cable with good high-frequency characteristics and RCA-type pin jacks to connect the PF-1000 to a television or video monitor.
RCA pin
plug
RCA pin
plug
VIDEO OUT
VIDEO IN
AUX IN
L/L+R
R
Television
• If you connect the PF-1000 to a monaural device, use only the
AUX OUT L/L+R jack.
142
PF-1000
PF-1000
Using Your PF-1000 with Other Devices
6 Using the Pedal (footswitch)
or Foot Controller (AUX
PEDAL jack)
8 Connecting to a Computer
(MIDI terminals/TO HOST
terminal)
By connecting an optional Foot Controller (such as the
FC7) to the AUX PEDAL jack, you can control any one of
a variety of important functions with your foot — such as
dynamically adjusting the volume as you play (page 128).
Connect your PF-1000 to computer and take advantage of
the wide range of powerful and versatile software for
creating and editing music. The PF-1000 can be
connected in three ways.
By connecting a Foot Switch (the FC4 or FC5) to this jack,
you can replicate the function of some panel buttons,
doing things like starting and stopping accompaniment.
■ Using the TO HOST terminal
■ Using the MIDI terminals
■ Connecting to a USB terminal by using an optional
USB interface (UX series)
CAUTION
Make sure to connect or disconnect the pedal only when the power
is turned off.
• You’ll need an appropriate music/MIDI software program (such
as a sequencer), compatible with your computer platform.
7 Connecting external MIDI
devices (MIDI terminals)
• When connecting the PF-1000 to a personal computer, first turn
off the power to both the PF-1000 and the computer before connecting any cables and setting the HOST SELECT switch. After
making the proper connections and settings, turn on the power of
the computer first, then that of the PF-1000.
Using a standard MIDI cable, connect the external MIDI
device to the MIDI terminal(s) of the PF-1000. Make sure
to set the HOST SELECT switch (page 18) to MIDI when
you use these connectors. For more information about
connections, see “What You Can Do With MIDI” on
page 147.
• If you do not use the TO HOST terminal of the PF-1000, make
sure you disconnect the cable from the terminal. If the cable is
left connected, the PF-1000 may not function properly.
MIDI IN........... Receives MIDI messages from an
external MIDI device
MIDI OUT ....... Sends out MIDI messages generated by
the PF-1000
MIDI THRU ..... Simply relays the MIDI messages
received at MIDI IN
For a general overview of MIDI and how you can
effectively use it, refer to the following sections:
• What’s MIDI? (page 145)
• What You Can Do With MIDI (page 147)
• MIDI functions (page 134)
• When the HOST SELECT switch is set to “PC-1,” “PC-2,” or
“Mac,” you can use the TO HOST terminal, but the MIDI connectors are disabled since no data transfer occurs via the MIDI connectors. On the other hand, when the HOST SELECT switch is
set to “MIDI,” you can use the MIDI connectors, but not the TO
HOST terminal since no data is transferred via the TO HOST terminal.
Note for Windows users (regarding MIDI
driver)
To transfer data via the computer’s serial port and the
PF-1000’s TO HOST terminal, you need to install a
specified MIDI driver (Yamaha CBX driver for
Windows). You can download this driver from the XG
Library on the Yamaha Web site:
http://www.yamaha-xg.com
• Never use MIDI cables longer than 15 meters.
PF-1000
143
Using Your PF-1000 with Other Devices
Using the TO HOST terminal
Using the MIDI terminals
Connect the serial port of the personal computer (RS232C terminal or RS-422 terminal) to the TO HOST
terminal of the PF-1000. For the connection cable, use the
appropriate cable below (sold separately) that matches
the personal computer type.
When using a MIDI interface device installed in the
personal computer, connect the MIDI terminals of the
personal computer and the PF-1000 with standard MIDI
cables.
If your system does not work properly with the connections and settings listed above, your software may require different settings.
Check your software operation manual and set the HOST SELECT
switch to the proper data transfer rate. (Data transfer rate of “PC-1”
is 31,250 bps.)
• When the computer has a MIDI interface installed,
connect the MIDI OUT terminal of the personal
computer to the MIDI IN terminal. Set the HOST
SELECT switch to “MIDI.”
PF-1000
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
NEC MultiSync
■ IBM-PC/AT (Windows)
PC-9821 AS
NEC
Connect the RS-232C terminal on the computer to the
TO HOST terminal on the PF-1000 using a serial cable
(D-SUB 9P → MINI DIN 8P cross cable). Set the PF1000 HOST SELECT switch to the “PC-2.” (Data
transfer rate is 38,400 bps.)
PF-1000
NEC MultiSync
PC-9821 AS
MINI DIN
8-pin
D-sub
9-pin
NEC
HOST SELECT
MIDI PC-2 PC-1 Mac
MINI DIN
8-pin
D-sub
25-pin
D-sub
9-pin
* When using a D-SUB 25P
→ MINI DIN 8P cross
cable, connect using a DSUB9P plug adaptor on
the computer side of the
cable.
■ Macintosh
PF-1000
MINI DIN
8-pin
144
PF-1000
PF-1000
MIDI IN
RS422
MIDI OUT
MINI DIN
8-pin
HOST SELECT
Set the MIDI interface clock in the sequencer you are
using to 1 MHz. For details, refer to the owner’s
manual for the particular software you are using.
HOST SELECT
• When using a MIDI interface with a Macintosh series
computer, connect the RS-422 terminal of the
computer (modem or printer terminal) to the MIDI
interface, then connect the MIDI OUT terminal on the
MIDI interface to the MIDI IN terminal of the PF-1000,
as shown in the diagram below.
Set the HOST SELECT switch to “MIDI.”
MIDI PC-2 PC-1 Mac
Connect RS-422 terminal (modem or printer) on the
computer to the TO HOST terminal on the PF-1000
using a serial cable (system peripheral cable, 8 bit). Set
the PF-1000 HOST SELECT switch to the “MAC” (Data
transfer rate is 31,250 bps).
MIDI PC-2 PC-1 Mac
HOST SELECT
MIDI PC-2 PC-1 Mac
MINI DIN
8-pin
• When the HOST SELECT switch is set to “MIDI,” the
TO HOST terminal is disabled.
• When using a Macintosh series computer, set the
MIDI interface clock setting in the application
software to match the setting of the MIDI interface
you are using. For details, refer to the owner’s
manual for the particular software you are using.
Using Your PF-1000 with Other Devices
Using the USB terminal on your computer
with a USB/MIDI interface (UX256/UX96/
UX16, etc.)
Connect the UX256/UX96/UX16 and the computer with a
USB cable. Install the included UX256/UX96/UX16 driver
to the computer, and connect the UX256/UX96/UX16 to
the PF-1000 with a MIDI cable. Set the HOST SELECT
switch on the PF-1000 to “MIDI.” For details, refer to the
owner’s manual of the UX256/UX96/UX16.
Now let’s examine what happens when we play back a
recording. When you playback a music CD (for example,
a solo piano recording), you’re hearing the actual sound
(vibrations in air) of the acoustic instrument. This is called
audio data, to distinguish it from MIDI data.
Recording and playing back the performance of an acoustic
instrument (audio data)
Recording
Playback
MIDI
IN
USB
cable
NEC MultiSync
USB interface
OUT
PF-1000
MIDI IN
PC-9821 AS
MIDI OUT
NEC
Personal computer
HOST SELECT
MIDI PC-2 PC-1 Mac
For details about the necessary MIDI settings for computer
and sequence software you are using, refer to the relevant
owner’s manuals.
What’s MIDI?
In the above example, the actual acoustic sounds of the
pianist’s performance are captured in the recording as
audio data, and this is recorded to CD. When you play
back that CD on your audio system, you can hear the
actual piano performance. The piano itself is not
necessary, since the recording contains the actual sounds
of the piano, and your speakers reproduce them.
Recording and playing back the performance of a digital
instrument (MIDI data)
Let’s consider an acoustic piano and a classical guitar as
representative acoustic instruments. With the piano, you
strike a key, and a hammer inside hits some strings and
plays a note. With the guitar, you directly pluck a string
and the note sounds.
But how does a digital instrument go about playing a
note?
Acoustic guitar note
production
Recording
Playback
Tone generator
Sequencer
Controller (keyboard, etc.)
FD
Digital instrument note
production
FD
Internal amp
L
Tone generator
(Electric circuit)
Internal amp
R
Playing
the keyboard
Pluck a string and the body
resonates the sound.
In the case of digital instruments, the audio signals are sent
through output jacks (such as AUX OUT) on the instrument.
Based on playing information
from the keyboard, a
sampled note stored in the
tone generator is played
through the speakers.
As shown in the illustration above, in an electronic
instrument, the sampled note (previously recorded note)
stored in the tone generator section (electronic circuit) is
played based on information received from the keyboard,
and output through the speakers.
PF-1000
145
Using Your PF-1000 with Other Devices
The “controller” and “tone generator” in the illustration
above are equivalent to the piano in our acoustic
example. Here, the player’s performance on the keyboard
is captured as MIDI song data (see illustration below). In
order to record the audio performance on an acoustic
piano, special recording equipment is needed. However,
since the PF-1000 features a built-in sequencer that lets
you record performance data, this recording equipment is
unnecessary. Instead, your digital instrument — the PF1000 — allows you to both record and play back the data.
Tone generator
Sequencer
Keyboard performance
(MIDI data)
However, we also need a sound source to produce the
audio, which eventually comes from your speakers. The
tone generator of the PF-1000 fills this function. The
recorded performance is reproduced by the sequencer,
playing back the song data, using a tone generator
capable of accurately producing various instrument
sounds — including that of a piano. Looked at in another
way, the relation of the sequencer and the tone generator
is similar to that of the pianist and the piano — one plays
the other. Since digital instruments handle playback data
and the actual sounds independently, we can hear our
piano performance played by another instrument, such as
guitar or violin.
Even though it is a single musical instrument, the PF-1000 can be
thought of as containing several electronic components: a controller, a tone generator, and a sequencer.
Finally, we’ll take a look at the actual data that gets
recorded and that serves as the basis for playing the
sounds. For example, let’s say you play a “C” quarter note
using the grand piano sound on the PF-1000 keyboard.
Unlike an acoustic instrument that puts out a resonated
note, the electronic instrument puts out information from
the keyboard such as “with what voice,” “with which
key,” “about how strong,” “when was it pressed” and
“when was it released.” Then each piece of information is
changed into a number value and sent to the tone
generator. Using these numbers as a basis, the tone
generator plays the stored sampled note.
■ Example Keyboard Data
Voice number (with what voice)
01 (grand piano)
Note number (with which key)
60 (C3)
Note on (when was it pressed)
and
note off (when was it released)
Timing expressed numerically
(quarter note)
Velocity (about how strong)
120 (strong)
Panel operations on the PF-1000, such as playing the
keyboard and selecting voices, are processed and stored
as MIDI data. The auto accompaniment styles and songs
also consist of MIDI data.
MIDI is an acronym that stands for Musical Instrument
Digital Interface, which allows electronic musical
instruments to communicate with each other, by sending
and receiving compatible Note, Control Change, Program
Change and various other types of MIDI data, or
messages.
The PF-1000 can control a MIDI device by transmitting
note related data and various types of controller data.The
PF-1000 can be controlled by incoming MIDI messages
which automatically determine the tone generator mode,
select MIDI channels, voices and effects, change
parameter values and of course play the voices specified
for the various parts.
MIDI data has the following advantages over audio data:
• The amount of data is much less, letting you easily store MIDI
songs to floppy disk.
• The data can be effectively and easily edited, even to the point of
changing voices and transforming the data.
MIDI messages can be divided into two groups: Channel
messages and System messages.
■ Channel Messages
The PF-1000 is an electronic instrument that can handle
16 channels (or 32 channels, when using the TO HOST
terminal). This is usually expressed as “it can play 16
instruments at the same time.” Channel messages transmit
information such as Note ON/OFF, Program Change, for
each of the 16 channels.
Message Name
PF-1000 Operation/Panel Setting
Note ON/OFF
Messages which are generated when the
keyboard is played. Each message includes
a specific note number which corresponds to
the key which is pressed, plus a velocity
value based on how hard the key is played.
Program Change
Voice selecting (control change bank select
MSB/LSB setting)
Control Change
Volume, panpot (Mixing Console), etc.
The performance data of all songs and styles is handled as MIDI
data.
146
PF-1000
Using Your PF-1000 with Other Devices
MIDI channels
MIDI performance data is assigned to one of sixteen
MIDI channels. Using these channels, 1 - 16, the
performance data for sixteen different instrument parts
can be simultaneously sent over one MIDI cable.
Think of the MIDI channels as TV channels. Each TV
station transmits its broadcasts over a specific
channel.Your home TV set receives many different
programs simultaneously from several TV stations and
you select the appropriate channel to watch the desired
program.
As you can see, it is essential to determine which data
is to be sent over which MIDI channel when
transmitting MIDI data (page 135). The PF-1000 also
allows you to determine how the received data is
played back. (page 136).
■ System Messages
This is data that is used in common by the entire MIDI
system. System messages include messages like Exclusive
Messages that transmit data unique to each instrument
manufacturer and Realtime Messages that control the
MIDI device.
Message Name
PF-1000 Operation/Panel Setting
System Exclusive
Message
Effect type settings (Mixing Console),
etc.
Realtime Messages
Clock setting, Start/stop operation
Weather Report
News
1
2
News
2
MIDI operates on the same basic principle. The
transmitting instrument sends MIDI data on a specific
MIDI channel (MIDI Transmit Channel) via a single
MIDI cable to the receiving instrument. If the receiving
instrument’s MIDI channel (MIDI Receive Channel)
matches the Transmit Channel, the receiving instrument
will sound according to the data sent by the
transmitting instrument.
MIDI
cable
MIDI transmit channel 2
MIDI receive channel 2
The PF-1000’s keyboard and internal tone generator are also
connected by MIDI (page 134).
For example, several tracks (channels) can be
transmitted simultaneously, including the style data (as
shown below).
The messages transmitted/received by the PF-1000 are
shown in the MIDI Data Format and MIDI
Implementation Chart in the separate Data List.
What You Can Do With MIDI
The following MIDI settings can be made on the PF1000:
• MIDI templates (preset MIDI setups for various
applications) (page 134)
• Transmit (page 135)
• Receive (page 136)
• Local Control (page 134)
• Clock (page 135)
■ Record performance data (1-16 channels) using the
PF-1000 Auto Accompaniment features on a external
sequencer (such as a personal computer). After
recording, edit the data with the sequencer, then play
it again on the PF-1000 (playback).
Example: Recording the auto accompaniment of the PF-1000 to an
external sequencer
MIDI receive
PF-1000
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
NEC MultiSync
PC-9821 AS
NEC
MIDI transmit
MIDI cable or
serial cable
PF-1000 track (channnel)
MAIN
LAYER
LEFT
STYLE instrument
STYLE instrument
STYLE instrument
STYLE instrument
STYLE instrument
STYLE instrument
STYLE instrument
STYLE instrument
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel 7
Channel 8
Channel 9
Channel 10
Channel 11
External sequencer
Track 1
Track 2
Track 3
Track 4
Track 5
Track 6
Track 7
Track 8
Track 9
Track 10
Track 11
Personal cumputer,
QY series etc.
When you want to use the PF-1000 as an XG-compatible
multi-timbral tone generator, set the receive part for MIDI
channels 1 to 16 to “SONG” in MIDI Receive (page 136).
■ Play and control the PF-1000 from a separate
keyboard
MIDI receive
PF-1000
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
PF-1000
147
Using Your PF-1000 with Other Devices
Data Compatibility
This section covers basic information on data
compatibility: whether or not other MIDI devices can
playback the data recorded by PF-1000, and whether or
not the PF-1000 can playback commercially available
song data or song data created for other instruments or on
a computer. Depending on the MIDI device or data
characteristics, you may be able to play back the data
without any problem, or you may have to perform some
special operations before the data can be played back. If
you run into problems playing back data, please refer to
the information below.
Disk format
Sequence Format
The system which records song data is called “sequence
format.”
Playback is only possible when the sequence format of
the disk matches that of the MIDI device. The PF-1000 is
compatible with the following formats.
■ SMF (Standard MIDI File)
This is the most common sequence format.
Standard MIDI Files are generally available as one of two
types: Format 0 or Format 1. Many MIDI devices are
compatible with Format 0, and most commercially
available software is recorded as Format 0.
• The PF-1000 is compatible with both Format 0 and
Format 1.
Floppy disks are the main storage medium for data used
with various devices, including computers. Different
devices have different systems of storing data, therefore it
is necessary to first configure the floppy disk to the system
of the device being used.This operation is called
“formatting.”
• Song data recorded on the PF-1000 is automatically
recorded as SMF Format 0.
• There are two types of floppy disks: MF2DD (double
sided, double density) and MF2HD (double sided,
high density), and each type has different formatting
systems.
■ ESEQ
• PF-1000 can record and playback with both types of
floppy disks.
• When formatted by the PF-1000, a 2DD disk stores up
to 720 KB (kilobytes) and a 2HD disk stores up to1.44
MB (megabytes). (The figures “720 KB” and “1.44MB”
indicate the data memory capacity. They are also used
to indicate the format type of disk.)
• Playback is only possible when the MIDI device to be
used is compatible with the format of the disk.
• Song data loaded to the PF-1000 is automatically
saved as SMF Format 0 regardless of the original
format.
This sequence format is compatible with many of
Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the PF-1000 series
instruments.This is a common format used with various
Yamaha software.
■ XF
The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF (Standard MIDI
File) format with greater functionality and open-ended
expandability for the future.
• The PF-1000 is capable of displaying lyrics when an
XF file containing lyric data is played.
■ Style File
The Style File Format – SFF – is Yamaha’s original style file
format which uses a unique conversion system to provide
high-quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide
range of chord types.
148
PF-1000
Using Your PF-1000 with Other Devices
Voice Allocation Format
With MIDI, voices are assigned to specific numbers,
called “program numbers.” The numbering standard
(order of voice allocation) is referred to as the “voice
allocation format.”
Voices may not play back as expected unless the voice
allocation format of the song data matches that of the
compatible MIDI device used for playback.
The PF-1000 is compatible with the following formats.
Even if the devices and data used satisfy all the conditions above,
the data may still not be completely compatible, depending on the
specifications of the devices and particular data recording
methods.
■ GM System Level 1
This is one of the most common voice allocation formats.
• Many MIDI devices are compatible with GM System
Level1, as is most commercially available software.
■ XG
XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level 1
format, and was developed by Yamaha specifically to
provide more voices and variations, as well as greater
expressive control over voices and effects, and to ensure
compatibility of data well into the future.
• Song data recorded on the PF-1000 using voices in the
[XG] category is XG-compatible.
■ DOC
This voice allocation format is compatible with many of
Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the PF-1000 series
instruments.This is also a common format used with
various Yamaha software.
PF-1000
149
Assembling the Keyboard Stand
You can use the PF-1000 without installing the stand.
However, if you wish to attach the stand to the PF-1000,
follow the steps below.
CAUTION
• Be careful not to confuse parts. Make sure that you
install all parts in the correct orientation. Assemble
the stand in accordance with the steps below.
• At least two persons should assemble the stand
together.
• Be sure to use the correct-size screws, as indicated
below. Use of incorrect screws can cause damages
to the stand.
• When you attach each part, be sure to tighten all
screws.
• Reverse the assembly procedure to disassemble the
stand.
1
Attaching the front legs to the stand.
1 Place the stand on the floor so that
the bottom side (with smaller
holes) faces up.
2
2 Use a short screw to attach
the bracket of the front right
leg to the bottom side of
the stand.
3 Use two long screws to fix
the bracket of the front right
leg to the front side of the
stand.
3
Use the included wrench.
4 Attach the front left leg in the same way.
Keyboard
2
Attaching the rear legs to the stand.
1
Remove the following parts from the package.
Plate
Stand
2
3 Attach the rear right leg in
the same way.
Rear left leg
Front left leg
Rear right leg
Front right leg
3
Attaching the plate.
Pedal unit
AC power cord
Screws
Long screws (6x65mm) x 8
Cord holders x 2
Short screws (6x20mm) x 8
Cap bolts x 4
150
PF-1000
Wrench x 1
Align the holes on the plate
with the holes of the rear side
of the bracket on the rear legs,
then fix them using four short
screws.
1 Use a short screw to attach
the bracket of the rear left leg
to the bottom side of the
stand.
2 Use two long screws to fix the
bracket of the rear left leg to
the rear side of the stand.
Assembling the Keyboard Stand
4
Raising the stand to the standing position.
7
Connecting the pedal unit.
1 Place the pedal unit in front of the rear legs.
Use the front legs as
support to raise the
stand.
2
PEDAL
3
CAUTION
Be careful not to pinch your fingers.
5
Mounting the keyboard.
2 Connect the pedal cord plug
into the PEDAL jack on the left
side of the keyboard, with the
arrow on the plug facing up.
3 Attach the cord holders in the position shown in the
illustration, and clip the pedal cord to the holders.
* You can also clip the power cord to the cord holders.
8
Set the voltage selector and connect the power
cord to the AC INLET on the keyboard.
AC INLET
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
Be sure to hold the four corners of the
keyboard.
Mount the keyboard so that the rubber feet
on the bottom of the keyboard fall into the
holes on the stand.
CAUTION
Be careful not to pinch your fingers or drop the
keyboard.
CAUTION
Do not hold any part of the keyboard other than four
corners as shown in the illustration.
6
Fixing the keyboard.
Attach the cap bolts on the
bottom of the stand and tighten
them with your hand to fix the
keyboard.
Voltage Selector
Before connecting the AC power cord, check the setting of the
voltage selector (provided in some locations). To set the selector for
110V, 130V, 220V or 240V main voltages, use a "minus" screwdriver
to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage for your region
appears next to the pointer on the panel. The voltage selector is set
at 240V when the unit is initially shipped.
After the proper voltage has been selected, connect the AC power
cord to the AC INLET and an AC wall outlet. A plug adaptor may also
be provided in some areas to match the pin configuration of the AC
wall outlets in your area.
WARNING
An improper voltage setting can cause serious damage to the PF1000 or result in improper operation.
After completing the assembly, please check the
following.
• Are any parts left over?
• Review the assembly procedure and correct any
errors.
• Is the PF-1000 clear of doors and other movable fixtures?
• Move the PF-1000 to an appropriate location.
• Does the PF-1000 make a rattling noise when you
shake it?
• Tighten all screws.
• Are the pedal and power cords inserted securely into
the sockets?
• Check the connections.
• If the keyboard stand creaks or is otherwise unsteady
when you play the keyboard, refer to the assembly
diagrams and retighten all screws.
PF-1000
151
Troubleshooting
Problem
152
Possible Cause and Solution
• The PF-1000 does not turn on; there is no
power.
Make sure that the PF-1000 has been plugged in properly. Securely insert the
female plug into the AC socket on the PF-1000, and the male plug into a proper
AC outlet (page 16).
• A click or pop is heard when the power is
turned on or off.
This is normal when electrical current is applied to the instrument.
• Noise is heard from the PF-1000’s speakers.
Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the PF-1000 may produce
interference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone, or use it further away from
the PF-1000.
• The display is too bright or too dark to read.
The brightness of the display may be affected by the surrounding temperature;
try adjusting the contrast (page 17).
• The keyboard volume is low compared to that
of the Auto Accompaniment or song playback.
The overall keyboard volume or the independent volume level of the keyboard
part may be set too low. Raise the MAIN/LAYER/LEFT volume voices or lower
the STYLE/SONG volume in the BALANCE display (page 61).
• The volume of the Auto Accompaniment or
song playback is low compared to that of the
keyboard.
The volume level of one or more accompaniment parts or song channels is set
too low. Raise the part or channel level(s) in the appropriate MIXER display
(page 117).
• The overall volume is low, or no sound is
heard.
• The Master Volume is set too low; set it to an appropriate level with the
[MASTER VOLUME] dial.
• The volume of the individual parts may be set too low. Raise the volume of
MAIN, LAYER, LEFT, STYLE, and SONG in the BALANCE display (page 61).
• Make sure the desired channel is set to ON (page 61, 76).
• Headphones are connected, disabling the speaker output. (This happens
when the speaker setting is set to “HEADPHONE SW”; page 138.) Unplug the
headphones.
• Make sure the speaker setting is set to ON (page 138).
• Make sure the Local Control function is set to ON (page 134).
• The damper, sostenuto and soft functions do
not work for the relevant pedals.
Each pedal has been assigned to a different function. Make sure that each pedal
is properly assigned to SUSTAIN, SOSTENUTO, and SOFT (page 128).
• The damper pedal has no effect, or the sound
continuously sustains even when the damper
pedal is not pressed.
The pedal cable/plug may not be properly connected. Make sure to securely
insert the pedal plug into the proper jack (page 150 - 151).
• Not all simultaneously-played notes sound.
You may be exceeding the maximum polyphony of the PF-1000. When this
happens, the earliest played notes will stop sounding, letting the latest played
notes sound. See page 154 for information on the maximum polyphony.
• Accompaniment style or Song playback does
not start.
• MIDI Clock may be set to “EXTERNAL.” Make sure this is set to “INTERNAL”
(page 135).
• Make sure to press the appropriate [START/STOP] button. To play an
accompaniment style, press the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button
(page 61); to playback a song, press the SONG [START/STOP] button
(page 74).
• “New Song” (a blank song) has been selected. Make sure to select an
appropriate song in the SONG display (page 74).
• The song has been stopped at the end of the song data. Return to the
beginning of the song by pressing the [TOP] button (page 76).
• Only the rhythm channel plays.
Make sure the Auto Accompaniment function is turned on; press the [ACMP] button.
• The accompaniment style does not start,
even when Synchro Start is in standby
condition and a key is pressed.
You may be trying to start accompaniment by playing a key in the right hand
range of the keyboard. Make sure to play a key in the left-hand (accompaniment)
range of the keyboard.
• The desired chord is not recognized or output
by the auto accompaniment.
• You may not be playing the correct keys to indicate the chord. Refer to “Chord
Types Recognized in the Fingered Mode” (page 63).
• You may be playing the keys according to a different fingering mode, and not
the one currently selected. Check the accompaniment mode, and play the
keys according to the selected mode (page 62).
PF-1000
Troubleshooting
Problem
Possible Cause and Solution
• Auto accompaniment chords are recognized
regardless of the split point or where chords
are played on the keyboard.
This is normal if the fingering mode is set to “Full Keyboard” or “AI Full Keyboard.”
If either of these is selected, chords are recognized over the entire range of the
keyboard, irrespective of the split point setting. If desired, select a different
fingering mode (page 62).
• Certain notes sound at the wrong pitch.
The Scale parameter has probably been set to something other than “Equal,”
changing the tuning system of the keyboard. Make sure “Equal” is selected as
the Scale in the Scale Tune page (page 124).
• Some channels do not properly play back
when playing back song data.
Make sure that playback of the relevant channel(s) is turned on (page 76).
• The Harmony function does not operate.
Harmony cannot be used with the Full Keyboard or AI Full Keyboard fingering
modes. Select an appropriate fingering mode (page 62).
• The microphone input signal cannot be
recorded.
This is normal; recording the audio input of the microphone is not possible.
• MIDI data is not transmitted or received via
the MIDI terminals, even when MIDI cables
are connected properly.
Make sure the HOST SELECT switch is set to “MIDI” (page 144). The MIDI
terminals cannot be used for the other switch settings.
• When a voice is changed, the previously
selected effect is changed.
Each voice has its own suitable preset values which are automatically recalled
when the corresponding Voice Set parameters are turned on (page 132).
• There is a slight difference in sound quality
between notes played on the keyboard.
• Some voices have a looping sound.
• Some noise or vibrato is noticeable at higher
pitches, depending upon the voice.
This is normal and is a result of the PF-1000’s sampling system.
• Some voices will jump an octave in pitch
when played in the upper or lower registers.
This is normal. Some voices have a pitch limit which, when reached, causes this
type of pitch shift.
• Even though a Registration Memory setting
containing a User voice is selected, the Open/
Save display shows a Preset voice.
This is normal; even with the Preset voice shown, the actual sounding voice is
the selected User voice. When a User voice is registered to the User drive or
floppy disk, the actual registered is: 1) the source Preset voice, and 2) the
parameter settings as set in the Sound Creator. When you recall a Registration
Memory setting containing a User voice, the PF-1000 selects the Preset voice
(on which the User voice is based), then applies the relevant parameter settings
to it — so that your original User voice is sounded.
• Disk save operations take a long time.
This is normal. Keep in mind that it takes approximately 1 minute to save 1
megabyte of data to a floppy disk.
• The voice produces excessive noise.
Certain voices may produce noise, depending on the Harmonic Content and/or
Brightness settings in the FILTER page of the Mixing Console display
(page 118).
• The sound is distorted or noisy.
• The volume may be turned up too high. Make sure all relevant volume settings
are appropriate.
• This may be caused by the effects. Try canceling all unnecessary effects,
especially distortion-type effects (page 119).
• Some filter resonance settings in the Custom Voice Creator display (page 88)
can result in distorted sound. Adjust these settings if necessary.
• A strange “flanging” or “doubling” sound
occurs. Also, the sound is slightly different
each time the keys are played.
Both the Main and Layer parts are set to “ON,” and both parts are set to play the
same voice. Set the Layer part to “OFF” (page 56) or change the voice for each
part (page 54).
PF-1000
153
Specifications
: available
PF-1000
Sound Source
AWM Dynamic Stereo Sampling
320 ✕ 240 dots backlit graphic LCD
Display
Keyboard
Voice
88 keys (A-1 - C7)
Polyphony (max)
96
Voice Selection
308 voices + 480 XG voices + 16 Drum Kits
Regular Voice
287
Sweet Voice
8
Cool Voice
2
Live Voice
1
Natural Voice
21
Sound creator
Effects
Effect Blocks
Effect Types
Reverb
2
Chorus
2
DSP
2
Brilliance
1
REVERB1
28+3 User
REVERB2
5
CHORUS1
21+3 User
CHORUS2
3
DSP1
101+3 User
DSP2
12
Brilliance
Accompaniment
Style
5
Accompaniment Styles
194
Session Styles
12
Pianist Styles
36
Piano Combo Styles
Fingering
17
Single Finger, Fingered, Fingered On Bass, Multi Finger, AI Fingered,
Full Keyboard, AI Full Keyboard
Style Creator
OTS (One Touch Setting)
Accompaniment Style
OTS link
Music Finder
Approximately 2500 records
Edit
Song
Format
SMF (Format 0,1), ESEQ
Preset Songs
Lyrics
Score
Recording
Quick Recording, Multi Recording, Step Recording, Song Editing
Record Channels
Memory
Device
Floppy Disk (2HD,2DD)
Flash Memory (internal)
Flash Availability
Tempo
16
1MB
Song (SMF), Style (SFF), Registration, Voice, etc.
Tempo Range
5 - 500
Tap Tempo
Metronome
Sound
154
PF-1000
Bell on/off, Human Voices (5 languages)
Specifications
PF-1000
Registration
Memory
Buttons
8
Regist Sequence
Freeze
Others
Demo
Function, Voice, Style
Language
6 languages (English, Japanese, German, French, Spanish, Italian)
Help
Direct Access
Piano setting button (including Piano Lock)
Master Volume
Fade In/Out
Transpose
Keyboard/Song/Master
Tuning
Tuning Curve
Flat/Stretch (Natural Piano Voice only)
Scale
Equal Temperament, Pure Major/Pure Minor, Pythagorean, Mean Tone,
Werckmeister/Kirnberger, Arabic 1/2
Touch Response
5 level
PHONES ✕ 2, MIDI (THRU, OUT, IN), TO HOST,
HOST SELECT, AUX PEDAL, AUX IN (L/L+R),
AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED) (L/R), AUX OUT (L/L+R)
Jacks/Connectors
MIC (INPUT VOLUME, MIC/LINE IN),VIDEO OUT
Pedals
Number of Pedals
3
Pedal Functions
Amplifiers/
Speakers
VOLUME, SUSTAIN, SOSTENUTO, SOFT, GLIDE, PORTAMENTO,
PITCHBEND, MODULATION, DSP VARIATION, VIBROTOR ON/OFF,
SONG START/STOP, STYLE START/STOP, etc.
Amplifiers
30 W ✕ 2
Speakers
(16 cm + 5 cm) ✕ 2
Dimensions [W ✕ D ✕ H]
(without music rest, pedal unit)
main unit
1430 ✕ 507 ✕ 165 mm [56-5/16" ✕ 19-15/16" ✕ 6-1/2"]
main unit with
keyboard stand
1430 ✕ 507 ✕ 782 mm [56-5/16" ✕ 19-15/16" ✕ 30-7/8"]
Weight
(without music rest, pedal unit)
main unit
31 Kg [68 lbs., 5 oz]
main unit with
keyboard stand
43 Kg [94 lbs., 13 oz]
* Specifications and descriptions in this owner's manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to
change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not
be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer.
PF-1000
155
Index
Numerics
1 - 16 ................................................................................. 103
[1▲▼] - [8▲▼] buttons ........................................... 18, 38–45
A
[A] - [J] buttons............................................................... 18, 40
[AC INLET] ..................................................................... 16, 19
Accessories ............................................................................ 6
Accompaniment style parts................................................... 92
[ACMP] button ............................................................... 18, 60
Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices .............. 116
Adjusting the display contrast ............................................... 17
Adjusting the Effects ........................................................... 119
Adjusting the Tempo ............................................................ 50
Adjusting the Volume Balance ............................................. 61
Adjusting the Volume Balance / Muting Specific Channels ... 76
Adjusting values ................................................................... 46
AI ......................................................................................... 62
AI FINGERED ....................................................................... 62
AI FULL KEYBOARD ............................................................ 62
Append ................................................................................ 71
Applying Voice Effects.......................................................... 57
Appropriate Panel Setting for the Selected Style.................... 67
Arabic ................................................................................ 125
Arranging the Style Pattern ................................................... 64
Assembling an Accompaniment Style ................................. 110
Assembling the keyboard stand .......................................... 150
ATTACK ............................................................................... 88
AUTO .................................................................................. 20
Auto Revoice...................................................................... 117
[AUTO FILLIN] button.................................................... 18, 66
Automatically Changing One Touch Settings
with the Sections............................................................... 68
AUX IN [L / L+R] [R] jacks............................................ 19, 142
AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED) [L] [R] jacks.......................... 19, 142
AUX OUT [L / L+R] [R] jacks........................................ 19, 142
[AUX PEDAL] jack........................................................ 19, 143
B
[BACK] button .......................................................... 18, 40, 46
[BALANCE] button ......................................................... 18, 61
Bar Clear ............................................................................ 113
Bar Copy ............................................................................ 113
Base note ........................................................................... 124
Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data .......................... 38
Bass...................................................................................... 92
BEAT .............................................................................. 70, 71
[BREAK] button .............................................................. 18, 64
BRIGHTNESS ....................................................................... 88
C
Calling Up Ideal Setups for Your Music ................................ 69
Cent ................................................................................... 124
Change the Rhythmic Feel.................................................. 111
Changing Pitch-related Settings .......................................... 118
Changing the Automatically Selected Voice Settings .......... 132
Changing the Icon ................................................................ 46
Changing the Tone of the Voice ......................................... 118
Changing the Touch Sensitivity and Transpose ................... 130
Channel ................................................. 61, 76, 100, 113, 126
Channel Messages .............................................................. 146
156
PF-1000
Channel Muting ....................................................................61
[CHANNEL ON / OFF] button ..................................18, 61, 76
Channel Transpose .............................................................102
CHD ...................................................................................104
Chord ...................................................................................92
Chord Detect ......................................................................136
Chord Events.......................................................................104
Chord Fingering ............................................................62, 128
Chord Tutor ........................................................................128
Chord Types Recognized in the Fingered Mode ....................63
Chorus ................................................................................121
Clock ..................................................................................135
COMMON ...........................................................................87
Compatible Song Types ........................................................73
CONFIG 1 ..........................................................................137
CONFIG 2 ..........................................................................138
Connect the power cord .......................................................16
Connecting Audio & Video Devices....................................142
Connecting external MIDI devices ......................................143
Connecting the Microphone or Guitar ................................141
Connecting to a Computer ..................................................143
Controller ...........................................................................128
Converting into Kanji (Japanese language) ............................45
Cool! ....................................................................................55
COPY ...................................................................................43
Copying and Formatting Disks ............................................139
Copying Files/Folders............................................................43
Copying from Disk to Disk..................................................139
Creating Accompaniment Styles..........................................106
Current Memory ...................................................................39
Customizing the Event List — Filter.....................................105
CUT......................................................................................42
D
Damper pedal.................................................................19, 58
Data Compatibility..............................................................148
[DATA ENTRY] dial ........................................................18, 46
Data Types in the MIDI TRANSMIT/RECEIVE Display .........135
DECAY .................................................................................88
DELETE .................................................................................43
Delete.................................................................................101
DELETE RECORD..................................................................71
Deleting Files/Folders............................................................43
[DEMO] button.........................................................14, 18, 52
DEPTH..................................................................................88
Detailed Settings for Notation ...............................................79
[DIGITAL RECORDING] button........................14, 18, 90, 106
[DIRECT ACCESS] button................................................18, 47
Direct Access Chart ..............................................................48
Disk ....................................................................................139
Disk format .........................................................................148
Disk Orchestra Collection.....................................................19
Displaying Music Notation ...................................................78
Displaying the Lyrics.............................................................81
Displaying Upper Level pages...............................................44
DOC...................................................................................149
Drum ....................................................................................55
[DSP] button ...........................................................18, 57, 121
Dynamics ...........................................................................112
E
ECHO ...........................................................................58, 132
Index
EDIT ................................................................................... 109
Edit the Created Accompaniment Style ............................... 111
Editing a Recorded Song..................................................... 100
Editing Channel-related Parameters .................................... 100
Editing Chord Events .......................................................... 104
Editing Note Events ............................................................ 103
Editing Records .................................................................... 71
Editing System Events ......................................................... 104
Editing the Channel Data.................................................... 113
Editing Voices ...................................................................... 85
EFFECT ................................................................................. 89
Effect Block ........................................................................ 120
Effect Structure ................................................................... 121
Effects................................................................................. 119
EG ........................................................................................ 88
Embellish and enhance your melodies
— with the automatic Harmony and Echo effects.............. 29
END Mark ............................................................................ 98
ENDING .............................................................................. 66
[ENDING / rit.] button .............................................. 18, 30, 65
[ENTER] button .............................................................. 18, 46
Entering Characters............................................................... 45
Entering Chords and Sections (Chord Step) ........................... 97
Entering miscellaneous characters (marks) ............................ 45
Entering numbers ................................................................. 45
Entering special character marks
(umlaut, accent, Japanese “ ” and “ ”) ......................... 45
Entering Your Name and Language Preference ................... 140
Equal Temperament............................................................ 125
ESEQ .................................................................................. 148
Example Keyboard Data ..................................................... 146
[EXIT] button .................................................................. 18, 40
exit from small pop-up windows .......................................... 40
[EXTRA TRACKS (STYLE)] button .................................... 18, 77
H
F
Layer.....................................................................................56
Layering Two Different Voices ..............................................56
LCD ......................................................................................15
[LCD CONTRAST] knob .................................................18, 17
Left .......................................................................................57
LEFT CH. ..............................................................................79
[LEFT HOLD] button.......................................................18, 58
Left pedal........................................................................19, 58
Live! .....................................................................................55
Local Control ......................................................................134
Loop recording ...................................................................106
Lyrics ............................................................................81, 105
Fade In Time, Fade Out Time, Fade Out Hold Time ........... 137
[FADE IN / OUT] button................................................. 18, 65
FAVORITE ............................................................................ 71
[FF] button ..................................................................... 18, 76
File ....................................................................................... 39
File/Folder-related Operations .............................................. 41
Files/folders in a floppy disk ................................................. 42
Fill........................................................................................ 66
Filter..................................................................... 88, 105, 118
FINGERED ........................................................................... 62
FINGERED ON BASS............................................................ 62
First Key On ......................................................................... 99
FLOPPY DISK drive .............................................................. 39
Floppy disk drive .............................................................. 18, 6
Foot Controller ............................................................. 58, 143
Footswitch.................................................................... 58, 143
Formatting a Disk ............................................................... 139
[FREEZE] button...................................................... 19, 84, 131
FULL KEYBOARD................................................................. 62
[FUNCTION] button .................................................... 18, 122
G
Gate Time ............................................................................ 95
GENRE ........................................................................... 70, 72
GENRE NAME ...................................................................... 72
GM System Level 1....................................................... 19, 149
Groove ............................................................................... 111
Groove parameters ............................................................. 111
Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disk.........6
Harmonic Content ................................................................88
HARMONY ............................................................58, 89, 132
Harmony Assignments ........................................................133
Harmony Types ..................................................................133
[HARMONY / ECHO] button ..........................................18, 58
Headphones .................................................................17, 141
Help messages can be displayed in any one of the
following languages...........................................................49
[HELP] button .................................................................18, 49
High Key.............................................................................115
[HOST SELECT] switch .................................................19, 143
Hz ......................................................................................124
I
ICON SELECT .......................................................................46
[INPUT VOLUME] knob ...............................................19, 141
Inputting and Editing Lyrics.................................................105
Instant Selection of Displays .................................................47
INTRO ..................................................................................66
[INTRO] button.........................................................18, 31, 64
K
KEY SIGNATURE ..................................................................79
Keyboard Percussion.............................................................55
Keyboard stand (assembly)..................................................150
Keyboard Touch .................................................................130
Keyboard/Panel...................................................................130
KEYWORD .....................................................................70, 71
Kirnberger...........................................................................125
L
M
MAIN A/B/C/D......................................................................64
MAIN [A] button.............................................................18, 64
MAIN [B] button .............................................................18, 64
MAIN [C] button.............................................................18, 64
MAIN [D] button ............................................................18, 64
Maintaining Panel Settings ..................................................131
Making Global and Other Important Settings ......................122
Making Overall System Settings (Local Control, Clock, etc.) ....134
Making Settings for Fade In/Out, Metronome,
Parameter Lock, and Tap .................................................137
Making Settings for the Display, Speaker System,
and Voice Number Indication .........................................138
Making Settings for the Pedals.............................................128
Making Settings for the Pedals and Keyboard ......................128
Making Style File Format Settings........................................114
Master Tune........................................................................124
[MASTER VOLUME] dial ................................................18, 17
Mean-Tone .........................................................................125
PF-1000
157
Index
Measure/Beat/Clock ............................................................. 95
[MEMORY] button.......................................................... 19, 82
Message Switch .................................................................. 135
Messages ................................................................................ 8
Metronome ........................................................................ 137
METRONOME [START / STOP] button ........................... 18, 50
[MIC LINE] switch ........................................................ 19, 141
[MIC / LINE IN] jack ..................................................... 19, 141
MIDI .................................................................................. 134
MIDI [THRU] [OUT] [IN] terminals.............................. 19, 143
MIDI channels.................................................................... 147
MIDI IN.............................................................................. 143
MIDI OUT.......................................................................... 143
MIDI Receive Parts ............................................................. 136
MIDI SET UP ...................................................................... 140
MIDI terminals ................................................................... 143
MIDI THRU........................................................................ 143
Mix .................................................................................... 101
[MIXING CONSOLE] button......................................... 18, 116
[MONO] button ............................................................. 18, 58
Moving Files/Folders ............................................................ 42
MULTI FINGER .................................................................... 62
Multi Recording ................................................................... 92
[MUSIC FINDER] button .................................... 15, 18, 33, 69
Music Finder Record Edit ..................................................... 71
Music Finder Search ............................................................. 70
Music rest............................................................................. 16
Muting Specific Parts ............................................................ 77
N
NAME .................................................................................. 41
Naming Files/Folders ............................................................ 41
Natural Voices ..................................................................... 86
Natural!................................................................................ 55
NEW (FOLDER) .................................................................... 44
NEW RECORD ..................................................................... 72
[NEXT] button .......................................................... 18, 40, 46
Normal................................................................................. 99
Note Events ........................................................................ 103
Note for Windows users (regarding MIDI driver)................. 143
Note Limit .......................................................................... 115
NOTE NAME........................................................................ 80
NTR (Note Transposition Rule) ........................................... 114
NTT (Note Transposition Table).......................................... 115
O
OCTAVE ............................................................................ 118
One Touch Setting ............................................................... 32
ONE TOUCH SETTING [1] - [4] buttons .................. 19, 67, 68
One-touch Piano Play .......................................................... 55
[ON / OFF] button (POWER) .......................................... 19, 17
Open/Save displays .............................................................. 38
Organizing Files by Creating a New Folder .......................... 44
Other Parameters in the Basic Display................................ 109
Other Playback-related Operations....................................... 76
Other Settings..................................................................... 137
[OTS LINK] button.......................................................... 18, 68
Outputting the sound of an external device through the built-in
speakers of the PF-1000 .................................................. 142
Overdub recording ............................................................. 106
Owner................................................................................ 140
P
Pad....................................................................................... 92
Parameter ........................................................................... 114
Parameter Lock................................................................... 138
158
PF-1000
PASTE .............................................................................42, 43
Pedal ..................................................................................128
Pedal (Center) .......................................................................58
Pedal (Left)............................................................................58
Pedal (Right) .........................................................................58
[PEDAL] jack ........................................................................19
Pedal unit .............................................................................16
Pedal-controllable Functions...............................................129
[PHONES] jacks............................................................19, 141
Phrase...................................................................................92
Phrase Mark..................................................................76, 126
[PIANO] button ........................................................15, 19, 55
PIANO (SOUND CREATOR).................................................87
Piano Lock function ..............................................................55
PITCH BEND RANGE .........................................................118
Pitch settings for each scale ................................................125
Playback of Songs .................................................................21
Playing a style.................................................................28, 59
Playing a Style’s Rhythm Channels only................................61
Playing Along with the PF-1000............................................36
Playing and Practicing with the Songs...................................36
Playing Back Songs on Disk ..................................................76
Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands.........27
Playing Fill-in patterns automatically when changing
accompaniment sections ...................................................66
Playing Several Sounds Simultaneously.................................56
Playing Styles........................................................................28
Playing the Demos..........................................................20, 52
Playing the Internal Songs .....................................................74
Playing the sounds of the PF-1000 through an external
audio system, and recording the sounds to an external
recorder...........................................................................142
Playing Two Voices Simultaneously......................................26
Playing Voices ......................................................................25
PORTAMENTO TIME..........................................................118
PRESET drive.........................................................................39
Preset MIDI Templates ........................................................134
Punch In/Out ........................................................................99
Pure Major..........................................................................125
Pure Minor..........................................................................125
Pythagorean........................................................................125
Q
QUANTIZE ...........................................................................79
Quantize.....................................................................100, 113
Quantize Size .....................................................................100
Quick Recording...................................................................91
Quick Start..........................................................................126
R
Realtime Recording.............................................................108
Realtime Recording Characteristics .....................................106
[REC] button ...................................................................18, 90
Rec Mode .............................................................................99
Recalling a Registration Memory Setup .................................84
Recalling the Registered Settings ...........................................84
Receive...............................................................................136
Receive Transpose ..............................................................135
Receiving MIDI Data ..........................................................136
record ...................................................................................69
Recording .............................................................................37
Recording Chord Changes for the Auto Accompaniment ......97
Recording Individual Notes...................................................94
Recording Melodies ..............................................................96
Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs ................90
Registering Panel Setups .......................................................82
Index
Registering the Panel Controls in One Touch Setting ............ 68
REGISTRATION BANK ......................................................... 83
REGISTRATION EDIT display ............................................... 83
Registration Memory ............................................................ 82
REGISTRATION MEMORY [1] – [8] buttons ................... 19, 82
Registration Sequence ........................................................ 131
Regular Voices ..................................................................... 86
RELEASE ............................................................................... 88
Remove Event .................................................................... 113
Repeat Playback of a Specific Range .................................... 77
[REPEAT] button ............................................................. 18, 77
Replace ................................................................................ 71
Resonance............................................................................ 88
Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings
of the PF-1000 ................................................................ 140
[REVERB] button............................................................. 18, 57
Reverb................................................................................ 121
[REW] button ................................................................. 18, 76
Rhythm ................................................................................ 92
RIGHT CH. .......................................................................... 79
Root ................................................................................... 136
RTR (Retrigger Rule) ........................................................... 115
S
SAVE .................................................................................... 44
Save ............................................................................... 38, 44
Saving Files .......................................................................... 44
Saving Your Registration Memory Setups.............................. 83
Scale .................................................................................. 125
Scale Tune ......................................................................... 124
Score .................................................................................... 78
Searching the Ideal Setups .................................................... 70
Searching the Music Finder Records ..................................... 34
Section button indications — [BREAK], [INTRO], [MAIN],
[ENDING] buttons ............................................................ 64
sections ................................................................................ 30
Select the Recording Options: Starting, Stopping, Punching In/
Out ................................................................................... 99
Selecting a Scale ................................................................ 124
Selecting a Voice.................................................................. 54
Selecting Files and Folders ................................................... 40
Selecting Intro and Ending Types .......................................... 66
Selecting items ..................................................................... 46
Selecting the Freeze Settings................................................. 84
Sequence Format................................................................ 148
sequencer........................................................................... 146
Set Up ................................................................................ 102
Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters ............... 127
Setting Chord Channels ...................................................... 136
Setting Harmony and Echo ................................................. 132
Setting Root Note Channels ................................................ 136
Setting Separate Voices for the Left and Right Sections
of the Keyboard ................................................................ 57
Setting Song-related Parameters.......................................... 126
Setting the Fingering Method .............................................. 128
Setting the Level Balance and Voice ................................... 117
Setting the MIDI Parameters ............................................... 134
Setting the Registration Sequence, Freeze, and Voice Set ... 131
Setting the volume................................................................ 17
SFX....................................................................................... 55
Showing the PF-1000 Display on a TV ....................... 133, 142
Simultaneously Playing a Song and an Accompaniment Style ....75
SINGLE FINGER ................................................................... 62
SMF (Standard MIDI File) ................................................... 148
Song ............................................................................... 14, 73
SONG [START / STOP] button........................................ 18, 74
SONG AUTO REVOICE ..................................................... 117
Song Book ......................................................................22, 73
Song Creator .........................................................................90
Song Playback ..........................................................21, 73, 74
Song Recording.....................................................................90
Song Settings.......................................................................126
Sostenuto pedal ..............................................................19, 58
SOUND (SOUND CREATOR)...............................................87
SOUND CREATOR Parameters.............................................86
[SOUND CREATOR] button ...........................................18, 85
Source Root/Chord..............................................................114
Specifying the Order for Calling Up Registration Memory
Presets .............................................................................131
SPEED...................................................................................88
Split Point ...........................................................................127
Step Record ..........................................................................94
Step Record (Chord)..............................................................97
Step Record (Note)................................................................96
Step Recording....................................................................109
Stopping the Style Playback While Releasing Keys................65
Style................................................................................14, 59
STYLE buttons ...........................................................18, 28, 59
STYLE CONTROL [START / STOP] button.................18, 28, 60
Style Creator .......................................................................106
Style File .......................................................................19, 148
Style File Format .................................................................107
Style Sections........................................................................30
Style Setting ........................................................................127
sustain ..................................................................................88
Sweet!...................................................................................55
[SYNC.START] button .....................................................18, 60
[SYNC.STOP] button.......................................................18, 65
SYS/EX. (System Exclusive) ..................................................104
System ................................................................................134
System Events .....................................................................104
System Messages.................................................................147
System Reset .......................................................................140
SYSTEM SET UP..................................................................140
T
Tap Count...........................................................................138
[TAP TEMPO] button ......................................................18, 51
TEMPO [–] [+] buttons....................................................18, 50
TEMPO FROM......................................................................70
Tempo Indications — MAIN Display ....................................51
TEMPO TO ...........................................................................70
[TO HOST] terminal .......................................15, 19, 143, 144
[TOP] button...................................................................18, 76
[TRACK 1 (R)] button ......................................................18, 77
[TRACK 2 (L)] button.......................................................18, 77
Transmit..............................................................................135
Transmit Clock....................................................................135
Transmitting MIDI Data ......................................................135
TRANSPOSE [–] [+] buttons ..........................................18, 130
Transpose Assign ................................................................130
Tune ...................................................................................118
TUNING.............................................................................118
Tuning the Overall Pitch .....................................................124
U
UP ........................................................................................44
USER drive............................................................................39
USER EFFECT..............................................................120, 140
Using the USB terminal on your computer
with a USB/MIDI interface...............................................145
Using Your PF-1000 with Other Devices ............................141
Utility .................................................................................137
PF-1000
159
Index
V
[VARIATION] button ...................................................... 18, 57
Velocity........................................................................ 95, 112
Velocity Change ................................................................. 113
VIBRATO ............................................................................. 88
[VIDEO OUT] jack ............................................... 19, 133, 142
Voice Allocation Format..................................................... 149
VOICE buttons ......................................................... 15, 19, 54
Voice Characteristics ............................................................ 55
Voice Effects......................................................................... 57
VOICE PART ON / OFF [LAYER] button ......................... 18, 56
VOICE PART ON / OFF [LEFT] button ............................ 18, 56
Voice Set ............................................................................ 132
Volume/Voice .................................................................... 117
W
Werckmeister ..................................................................... 125
What You Can Do With MIDI ............................................ 147
What’s MIDI? ..................................................................... 145
X
XF ................................................................................ 19, 148
XG ............................................................................... 19, 149
160
PF-1000
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION RELATING TO PERSONAL INJURY, ELECTRICAL SHOCK,
AND FIRE HAZARD POSSIBILITIES HAS BEEN INCLUDED IN THIS LIST.
WARNING- When using any electrical or electronic product,
basic precautions should always be followed. These precautions
include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
Read all Safety Instructions, Installation Instructions, Special Message Section items, and any Assembly Instructions
found in this manual BEFORE making any connections, including connection to the main supply.
2.
Main Power Supply Verification: Yamaha products are
manufactured specifically for the supply voltage in the area
where they are to be sold. If you should move, or if any doubt
exists about the supply voltage in your area, please contact your
dealer for supply voltage verification and (if applicable) instructions. The required supply voltage is printed on the name plate.
For name plate location, please refer to the graphic found in the
Special Message Section of this manual.
3.
This product may be equipped with a polarized plug (one
blade wider than the other). If you are unable to insert the plug
into the outlet, turn the plug over and try again. If the problem
persists, contact an electrician to have the obsolete outlet
replaced. Do NOT defeat the safety purpose of the plug.
4.
Some electronic products utilize external power supplies
or adapters. Do NOT connect this type of product to any power
supply or adapter other than one described in the owners manual,
on the name plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha.
5.
WARNING: Do not place this product or any other
objects on the power cord or place it in a position where anyone
could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended! If you must use an extension cord, the minimum wire
size for a 25’ cord (or less) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the
AWG number, the larger the current handling capacity. For
longer extension cords, consult a local electrician.
6.
Ventilation: Electronic products, unless specifically
designed for enclosed installations, should be placed in locations
that do not interfere with proper ventilation. If instructions for
enclosed installations are not provided, it must be assumed that
unobstructed ventilation is required.
7.
Temperature considerations: Electronic products should
be installed in locations that do not significantly contribute to
their operating temperature. Placement of this product close to
heat sources such as; radiators, heat registers and other devices
that produce heat should be avoided.
8.
This product was NOT designed for use in wet/damp locations and should not be used near water or exposed to rain.
Examples of wet/damp locations are; near a swimming pool,
spa, tub, sink, or wet basement.
9.
This product should be used only with the components
supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by the
manufacturer. If a cart, rack, or stand is used, please observe all
safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory
product.
10.
The power supply cord (plug) should be disconnected
from the outlet when electronic products are to be left unused for
extended periods of time. Cords should also be disconnected
when there is a high probability of lightning and/or electrical
storm activity.
11. Care should be taken that objects do not fall and liquids are
not spilled into the enclosure through any openings that may exist.
12.
Electrical/electronic products should be serviced by a
qualified service person when:
a. The power supply cord has been damaged; or
b. Objects have fallen, been inserted, or liquids have been
spilled into the enclosure through openings; or
c. The product has been exposed to rain: or
d. The product dose not operate, exhibits a marked change
in performance; or
e. The product has been dropped, or the enclosure of the
product has been damaged.
13. Do not attempt to service this product beyond that
described in the user-maintenance instructions. All other servicing should be referred to qualified service personnel.
14.
This product, either alone or in combination with an
amplifier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss.
DO NOT operate for a long period of time at a high volume level
or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing
loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist.
IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period
before damage occurs.
15.
Some Yamaha products may have benches and/or accessory
mounting fixtures that are either supplied as a part of the product
or as optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be
dealer assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches are
stable and any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well
secured BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are
designed for seating only. No other uses are recommended.
PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL
92-469-2
PF-1000
161
FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)
1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!
This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by
Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to
use the product.
2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality
shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product
MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA.
3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations,
Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with
these requirements provides a reasonable level of
assurance that your use of this product in a residential
environment will not result in harmful interference with
other electronic devices. This equipment generates/
uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used
according to the instructions found in the users manual,
may cause interference harmful to the operation of
other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur
in all installations. If this product is found to be the
source of interference, which can be determined by
turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate
the problem by using one of the following measures:
Relocate either this product or the device that is being
affected by the interference.
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit
breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient
the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon
lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable.
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized
to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate
the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600
Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620
The above statements apply ONLY to those products
distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its
subsidiaries.
* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.
IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM
Connecting the Plug and Cord
IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in
accordance with the following code:
BLUE
: NEUTRAL
BROWN : LIVE
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured makings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to
the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured
BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to
the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured
RED.
Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug.
(2 wires)
• This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha-Kemble Music
(U.K.) Ltd.
CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH
WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT.
ATTENTION: POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS ÉLECTRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS LARGE DE
LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE CORRESPONDANTE DE LA
PRISE ET POUSSER JUSQU’AU FOND.
(polarity)
• This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Canada Music
Ltd.
• Ceci ne s’applique qu’aux produits distribués par Yamaha Canada
Musique Ltée.
162
PF-1000
(class B)
For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha or the
authorized distributor listed below.
Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou
au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante.
NORTH AMERICA
CANADA
Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.
135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,
M1S 3R1, Canada
Tel: 416-298-1311
U.S.A.
Yamaha Corporation of America
6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,
U.S.A.
Tel: 714-522-9011
CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA
MEXICO
Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten
Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen
Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.
Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana
o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.
ASIA
ITALY
Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.,
Combo Division
Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy
Tel: 02-935-771
SPAIN/PORTUGAL
Yamaha-Hazen Electronica Musical, S.A.
Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230
Las Rozas (Madrid) Spain
Tel: 91-201-0700
GREECE
Philippe Nakas S.A.
Navarinou Street 13, P.Code 10680, Athens, Greece
Tel: 01-364-7111
SWEDEN
Yamaha de Mexico S.A. De C.V.,
Departamento de ventas
Javier Rojo Gomez No.1149, Col. Gpe Del
Moral, Deleg. Iztapalapa, 09300 Mexico, D.F.
Tel: 686-00-33
BRAZIL
Yamaha Scandinavia AB
J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1
Box 30053
S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden
Tel: 031 89 34 00
ARGENTINA
Yamaha de Panamá S.A. Sucursal de Argentina
Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053,
Buenos Aires, Argentina
Tel: 1-4371-7021
PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN
AMERICAN COUNTRIES/
CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha de Panamá S.A.
Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,
Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,
Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá
Tel: 507-269-5311
EUROPE
THE UNITED KINGDOM
Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd.
Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,
MK7 8BL, England
Tel: 01908-366700
IRELAND
Danfay Ltd.
61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin
Tel: 01-2859177
GERMANY/SWITZERLAND
Yamaha Europa GmbH.
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen,
F.R. of Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
AUSTRIA
Yamaha Music Austria
Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien Austria
Tel: 01-60203900
THE NETHERLANDS
Yamaha Music Nederland
Kanaalweg 18G, 3526KL, Utrecht, The Netherlands
Tel: 030-2828411
BELGIUM
Yamaha Music Belgium
Keiberg Imperiastraat 8, 1930 Zaventem, Belgium
Tel: 02-7258220
FRANCE
Yamaha Musique France,
Division Professionnelle
BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France
Tel: 01-64-61-4000
YS Copenhagen Liaison Office
Generatorvej 8B
DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark
Tel: 44 92 49 00
FINLAND
F-Musiikki Oy
Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260,
SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland
Tel: 09 618511
Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB
Grini Næringspark 1
N-1345 Østerås, Norway
Tel: 67 16 77 70
ICELAND
Skifan HF
Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120
IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland
Tel: 525 5000
PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor)
PT. Nusantik
Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot
Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia
Tel: 21-520-2577
KOREA
Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.
Tong-Yang Securities Bldg. 16F 23-8 Yoido-dong,
Youngdungpo-ku, Seoul, Korea
Tel: 02-3770-0661
Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd.
Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,
Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia
Tel: 3-703-0900
PHILIPPINES
Yupangco Music Corporation
339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO,
Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines
Tel: 819-7551
Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd.
11 Ubi Road #06-00, Meiban Industrial Building,
Singapore
Tel: 65-747-4374
TAIWAN
Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.
10F, 150, Tun-Hwa Northroad,
Taipei, Taiwan, R.O.C.
Tel: 02-2713-8999
THAILAND
OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Europa GmbH.
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen,
F.R. of Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
AFRICA
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: 053-460-2312
MIDDLE EAST
TURKEY/CYPRUS
Yamaha Europa GmbH.
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen,
F.R. of Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
Yamaha Music Gulf FZE
LB21-128 Jebel Ali Freezone
P.O.Box 17328, Dubai, U.A.E.
Tel: 971-4-881-5868
INDONESIA
SINGAPORE
NORWAY
OTHER COUNTRIES
Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.
11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,
Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong
Tel: 2737-7688
MALAYSIA
DENMARK
Yamaha Musical do Brasil LTDA.
Av. Rebouças 2636, São Paulo, Brasil
Tel: 011-853-1377
HONG KONG
Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.
121/60-61 RS Tower 17th Floor,
Ratchadaphisek RD., Dindaeng,
Bangkok 10320, Thailand
Tel: 02-641-2951
THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA
AND OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: 053-460-2317
OCEANIA
AUSTRALIA
Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.
Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Victoria 3006, Australia
Tel: 3-9693-5111
NEW ZEALAND
Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd.
146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa,
Auckland, New Zealand
Tel: 9-634-0099
COUNTRIES AND TRUST
TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: 053-460-2312
HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: 053-460-2445
SY23
PF-1000
163
Owner's Manual
Yamaha Web Site (English only)
www.yamahasynth.com
Before using the PF-1000, be sure to read “ Precautions„ on pages 3-4.
IMPORTANT
Yamaha Manual Library
http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/
This document is printed on recycled chlorine free (ECF) paper with soy ink.
Check your power supply
Make sure that your local AC mains voltage matches the voltage specified on the name plate
on the bottom panel. In some areas a voltage selector may be provided on the bottom panel of
the main keyboard unit. Make sure that the voltage selector is set for the voltage in your area. The
voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. To change the setting use a
"minus" screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage appears next to the
pointer on the panel.
M.D.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation
C 2002 Yamaha Corporation
V939640 205APAP1.3-01A0 Printed in Japan
DIC 338
Download PDF